Home

Cadillac 2006 STS-V Automobile User Manual

1. stays on after you start your vehicle Passenger Passenger Airbag Status Airbag Status Indicator United Indicator Canada The airbag readiness light should flash for a few States seconds when you turn the vehicle on If the light does not come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to The indicator next to the passenger airbag status warn you if there is a problem indicator lights is the passenger safety belt reminder If there is a problem with the airbag system in your light See Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light vehicle the Service airbag message will appear on the on page 3 60 for more information on that indicator DIC display See DIC Warnings and Messages on When the vehicle is running the passenger airbag page 3 79 for more information status indicator will light ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off for several seconds as a system check Then after several more seconds the status indicator will light either ON or OFF or either the on or off symbol to let you know the status of the right front passenger s frontal airbag 3 61 If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator it means that the right front passenger s frontal airbag is enabled may inflate A CAUTION If the on indicator comes on when you have a rear facing child restraint installed in the right front passenger s seat it means that the passenger sensing system has not
2. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator United States Passenger Airbag Status Indicator Canada The passenger sensing system will turn off the right front passenger s frontal airbag under certain conditions The driver s airbag and the side airbags are not part of the passenger sensing system The passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the right front passenger s seat The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the passenger s frontal airbag should be enabled may inflate or not Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat General Motors recommends that child restraints be secured in a rear seat including an infant riding in a rear facing infant seat a child riding in a forward facing child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a rear facing child restraint A label on your sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys A CAUTION A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag Even though the passenger sensing
3. ceeeeeeeeeneeeeeneees 6 4 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts 6 14 Additional Required Services ceeeeeee eee 6 6 Engine Drive Belt Routing STS V 05 6 15 Maintenance Footnotes cceeeeeeeeeeeee eters 6 7 Maintenance Record sceeeeeeeeeeeee een eeeees 6 16 6 1 Maintenance Schedule Introduction Important Keep engine oil at the proper level and change as recommended Protection Plan Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer for details Maintenance Requirements Notice Maintenance intervals checks inspections replacement parts and recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good working condition Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled maintenance may not be covered by warranty 6 2 Your Vehicle and the Environment Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle in good working condition but also helps the environment All recommended maintenance is important Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from your vehicle To help protect our environment and to keep your vehicle in good condition be sure to maintain your vehi
4. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eres 5 41 Drive Belt Routing 0 c eeceeeeeee eee ain 6 15 Foa L Liah 3 71 Engine Compartment Overview cscscscss0 5 12 Og Lamp Light cceceeeeeee eee eeeeeee eee eeeeees Eyles ic tacaec acdc Yack dice uee naa caters nen Tire tate 2 39 FOG Lamp iamaniere S erna A AEE 3 37 Ol a a e e AAS One 5 48 Forward Collision Alert FAC System 0 4 3 9 Oil Life System aeeoe 5 24 a S E E T ee Overheated Protection Operating Mode EEA 5 32 ue pee ry z z PAGOIINGS ernn aE 5 6 Overheating sosrcccncciisiirirrireeieireniniine 5 31 eae Starting ereire nse aie e fan cvs 2 25 California Belo Sao Ries ee 26 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 005 5 10 Fuel cont Filling YOUR Take 2 ccactcnseannanenntieencmeticaeecties 5 8 Fuels in Foreign Countries 0cceeeeeeeeeeee 5 7 GIJE a Genesee camtnton E A E sae tagentens 3 72 Gasoline Octane euii tscrnanier oaeiai aana ri 5 5 Gasoline Specifications cceeeeeeeeeeeeee eee 5 6 Fuses Fuses and Circuit Breakers 5 105 Rear Underseat Fuse Block oiccen 5 110 Underhood Fuse Block u i 5 106 Windshield Wiper 0e eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee es 5 104 Gage Engine Coolant Temperature 0 28 3 67 Fuel E 3 72 Speedometer ccccceeeeeneeeeeneeeeeneseeeneees 3 59 TACNOM CIOs 2s catesamunancweanspei anan 3 59 Garage Door Opener cecceeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeenes 2 47 Gasoline
5. Running the Engine While Parked It is better not to park with the engine running But if you ever have to here are some things to know A CAUTION Idling the engine with the climate control system off could allow dangerous exhaust into your vehicle See the earlier caution under Engine Exhaust on page 2 39 Also idling in a closed in place can let deadly carbon monoxide CO into your vehicle even if the climate control fan is at the highest setting One place this can happen is a garage Exhaust with CO can come in easily NEVER park in a garage with the engine running Another closed in place can be a blizzard See Winter Driving on page 4 27 2 40 A CAUTION It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground always set your parking brake after you move the shift lever to PARK P Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not move See Shifting Into Park P on page 2 36 If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a trailer also see Towing a Trailer STS Only on page 4 40 Mirrors Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with In
6. Ventilated Seat This part of the button is for the ventilated seat There are three settings for each feature A light bar in the climate control display shows the setting high medium or low The longest bar shows the high range and the shortest bar shows the low range Pressing either the heated seat or ventilated part of the seat button will start that feature at the highest setting Each time you press the button the feature will decrease one setting To turn the feature off keep pressing the button until the display lights turn off The heated or ventilated seats will automatically shut off when the vehicle is turned off Power Reclining Seatback The vertical power seat control described earlier allows AN CAUTION the seatback to recline See Power Seats on page 1 2 for more information Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous Even if you buckle up your safety belts cannot do their job when you are reclined like this The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will not be against your body Instead it will be in front of you In a crash you could go into it receiving neck or other injuries The lap belt cannot do its job either In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at your pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion have the seatback upright The
7. q Trunk Lid Release Press this button located on the driver s door The vehicle must be in PARK P or NEUTRAL N and the valet mode turned off To disable valet mode see Valet Lockout Switch on page 2 23 e Press the trunk lid release button on the keyless access transmitter See Keyless Access System Operation on page 2 5 The vehicle must be in PARK P or NEUTRAL N and the valet mode turned off e Squeeze the trunk release button located on the rear of the trunk lid above the license plate as long as you have your keyless access transmitter with you Entry occurs when the button is being pressed and the vehicle recognizes the transmitter The vehicle must be in PARK P and the valet mode turned off If your vehicle has lost battery power you can still access the trunk by unlocking and lowering the rear seat pass through door and pulling the emergency trunk release handle Rear Seat Pass Through Door This feature allows you to access the trunk without opening the trunk lid If the vehicle ever loses power the trunk can be accessed and opened through this door To open the door do the following 1 Pull the rear seat armrest down 2 If the door is locked insert the key into the lock and turn it counterclockwise 3 Press the button above the lock 4 Lower the door To open the trunk lid pull the emergency trunk release handle located in the trunk on the other side of the door opening See E
8. cceceeeeeeceeeseeeseteeeeeeeeas 2 35 Shifting Into Park P 2 cccsscissisdecceeeeniiees 2 36 Shifting Out of Park P c eseeeeeeeeeeeeee tenes 2 38 Parking Over Things That Burn 00ee 2 38 Engine Exhaust ssie a a a alate 2 39 Running the Engine While Parked 2 40 MINT ONS ire a dees 2 41 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with Intellibeam and OnStar n 2 41 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror 2 41 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror With ONSAS seeen a E AAT 2 41 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar and Compass ccccceeseeeeeeeees 2 42 Outside Power Heated Mirrors eeeeeees 2 43 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror 6 2 44 Outside Convex Mirror ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 44 Outside Parallel Park Assist Mirror 6 2 44 2 1 Section 2 Features and Controls OnStar System l l 2 45 Center Console Storage Area ceecee 2 51 Universal Home Remote System 00 2 47 Convenience Net eceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeen tenes 2 51 Universal Home Remote System Operation 2 48 SUMMOON crane aE EI 2 52 Storage Areas aeee eeens 2 51 Vehicle Personalization nnn 2 53 Glove BOX iee urnor nE des sate 2 51 Memory Seat Mirrors and Steering Wheel 2 70 GUPNOIGER S s tecesncsiccdtesiececnctntia chamsbsgdtencennaive 2 51 Keys A CAUTION Leaving children unattended in a vehi
9. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint if the top tether is attached to the top tether anchor disconnect it Unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt and let it go back all the way The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward facing child restraint See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1 36 In addition your vehicle has a passenger sensing system The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger s frontal airbag when an infant in a rear facing infant seat or a small child in a forward facing child restraint or booster seat is detected See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 58 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3 61 for more information on this including important safety information A label on your sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys A CAUTION A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag Eve
10. Safety Belts Safety Belts They Are for Everyone This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts A CAUTION Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot wear a Safety belt properly If you are ina crash and you are not wearing a safety belt your injuries can be much worse You can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it You can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash you might not be if you are buckled up Always fasten your safety belt and check that your passengers belts are fastened properly too 1 8 A CAUTION It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly Your vehicle has indicators to remind you and your passengers to buckle your safety belts See Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 3 59 and Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 3 60 In most states and in all Canadian provinces the law says to wear safety belts Here is why They work You never know if you will be in a crash If you do have a crash you do not know if it will be a bad one A few crashes are mild
11. Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX Ibs 4 33 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 1400 750 5 x 150 650 Ibs 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Example 1 Consult this manual to determine how this reduces Item Description Tota A the available cargo and luggage load capacity of Vehicle Capaci pacity Weight for Example 1 1 000 Ibs 453 kg your vehicle If your vehicle can tow a trailer see Towing a Trailer STS Only on page 4 40 for important information on towing a trailer towing safety rules Subtract Occupant Weight 150 Ibs 300 Ibs 136 kg 68 kg x 2 and trailering tips Available Oc
12. Driver Position Lap Shoulder Belt The driver has a lap shoulder belt Here is how to wear it properly 1 Close and lock the door 2 Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight To see how see Seats in the Index 3 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Do not let it get twisted The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly If this happens let the belt go back slightly to unlock it Then pull the belt across you more slowly Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure If the belt is not long enough see Safety Belt Extender on page 1 26 Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 1 14 5 Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to the height that is right for you See Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment on page 1 20 To make the lap part tight pull up on the shoulder belt This safety belt has a feature that will reduce the tension of the safety belt on the occupant s shoulder if the vehicle is on To set this feature gently pull on the belt or lean forward and then sit back The belt will retract and rest lightly against the occupant The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones And you w
13. Expect to move slightly slower at night When you want to leave the freeway move to the proper lane well in advance If you miss your exit do not under any circumstances stop and back up Drive on to the next exit The exit ramp can be curved sometimes quite sharply The exit speed is usually posted Reduce your speed according to your speedometer not to your sense of motion After driving for any distance at higher speeds you may tend to think you are going slower than you actually are Before Leaving on a Long Trip Make sure you are ready Try to be well rested If you must start when you are not fresh such as after a day s work do not plan to make too many miles that first part of the journey Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily drive in 4 24 Is your vehicle ready for a long trip If you keep it serviced and maintained it is ready to go If it needs service have it done before starting out Of course you will find experienced and able service experts in GM dealerships all across North America They will be ready and willing to help if you need it Here are some things you can check before a trip e Windshield Washer Fluid s the reservoir full Are all windows clean inside and outside e Wiper Blades Are they in good shape e Fuel Engine Oil Other Fluids Have you checked all levels e Lamps Are they all working Are the lenses clean e Tires They are vitally important to a sa
14. Frequency SEEK LOCAL DISTANT SET CLOCK 311 SET DATE i INFO Information LANG LANGUAGE SETUP 3 116 Radio Main Menu Item Descriptions Base Audio System The following descriptions are for the Base audio system For information pertaining to the Navigation audio system see Audio System in the Index of the Navigation System manual supplied with your vehicle d BASS MID Midrange TREBLE This menu item allows you to adjust the levels for the bass midrange and treble features of the audio system See Setting the Tone Bass Treble under Radio with CD on page 3 96 for more information BALANCE FADER This menu item allows you to adjust the levels for the balance and fader features of the audio system See Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade under Radio with CD on page 3 96 for more information d EQ Equalizer This menu item allows you to choose among five preset equalizations for the audio system See Audio Equalizer under Radio with CD on page 3 96 for more information H A Home Away PRESETS This menu item allows you to switch back and forth between your home and away preset radio stations See Presets Home Away under Radio with CD on page 3 96 for more information AUTOSTORE PRESETS This menu item allows you to automatically store radio stations with the strongest signals as presets See Autostore Presets under Radio with CD on page 3 96 for more in
15. There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle From the outside press the lock or unlock button on the keyless access transmitter When you have your transmitter with you you may also unlock and open the door by pulling the door handle You do not have to press the unlock button on the transmitter Entry occurs when the door handle is pulled and the vehicle recognizes your transmitter See Vehicle Personalization on page 2 53 for information on how to program the keyless access feature From the inside use the power door lock switches located on each front door See Power Door Locks on page 2 12 for more information The rear passenger doors have manual door lock knobs located at the top of the door panel near the window Push down the knob to lock the door Pull up the knob to unlock the door Power Door Locks The power door lock switches are located on the front doors n Unlock Press the side of the switch with the unlock symbol to unlock the doors Lock Press the side of the switch with the lock symbol to lock the doors Programmable Automatic Door Locks Your vehicle was programmed from the factory so that when the doors are closed the ignition is on and the shift lever is moved out of PARK P all the doors will lock The front doors can still be opened from the inside while the doors are locked If a rear passenger needs to exit the vehicle have that person use the manual knob or use the powe
16. Your automatic transmission has a Driver Shift Control DSC feature that allows you to change gears similar to a manual transmission To use the DSC feature 1 Slide the shift lever over from AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE D to the right into the DSC area When the transmission is in DSC mode the sport symbol in the Driver Information Center DIC will come on DRIVER DOOR AJAR som SD 65 F If you do not move the shift lever forward or rearward the vehicle will be in sport mode When you are in the sport mode the vehicle will still shift automatically While driving in sport mode the transmission may remain in a gear longer than it would in normal driving mode based on braking throttle input and vehicle lateral acceleration Press the shift lever forward to upshift or rearward to downshift The DIC will show the requested gear range when moving the shift lever forward or rearward See Driver Information Center DIC on page 3 73 for more information on the DIC DRIVER DOOR AJAR A oomi m3 65 F While using the DSC feature the vehicle will have firmer shifting and increased performance You can use this for sport driving or when climbing descending hills to stay in gear longer or to down shift for more power or engine braking The transmission will only allow you to shift into gears appropriate for the vehicle speed and engine Revolutions Per Minute RPM The transmission will not automatically shift to th
17. belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger 1 48 Airbag System Your vehicle has six airbags A frontal airbag for the driver and another frontal airbag for the right front passenger e aseat mounted side impact airbag for the driver and another for the right front passenger e aroof mounted side impact airbag for the driver and passenger directly behind the driver and e aroof mounted side impact airbag for the right front passenger and the person seated directly behind that passenger Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating airbag But these airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job and comply with federal regulations Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system CAUTION Continued A CAUTION You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you are not wearing your safety belt even if you have airbags Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it Airbags are supplemental restraints to the safety belts All airbags are designed to work with safety belts but do not replace them Seat mounied side impact airbags and roof mounted side impact airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe crashes where something hits the side of your vehicle They are not designed to inflate in frontal
18. ee 1 20 Safety Warnings and Symbols 0 c0eeeeeees iii Scheduled Maintenance c cceeeeeeeeneeeeen eens 6 4 Seats Head Restraints 2 jcketcsscccncass ieia 1 6 Heated and Ventilated Seats cece 1 4 Heated Seats se ck dein sieeslasassegiesesctet deere sees 1 3 Heated Seats Rear cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneee renee 1 7 MGMONY sraon a A N 2 70 Power Lumbar jciccccidecscincaitentecnanisatunacannenndnten 1 2 Power Reclining Seatback c eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 5 Power Seals vcecccssccsteadsctecasdiiegedessasneecaveetenes 1 2 Securing a Child Restraint Rear Seat Position cceeeeeeeeeeeee eee eenn 1 43 Right Front Seat Position c eeeeeeeeee ees 1 45 Securty WIGHT cc ctesehadeedecaecateledanenteyenteasencenencts 3 71 SGIVICE secsccsarenedecaigeasiesiecancisaey WocbeieehGdeeversenies 5 3 Accessories and Modifications e 5 3 Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your NGMICIC cc utaeecnh r E ER 5 5 California Proposition 65 Warning 0 5 3 Doing Your Own Work cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee renee 5 4 Engine Soon Light cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen ees 3 67 Publications Ordering Information 7 14 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 1 62 Setting the Time cceceeeeeeee scence eeea eee eeaeeaes 3 95 Sheet Metal Damage ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 100 Shifting Into Park P cceeeeeeeeeeee
19. 2 If the engine does not start and no DIC message is displayed wait 15 seconds before trying again 2 26 Notice Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle If you add electrical parts or accessories you could change the way the engine operates Before adding electrical equipment check with your dealer If you do not your engine might not perform properly Any resulting damage would not be covered by your vehicle s warranty Stopping Your Engine Move the shift lever to PARK P and press the ACC button located on the instrument panel If the shifter is not in PARK P the vehicle will go into the accessory mode the engine will turn off and the DIC will display SHIFT TO PARK When the shifter is moved to PARK P the vehicle will go into the RAP mode if all doors are closed The ignition mode will change to OFF if a front door is opened See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 2 25 for more information If the keyless access transmitter is not detected while going to off the DIC will display NO FOB OFF OR RUN See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 79 for more information Engine Coolant Heater Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine coolant heater In very cold weather 0 F 18 C or colder the engine coolant heater can help You will get easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm up Usually the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of four ho
20. C Al S INTERIOR CANISTER INT LAMP RUN CRANK oF 2 AFTER z EmMa BOIL RELAY RELAY o z 95 l DIFF PUMP MICRO MICRO e pal lec le z RELAY JOINT CONNECTOR REAR 3 2 E igs lE MICRO OPT DEFOG H egUe HA ITER Canister Vent Solenoid RT TURN RIM Right Turn Signal OPT Sunroof Module Option Battery to Rear Integration Module R Ignition 1 Fog Lamps Compressor UN CRANK Clutch Engine Run Crank Relays Heated Steering Wheel Column HTD STG CLM Lock Module REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger Bee cae Interior Lamps PSG DR MOD Front Passenger Door Module LT TURN RIM Left Turn Signal STOP LAMPS Stoplamps FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump RF HTD Front Passenger Heated Seat ST S BAND S Band Antenna deena Radio OnStar 5 114 Relays tsage AFTERBOIL Fuses sage REAR F LAMP OPY Rear Fog Lamps Option An a After Boil Rear Differential Cooling Pump PUMP OPT Co E OR Joint Connector E e SPARE Breakers REAR DEFOG WINDOW Power Window Motors Circuit FUEL PUMP RELAY MICRO Fue Pump Diodes Usage REAR FOG LAMP RLY Rear Fog Lamps Option TRUNK DIODE Trunk Release MICRO OPT DIFF PUMP After Boil Rear Differential Cooling RELAY Pump Option MICRO OPT 5 115 Capacities and Specifications The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 for more i
21. FCA controls are located on the end of the multifunction lever O Off This position turns the system off On This position turns the system on To enable FCA move the Adaptive Cruise Control switch to on To disable FCA move the switch to off Make sure the Head Up Display is on and properly adjusted If the HUD is not on FCA will not be enabled and you will not be provided with FCA audible and visual warnings See Head Up Display HUD on page 3 40 for more information A CAUTION e On winding roads FCA may not detect a vehicle ahead You could crash into a vehicle ahead of you Do not rely on FCA on winding roads When weather limits visibility such as in fog rain or snow FCA performance is limited There may not be enough warning distance to the vehicle in front of you Do not rely on FCA in low visibility conditions A CAUTION When FCA is enabled the Adaptive Cruise Control switch is on If you press another Adaptive Cruise Control button you might go into cruise when you do not want to You could be startled and even lose control Be careful not to press adaptive cruise buttons unless you want to use cruise control Warning the Driver xe The driver warning is active when The alert symbol will flash on the HUD and a warning beep will sound when driver action may be required e You are approaching a vehicle too quickly e You are following a vehicle ahead much too closely See
22. How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1 13 Ignition POSITIONS iessen ooa 2 24 Inadvertent Power Battery Saver eeee 3 40 Infants and Young Children Restraints 1 29 Inflation Tire Pressure cceceeeeeeeeeeees 5 65 Instrument Panel OVEIVIOW a e EN 3 4 Instrument Panel I P BriGhthi Ss sifoi onaniar aee 3 39 CluSter rererere anea EE EEEE 3 58 JUMP Starting siye aosi nni ena nea 5 46 Keyless Access System cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee teens 2 4 Keyless Access System Operation 0 5 2 5 OVS scraccotisne aeaaaee aoa EE ea aa ENIE 2 3 Labeling Tire Sidewall c0cceeeeeeeeeeeees 5 59 Lamps Battery Load Management eceeeeeeees 3 40 Exterior Lighting Battery Saver 3 38 Lamps cont FOG aicn a EEEE 3 37 Inadvertent Power Battery Saver 05 3 40 RE AGING nccsdetscasesetecniecscetgas icndaniaxs EEE i 3 40 Twilight Sentinel 0 ccc cece 3 37 LATCH System Child Restraints cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee een eeee 1 37 Lifting Your Vehicle Tires 0 c eceeeeeee eee 5 79 Light Airbag Readiness ice 3 60 Anti Lock Brake System Warning 00 3 65 Brake System Warning c cceeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 3 64 Charging System risustan sniene aeriana 3 63 CRUISE COMO ienen inaa tela ptngubesiesetcuiest setae 3 72 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
23. Notice Shifting out of PARK P or NEUTRAL N with the engine running at high speed may damage the transmission The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Be sure the engine is not running at high speed when shifting your vehicle 2 29 AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE D This position is for normal driving If you need more power for passing and you are e Going less than 35 mph 55 km h push the accelerator pedal about halfway down e Going about 35 mph 55 km h or more push the accelerator all the way down The transmission will shift down to a lower gear and have more power Notice Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may damage the transmission If you are stuck do not spin the tires When stopping on a hill use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place FOURTH 4 This position is also used for normal driving However it offers more power and lower fuel economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE D Here are examples for using FOURTH 4 instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE D e When driving on hilly winding roads e When going down a steep hill This position may also offer improved trailer towing performance in certain driving conditions 2 30 Driver Shift Control DSC Notice If you drive your vehicle at high RPMs without upshifting while using Driver Shift Control DSC you could damage your vehicle Always upshift when necessary while using DSC
24. Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire STS Only q X gt a e ieee AOE 1 If your vehicle has wheel covers use the flat end of the wheel wrench to remove the covers Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to gently pry off the wheel cover Be careful not to scratch the aluminum wheel edge and do not try to remove the wheel cover with your hands 5 86 Loosen the wheel nuts but do not remove them yet using the wheel wrench Turn the handle about 180 degrees then flip the handle back to the starting position This avoids taking the wrench off the lug nut for each turn 3 Find the vehicle s jacking location using the diagram above and corresponding hoisting notches located in the plastic molding on the vehicle s frame The notches in the plastic molding are marked with a triangle shape to help you find them 4 Attach the wheel wrench to the jack A CAUTION Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous If the vehicle slips off the jack you could be badly injured or killed Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack A CAUTION Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle 5 87 A CAUTION Lifting a vehicle and getting unde
25. Surge Tank A CAUTION If you have not found a problem yet check to see if coolant is visible in the surge tank If coolant is visible Adding only plain water to your cooling but the coolant level is not at the FULL COLD FROID system can be dangerous Plain water or line on the side of the coolant surge tank add a some other liquid such as alcohol can boil 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL before the proper coolant mixture will Your coolant at the coolant surge tank but be sure the cooling system including the coolant surge tank pressure cap is cool before you do it See Engine Coolant on page 5 27 for more information vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture your engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant A CAUTION Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly They Notice In cold weather water can freeze and crack are under pressure and if you turn the coolant the engine radiator heater core and other parts surge tank pressure cap even a little they Use the recommended coolant and the proper can come out at high speed Never turn the coolant mixture cap when the cooling system including the coolant surge tank pressure ca
26. Wiper Activated Headlamps ee 3 35 Headlamps on Reminder e eeeeeeeeeees 3 35 Daytime Running Lamps DRL 00 3 35 FOG Lamps wxtahcsteesenetlal EE a ta Hoe aaa 3 37 Instrument Panel Twilight Sentinel cccccecccccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 3 37 Exterior Lighting Battery Saver eee 3 38 Instrument Panel Brightness cee 3 39 Entry Lighting sisseccieecca vist hekedasanintantamenigh ane nea 3 39 Parade DIMMING 2 22iesteecdtiescststeesdieerieeciane 3 39 Reading CAMPS sa sicccesciccnncattan susp cianeutexeetatencs 3 40 Battery Load Management eceeeeeeee ee 3 40 Inadvertent Power Battery Saver 006 3 40 Head Up Display HUD eee eee 3 40 Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA 3 44 Accessory Power Outlet S eeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 46 Ashtray s and Cigarette Lighter 3 47 Climate Controls 0ccceeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeees 3 48 Dual Climate Control System eeeeeeeee 3 48 Outlet Adjustment eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee es 3 54 Rear Climate Control System eeeeeeees 3 54 Passenger Compartment Air Filter 3 55 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators 3 57 Instrument Panel Cluster eeeeeeeeeeeee ees 3 58 Speedometer and Odometer e eeeeeeeee 3 59 Tachometer xaencce ca
27. You do not want to repeat Step 1 as this will erase all previous programming from the Universal Home Remote buttons 2 49 Gate Operator and Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission This may not be long enough for Universal Home Remote to pick up the signal during programming Similarly some U S gate operators are manufactured to time out in the same manner If you live in Canada or you are having difficulty programming a gate operator or garage door opener by using the Programming Universal Home Remote procedures regardless of where you live replace Step 3 under Programming Universal Home Remote with the following Continue to press and hold the Universal Home Remote button while you press and release every two seconds cycle the hand held transmitter button until the frequency signal has been successfully accepted by the Universal Home Remote The Universal Home Remote indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly Proceed with Step 4 under Programming Universal Home Remote to complete 2 50 Using Universal Home Remote Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home Remote button for at least half of a second The indicator light will come on while the signal is being transmitted Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons To erase programming from the three Universal Home Remote buttons do
28. an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment 5 70 Tire Inspection and Rotation Tire rotation is not recommended if your vehicle has the following performance tire combinations e P235 50R17 size tires on the front wheels and P255 45R17 size tires on the rear wheels e P235 50R18 size tires on the front wheels and P255 45R18 size tires on the rear wheels e P255 45R18 size tires on the front wheels and P275 40R19 size tires on the rear wheels Different tire sizes should not be rotated front to rear Each tire and wheel should only be used in the original front or rear position it is in Tire rotation is recommended if your vehicle is equipped with P235 50R17 size tires on all four wheel positions or 255 45ZR18 size tires on all four wheel positions These tires should be rotated every 5 000 to 8 000 miles 8 000 to 13 000 km Any time you notice unusual wear rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment Also check for damaged tires or wheels See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5 72 and Wheel Replacement on page 5 76 for more information The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more Vehicles that have the Tire Pressure Monitor System uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle The first rotation TPMS will need to have the TPMS sensors reset after is the most important See Scheduled Maintenance a tire rotation see Tire Pressure Monitor System on on page 6 4
29. and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person would not survive But most crashes are in between In many of them people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles the facts are clear In most crashes buckling up does matter a lot Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything you go as fast as it goes Take the simplest vehicle Suppose it is just a seat on wheels Put someone on it Get it up to speed Then stop the vehicle The rider does not stop The person keeps going until stopped by something or the instrument panel In a real vehicle it could be the windshield Questions and Answers About Safety Belts Q Will be trapped in the vehicle after an accident if am wearing a safety belt A You could be whether you are wearing a safety belt or not But you can unbuckle a safety belt even if you are upside down And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident so you can unbuckle and get out is much greater if you are belted Q If my vehicle has airbags why should I have to wear safety belts or the safety belts A Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be in most of them in the future But they are supplemental systems only so they work with safety belts not instead of them Every airbag system ever offered for
30. each other or other metal Jumper Cable Removal A Heavy Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote Negative Terminal B Good Battery or Remote Positive and Remote Negative Terminals C Dead Battery or Remote Positive Terminal To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do the following 1 Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle that had the dead battery 2 Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle with the good battery 3 Disconnect the red positive cable from the vehicle with the good battery 4 Disconnect the red positive cable from the other vehicle All Wheel Drive If your vehicle is equipped with all wheel drive this is an additional system that needs lubrication Transfer Case When to Check Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check the transfer case fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss could indicate a problem Have it inspected and repaired 5 51 How to Check Lubricant A Drain Plug B Fill Plug To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be ona level surface If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole located on the transfer case you ll need to add some lubricant Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole Use care not to overtighten the plug What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine w
31. even lose control of the vehicle Disengage Adaptive Cruise Control before entering a highway exit ramp Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control while entering or on exit ramps Adaptive Cruise Control may detect a vehicle that is not in your lane and apply the brakes Other Vehicle Lane Changes Adaptive Cruise Control may occasionally provide a driver alert and or braking that you consider unnecessary It could respond to signs guardrails and other stationary objects when entering or exiting a curve This is normal operation Your vehicle does not need service If another vehicle enters the same lane as you Adaptive Cruise Control will not detect the vehicle until it is completely in the lane Be ready to take action and apply the brakes yourself 3 29 Using Adaptive Cruise Controls on Hills and When Towing a Trailer How well Adaptive Cruise Control will work on hills and when towing a trailer depends on your speed vehicle load traffic conditions and the steepness of the hills It may not detect a vehicle in your lane while driving on hills When going up steep hills you may want to use the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed When going downhill when towing a trailer you may want to brake to keep your speed down Applying the brake disengages the system You may choose not to use Adaptive Cruise Control on steep hills when towing a trailer Disengaging Adaptive Cruise Control To disengage the system ap
32. fuel economy than city driving Once the range drops below approximately 40 miles 64 km remaining the display will show LOW RANGE If your vehicle is low on fuel the Fuel Level Low message will be displayed See Fuel Level Low under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 79 for more information 3 76 MPG AVG L 100 km AVG This display shows the approximate average miles per gallon mpg or liters per 100 kilometers L 100 km This number is calculated based on the number of mpg L 100 km recorded since the last time this display was reset To reset MPG AVG press the reset button The display will return to zero MPG INST L 100 km INST This display shows the current fuel economy This number reflects only the fuel economy that the vehicle has right now and will change frequently as driving conditions change Unlike average fuel economy this display cannot be reset GAL FUEL USED L FUEL USED This display shows the number of gallons gal or liters L of fuel used since the last reset of this display To reset GAL FUEL USED press the reset button The display will return to zero AVG MPH AVG km h This display shows the average speed of the vehicle in miles per hour mph or kilometers per hour km h This average is calculated based on the various vehicle speeds recorded since the last reset of this display To reset AVG MPH press the reset button The display will return to zero TIMER OFF Thi
33. or comes on again while you are driving your vehicle needs service If the regular brake system warning light is not on you still have brakes but you do not have anti lock brakes If the regular brake system warning light is also on you do not have anti lock brakes and there is a problem with your regular brakes See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 64 Low Tire Pressure Warning Light This light will come on briefly as you start the engine for vehicles equipped with the Tire o Pressure Monitor System It will then come on only when a flat or low tire pressure condition exists See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5 67 for more information 3 65 Traction Control System TCS Warning Light If the TC traction control warning light comes on and stays on there may be a problem with the traction control system The TC traction control warning light will come on briefly when you turn the engine on If it does not come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem The light will also come on if you turn the traction control system off using the TC traction control on off button located on the console If the TC traction control warning light stays on or comes on while you are driving pull off the road as soon as possible and stop carefully Turn your engine off and then restart it If the light still stays on or comes back on again while you are driving your vehicle ne
34. or position children A built in child restraint system is a permanent part of the motor vehicle An add on child restraint system is a portable one which is purchased by the vehicle s owner To help reduce injuries an add on child restraint must be secured in the vehicle With built in or add on child restraints the child has to be secured within the child restraint When choosing an add on child restraint be sure the child restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle If it is it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards Then follow the instructions for the restraint You may find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a booklet or both 1 34 Securing an Add on Child Restraint in the Vehicle A CAUTION A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle Make sure the child restraint is properly installed in the vehicle using the vehicle s safety belt or LATCH system following the instructions that came with that restraint and also the instructions in this manual To help reduce the chance of injury the child restraint must be secured in the vehicle Child restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap shoulder belt or by the LATCH system See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 37 for more information A child can be endangere
35. or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric e The tire has a bump bulge or split e The tire has a puncture cut or other damage that cannot be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage 5 72 Buying New Tires GM has developed and matched specific tires for your vehicle The original equipment tires installed on your vehicle when it was new were designed to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification TPC Spec system rating If you need replacement tires GM strongly recommends that you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating This way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give the same performance and vehicle safety during normal use as the original tires GM s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a dozen critical specifications that impact the overall performance of your vehicle including brake system performance ride and handling traction control and tire pressure monitoring performance GM s TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire s sidewall by the tire manufacturer If the tires have an all season tread design the TPC Spec number will be followed by an MS for mud and snow See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 5 59 for additional information The optional 18 inch performance tires size 255 45ZR18 99Y used on some vehicles meet the General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification TPC Spec rating but the TPC Spec code has not been mo
36. or turn as well because your tire to road traction is not as good as on dry roads And if your tires do not have much tread left you will get even less traction It is always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement 4 20 The heavier the rain the harder it is to see Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals pavement markings the edge of the road and even people walking It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer fluid reservoir filled with washer fluid Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts A CAUTION Wet brakes can cause accidents They will not work as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one side You could lose control of the vehicle After driving through a large puddle of water or a car wash apply your brake pedal lightly until your brakes work normally Driving too fast through large water puddles or even going through some car washes can cause problems too The water may affect your brakes Try to avoid puddles But if you cannot try to slow down before you hit them Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dange
37. page 5 67 Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened See Wheel Nut Torque under Capacities and Specifications on page 5 116 A CAUTION Rust or dirt on a wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make wheel nuts become loose after a time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you When rotating P235 50R17 size tires or 255 45ZR18 change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from size tires always use the correct rotation pattern places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle shown here In an emergency you can use a cloth or a If your vehicle has a compact spare tire do not include paper towel to do this but be sure to use a the compact spare tire in the tire rotation scraper or wire brush later if needed to get all After the tires have been rotated adjust the front and the rust or dirt off See Changing a Flat Tire rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and STS Only on page 5 83 Loading Information label 5 71 When It Is Time for New Tires One way to tell when it is time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators which will appear when your tires have only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm or less of tread remaining You need a new tire if any of the following statements are true e You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire e You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire s rubber e The tread or sidewall is cracked cut
38. responsive as your vehicle is by itself Before you start check the trailer hitch and platform and attachments safety chains electrical connector lamps tires and mirror adjustment If the trailer has electric brakes start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time During your trip check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working 4 43 Following Distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns Passing You will need more passing distance up ahead when you are towing a trailer And because you are a good deal longer you will need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane Backing Up Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand Then to move the trailer to the left just move that hand to the left To move the trailer to the right move your hand to the right Always back up slowly and if possible have someone guide you 4 44 Making Turns Notice Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle Your vehicle could be damaged Avoid making very sharp turns while
39. vehicle could move very rapidly You could lose control and hit people or objects Do not shift into a drive gear while your engine is running at high speed Notice Shifting out of PARK P or NEUTRAL N with the engine running at high speed may damage the transmission The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Be sure the engine is not running at high speed when shifting your vehicle AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE D This position is for normal driving If you need more power for passing and you are e Going less than 35 mph 55 km h push the accelerator pedal about halfway down e Going about 35 mph 55 km h or more push the accelerator all the way down The transmission will shift down to a lower gear and have more power 2 33 Driver Shift Control DSC Notice If you drive your vehicle at high RPMs without upshifting while using Driver Shift Control DSC you could damage your vehicle Always upshift when necessary while using DSC Your automatic transmission has a Driver Shift Control DSC feature that allows you to change gears similar to a manual transmission To use the DSC feature 1 Slide the shift lever over from AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE D to the right into the DSC area When the transmission is in DSC mode the sport symbol in the Driver Information Center DIC will come on J DRIVER DOOR AJAR som SD ae 2 34 If you do not move the shift lever forward or rearward the vehicle will be
40. 12 for reservoir location and access DOT 3 AR There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear When new linings are put in the fluid level goes back up The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake system If it is you should have your brake system fixed since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes will not work well or will not work at all 5 42 So it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak If you add fluid when your linings are worn then you will have too much fluid when you get new brake linings You should add or remove brake fluid as necessary only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system A CAUTION If you have too much brake fluid it can spill on the engine The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough You or others could be burned and your vehicle could be damaged Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system If the ignition is on and the brake fluid is low the CHECK BRAKE FLUID message will be displayed in the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 79 What to Add Notice When you do need brake fluid use only DOT 3 brake e Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake fluid Use new brake fluid from a sealed container sy
41. 2 The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory To program the vehicle to a different mode use the following procedure 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until KEYLESS FT DOOR UNLOCK is highlighted 3 Press the tune select knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle 2 65 KEYLESS DOORS UNLOCK This feature automatically unlocks all of the doors when you approach the vehicle with your keyless access transmitter and pull either front door handle See Door Locks on page 2 12 for more information Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory it was programmed to Mode 1 The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory To program the vehicle to a different mode use the following procedure 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until KEYLESS DOORS UNLOCK is highlighted 3
42. 29 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children 1 37 Older Children cc 2e2hescseek as vinessdeeie eed fate eas 1 26 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat POSIIOM wrssrece suche retareeniariadecuteecenchdeene we 1 43 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position c eeeeeeeeeeeee eee ees 1 45 Where to Put the Restraint eee 1 36 Cigarette Lighter ccceeceeee cece teeter eeeeeeeeees 3 47 Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels 5 99 Exterior Lamps Lenses cseeeeeeneeeeeeees 5 98 Fabric Carpet itsu raaire ioiei 5 96 Finish Gare cocctotinstaeccneaciasnaseentenmaccneadeennases 5 98 Cleaning cont Inside of Your Vehicle aseene 5 94 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic SNAGE S aer e aE EEE tats 5 97 Leather wciicaccnitnaewecadsneycaew iaa a ai 5 96 Speaker Covers cccscc cccscsscdevenscuseessceccssensets 5 97 EE eh E aehieeeen acne 5 100 Underbody Maintenance 5 101 Washing Your Vehicle eceeeeeeeeeeeee tees 5 98 Weatherstrips 2 02cc0 ciseccccsivece sense eceeeeeeer eens 5 97 Windshield and Wiper Blades 000 5 99 Woodi Panels serii yaspan 5 97 Climate Control System Air Filter Passenger Compartment 3 55 DUAL 2h ci coetstcesiinathcndcs ater ed e Ea 3 48 Outlet Adjustment cceeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeaes 3 54 Rear ranae a a A 3 54 Collision Damage Repair e
43. 3 66 Foglamp esc sister se leiecdas shes Gacktonestas tek tces tne 3 71 Highbeam ON ceeeeeeeeee eee eee eee eeeeeeeeeeee ees 3 72 Lights On Reminder cceeeeeeeeeeeeeee eiee 3 71 Low Tire Pressure Warning Light 3 65 Malfunction Indicator eee 3 67 Oil PreSSUIe gt ssicsaisestestites asec denis eee 3 70 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 3 61 Passenger Safety Belt Reminder 3 60 Safety Belt Reminder c eceeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 59 SGCUNLY E EE E E E 3 71 TCS Warning Light eenieraieieaigi rie 3 66 Traction Control System TCS Warning 3 66 Lighting ENUY cerime R E 3 39 Parade DIMMING saroi enreta e E S 3 39 Limited Slip Rear Axle ceeeceeeneeeeeneeeeeeeees 4 11 Loading Your Vehicle cceeeeeeeeee eee ee eee eees 4 32 Lockout Protection ccccccciss cscs cctses naceeeecccteeceases 2 14 Locks DOOM sasceviadunsdhecesy vhadscudahehewanscadebbivawsa ween ts 2 12 Lockout Protection cccccececeeeeeeeeaeeeeees 2 14 POWER DOON Sccshinisatciontiintdecaded hiewsendeedessbadenean 2 12 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 13 Rear Door Security LOCKS eeeeeeeeeee ees 2 13 LOSS Of Control cnc cc cece cctevsseescse esses eenacceceasientes 4 17 Lumbar Power Controls ccccceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 1 2 Magnetic Ride Control cceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 4 11 Maintenance Schedule Addit
44. 33 When the engine is cold the coolant level should be at or slightly above the FULL COLD FROID line on the side of the coolant surge tank If it is not you may have a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses heater hoses radiator water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system A CAUTION Heater and radiator hoses and other engine parts can be very hot Do not touch them If you do you can be burned Do not run the engine if there is a leak If you run the engine it could lose all coolant That could cause an engine fire and you could be burned Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle 5 34 If there seems to be no leak with the engine on check to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running If the engine is overheating both fans should be running If they are not your vehicle needs service Notice Engine damage from running your engine without coolant is not covered by your warranty See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5 32 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency Notice Using coolant other than DEX COOL may cause premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion In addition the engine coolant may require changing sooner at 30 000 miles 50 000 km or 24 months whichever occurs first Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always use DEX COOL silicate free coolant in your vehicle How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
45. 5 103 Compact Spare Tire STS Only 1 5 93 Service Parts Identification Label 0 0 00006 5 103 Appearance Care n se ise eben esieersuienies 5 94 Electrical System 0 c0cccccsseseesesseesseeees 5 104 Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle 5 94 Add On Electrical Equipment eee 5 104 Fabric Carpet naimie anono cetacean nnitgetananes 5 96 Headlamp Wiring c c ccccesccsseseesseeeeeeeeeeeees 5 104 Leather eee teeeeeeeeeteeeeesteesseeeesteeesteeesteeseees 5 96 Windshield Wiper Fuses 00 0 ccceeeeeeeeee 5 104 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Power Windows and Other Power Options 5 105 Plastic Surfaces aeinn anat 5 97 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ccccccccecececeeecee 5 105 Wood Panels ccccececeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeenees 5 97 Underhood Fuse BIOCK cccccccccccccceccceccceceece 5 106 ae pepe eens ree eager anperenieat enn ases eeu Rear Underseat Fuse Block cc 00eeees 5 110 Weathersttps nu LLLLLLIIIIE S97 Capacities and Specifications 5 116 Service Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be happy with it We hope you will go to your dealer for all your service needs You will get genuine GM parts and GM trained and supported service people We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM Genuine GM parts have one of these marks ACVelco E parts GM Goodwrench E Accessories Accessories and
46. 6 Theft Deterrent Radio cccceceeeee eee eee eee 3 119 Theft Deterrent System cceeeeeeeeeneee eee eee ees 2 21 Theft Deterrent Systems ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 2 20 WWE ce2icte ss csgtecs A A eid 5 57 Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels Cleaning erreneren einari aE S 5 99 Buying New TIES c cc ccnccciceciesnetsveegivadiaianes 5 72 GAINS eeann EE EEE EE EPNER ANE 5 78 Changing a Flat Tire sisessmsmisioiriisinin erirnieins 5 83 Cleaning toxin esas cecnsnact ater iatctoasar sae tcc hans 5 100 Compact Spare Tire cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 5 93 Different SIZE 2 0 0 cece e cece ete ne ee aneian 5 74 If a Tire Goes Flat ecceceeecee eects eeeeeee es 5 81 Inflation Tire Pressure 2 eeeeeeeeeeeeee es 5 65 Inspection and Rotation cceeeeeee eee 5 70 Installing the Spare Tire cceceeeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 86 Lifting Your Vehicle sinisin annis nasicus 5 79 Pressure Monitor System 0 eeeeeeeeeeee eee 5 67 Removing the Flat Tire eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 5 86 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 5 85 Ruin Flata Ase ccsistetaenineietdeateesee tended EA 5 64 Tires cont Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools 5 92 Tire Sidewall Labeling eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 59 Tire Terminology and Definitions 5 61 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ceeeeeeeee 5 75 Wheel Alignment and Ti
47. DATE Use this menu item to set the date See Setting the Time on page 3 95 for more information i Information This menu item is used to display XM satellite radio service and CD MP3 playback information See I Information under Radio with CD on page 3 96 for more information 3 117 LANG Language To change the language displayed on the radio select LANGUAGE by pressing the tune select knob Turn the tune select knob to scroll through the following available languages e ENGLISH e GERMAN e FRENCH e SPANISH e JAPANESE To make your selection press the tune select knob If you accidentally select a language that you did not want ENGLISH is always at the top of the language list SETUP When you select this menu item the following submenu is available e PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU e DRIVER SELECTION e DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS e CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS 3 118 SETUP Submenu Items The following choices are available for programming using the Base audio system PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU This item turns the entire list of personalization features on or off This item allows you to program certain features to a preferred setting for up to two people The number of available features varies depending upon which options are purchased When this item is on a check mark will appear after it For more information on the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU item see Vehicle Personalization on page 2 53 DRIVER SELECTION When
48. DOOR UNLOCK and KEYLESS DOORS UNLOCK later in this section for more information Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory it was programmed to Mode 1 The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory To program the vehicle to a different mode use the following procedure 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until LIGHTS FLASH AT UNLOCK is highlighted 2 60 3 Press the tune select knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle LIGHTS FLASH AT LOCK This feature allows the exterior lamps to flash once when the keyless access transmitter is used to lock the vehicle All doors must be closed for this feature to work and the lamps will not flash if the parking lamps or headlamps are on If LIGHTS FLASH AT LOCK is turned on and either KEYLESS FT DOOR UNLOCK or KEYLESS DOORS UNLOCK is turned on the exterior lamps will flash when the doors are passively unlocked See KEYLESS FT Front DOOR UNLOCK and KEYLESS DOORS UNLOCK later
49. Defensive Driving on page 4 2 for more information Detecting the Vehicle Ahead The vehicle ahead symbol will only appear on the HUD when a vehicle ahead of you is detected in your path If this symbol does not appear or disappears briefly FCA will not respond to vehicles you may see ahead The symbol may disappear on curves highway exit ramps or hills Also when another vehicle enters the same lane as you the FCA system will not detect the vehicle until it is completely in your driving lane A CAUTION When the Adaptive Cruise Control radar is blocked by snow ice or dirt it may not detect a vehicle ahead FCA may not help you avoid a collision under these conditions Do not use FCA when the radar is blocked by snow ice or dirt Keep your radar clean See Cleaning the System under Adaptive Cruise Control on page 3 19 A CAUTION FCA may not detect and warn soon enough to stationary or slow moving vehicles or other objects ahead of you You could crash into an object ahead of you Do not rely on FCA when approaching stationary or slow moving vehicles or other objects Unnecessary Warnings FCA may occasionally provide an unnecessary warning to guard rails signs and other stationary objects This is normal operation your vehicle does not need service Other Messages There are three messages that may appear on the Driver Information Center DIC They are CLEAN RADAR RADAR CRUISE NOT READ
50. Dolly towing or dinghy towing your vehicle may cause damage because of reduced ground clearance Always put your vehicle on a flatbed truck If you have an STS V it can only be towed ona flat bed trailer Dolly Towing All Wheel Drive Vehicles Notice Towing an all wheel drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground or even with only two of its wheels on the ground will damage drivetrain components Do not tow an all wheel drive vehicle if any of its wheels will be on the ground If you have an All Wheel Drive AWD vehicle it can only be towed on a flat bed trailer 4 39 Towing a Trailer STS Only A CAUTION If you do not use the correct equipment and drive properly you can lose control when you pull a trailer For example if the trailer is too heavy the brakes may not work well or even at all You and your passengers could be seriously injured You may also damage your vehicle the resulting repairs would not be covered by your warranty Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the steps in this section Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with your vehicle Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the proper trailer towing equipment To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle you should read the information in Weight of the Trailer that appears later in this section Trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself Trailer
51. ENGINE This message will display when the transmission fluid in your vehicle is too hot Stop the vehicle and allow it to idle until the transmission cools down or until this message is removed 3 92 TRUNK OPEN This symbol appears with the TRUNK OPEN message When this message displays it means that the trunk was not closed completely You should make sure that the trunk is closed completely TURN SIGNAL ON If you drive your vehicle for more than about 1 mile 1 6 km with a turn signal on this message will display as a reminder to turn off the turn signal A multiple chime will sound when this message is displayed Other Messages Here are more messages that you can receive on your Driver Information Center DIC To acknowledge a message and read another message that may have come on at the same time press the reset button e ACCESSORY ACTIVE See Ignition Positions on page 2 24 e KNOWN FOB See Matching Transmitter s to Your Vehicle under Keyless Access System Operation on page 2 5 e MAX FOBS LEARNED See Matching Transmitter s to Your Vehicle under Keyless Access System Operation on page 2 5 OFF ACC Accessory TO LEARN See Matching Transmitter s to Your Vehicle under Keyless Access System Operation on page 2 5 READY FOR FOB X See Matching Transmitter s to Your Vehicle under Keyless Access System Operation on page 2 5 SHIFT TO PARK See Starting the Engine on page 2 25
52. F6 DISP Display Press this pushbutton to switch between the elapsed time of the track and the MP3 playback information K Seek Press the left arrow to go to the start of the previous track Press the right arrow to go to the start of the next track Pressing either arrow for more than two seconds will search the previous or next tracks at two tracks per second Release the button to stop searching and to play the track K l Scan Press the double arrow button to scan the tracks in each folder The radio will go to the next track play for 10 seconds then go on to the next track Press this button again to stop scanning Tune Turning the tune knob will fast track reverse or advance through the tracks in all folders or playlists The track number and file name will appear on the display for each track Turning this knob while in random will fast track reverse or advance the tracks in sequential order i Information Press this button while an MP3 CD is loaded to view the Title Artist Album or Folder names To view this information perform the following 1 Press the tune select knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until INFO appears on the display 3 Press the tune select knob to select INFO The display will change to show the additional MP3 information 4 Press one of the following pushbuttons to view that specific information e F1 TTLE Title To display the title name e F
53. GM dealer to remove odors from your vehicle s upholstery Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners or techniques e Never use a knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil from any interior surface e Never use a stiff brush It can cause damage to your vehicle s interior surfaces e Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively with a cleaning cloth Use of heavy pressure can damage your interior and does not improve the effectiveness of soil removal e Use only mild neutral pH soaps Avoid laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers Using too much soap will leave a residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt For liquid cleaners about 20 drops per gallon 3 78 L of water is a good guide e Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while cleaning e Damage to your vehicle s interior may result from the use of many organic solvents such as naptha alcohol etc 5 95 Fabric Carpet Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment frequently to remove dust and loose dirt A canister vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats For soils always try to remove them first with plain water or club soda Before cleaning gently remove as much of the soil as possible using one of the following techniques e For liquids gently blot the remaining soil with a paper towel Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel until no more can be
54. High Beam V8 Engine Control Module LT LOW BEAM Driver s Side Headlamp Low Beam V8 ECM E Solenoid vap solenol Passenger s Side Headlamp RT LOW BEAM Low Beam Anti lock Brake Controller STR RLY Starter Relay RT HI BEAM Right Headlamp High Beam High Feature V6 Engine WASH Heated Washer Nozzles Air HFV6 ECM aes NOZ AQS Quality Sensor Control Module 5 108 Relays Usage Relays Usage HDLP WASH Ignition 3 Rain Sensor Headlamp RELAY Headlamp Washer ani Washer Windshield Wiper Washer JUMPER OPT Module Infotainment Export Only STARTER Starter PARK LAMP Parking Lamps Instrument Panel RELAY MINI RELAY MICRO Dimming Rear License Plate Lamps SPARE HIGH BEAM FOG LAMP RELAY MICRO Headlamp High Beam RELAY MICRO f09 Lamps LOW BEAM CMP CLU Ta RELAY HID Low Beam High Intensity Discharge RELAY MICRO Air Conditioning Compressor Clutch MINI OPT HIGH SPEED a ANI Front Blower Motor FAN RELAY Cooling Fan High Speed MINI POWERTRAIN RELAY MICRO Engine Controls Asay ti Cooling Fan Series Parallel Ignition 1 Starter Washer Nozzle Air Quality Anti lock Brake System HORN RELAY RUN CRANK_ Climate Control Panel Transmission MICRO RELAY MICRO Control Module Instrument Panel SPARE Cluster Mass Airflow Sensor Engine Control Module FAN RELAY reaker sage FANRECAY coalna Fan Low Speed Breakers MINI HRLB Ypp Headlamp Washer Option 5 109 Rear Underseat Fuse Block Removing the R
55. Information Center DIC gives you the status of many of your vehicle s systems The DIC is also used to display warning status messages All messages will appear in the DIC display located at the bottom of the instrument panel cluster below the tachometer and speedometer The DIC buttons are located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel The DIC comes on when the ignition is on After a short delay the DIC will display the current driver and the information that was last displayed before the engine was turned off The top line of the DIC display shows the vehicle system information and the warning status messages The bottom line of the DIC display shows either the odometer the trip odometer A or the trip odometer B information on the left side Only one odometer can appear at a time See Trip Information under DIC Controls and Displays on page 3 74 for information on changing the display to show the odometer or trip odometer information The bottom line of the DIC display also shows the outside temperature on the right side and the shift lever position indicator in the center See Automatic Transmission Operation STS on page 2 28 or Automatic Transmission Operation STS V on page 2 32 for more information on the shift lever positions When the sport mode is active an S will appear next to the shift position indicator on the center of the DIC display When the manual mode is active an M will appear
56. MP3 CD that was recorded using no file folders The system can support up to 11 folders in depth though keep the depth of the folders to a minimum in order to keep down the complexity and confusion in trying to locate a particular folder during playback If a CD contains more than the maximum of 50 folders 50 playlists 10 sessions and 255 files the player will let you access and navigate up to the maximum but all items over the maximum will be ignored Root Directory The root directory will be treated as a folder If the root directory has compressed audio files the directory will be displayed as F1 ROOT All files contained directly under the root directory will be accessed prior to any root directory folders However playlists Px will always be accessed before root folders or files Empty Directory or Folder If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the file structure that contains only folders subfolders and no compressed files directly beneath them the player will advance to the next folder in the file structure that contains compressed audio files and the empty folder will not be displayed or numbered 3 109 No Folder When the CD contains only compressed files the files will be located under the root folder The next and previous folder functions will have no function on a CD that was recorded without folders or playlists When displaying the name of the folder the radio will display ROOT When the
57. Message under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 79 3 40 Inadvertent Power Battery Saver This feature is designed to protect your vehicle s battery against drainage from the interior lamps trunk lamp glove box lamp or the garage door opener When the ignition is turned off the power to these features will automatically turn off after 10 minutes three minutes if a new car has 15 miles 24 km or less Power will be restored for an additional 10 minutes if any door is opened the trunk is opened or the courtesy lamp switch is turned on Head Up Display HUD A CAUTION If the HUD image is too bright or too high in your field of view it may take you more time to see things you need to see when it is dark outside Be sure to keep the HUD image dim and placed low in your field of view If equipped the Head Up Display HUD allows you to see some of the driver information that appears on your instrument panel cluster on the windshield The information may be displayed in English or metric units and appears as an image focused out toward the front of your vehicle To change from English to metric units see DIC Controls and Displays on page 3 74 The HUD consists of the following information Speedometer e Turn Signal Indicators e High Beam Indicator Symbol e Driver Shift Control Transmission Feature see United States version shown Canada similar Automatic Transmission Operation STS on page 2 2
58. Modifications When you add non GM accessories to your vehicle they can affect your vehicle s performance and safety including such things as braking stability ride and handling emissions systems aerodynamics durability and electronic systems like antilock brakes traction control and stability control Some of these accessories may even cause malfunction or damage not covered by warranty GM Accessories are designed to complement and function with other systems on your vehicle Your GM dealer can accessorize your vehicle using genuine GM Accessories When you go to your GM dealer and ask for GM Accessories you will know that GM trained and supported service technicians will perform the work using genuine GM Accessories California Proposition 65 Warning Most motor vehicles including this one contain and or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm Engine exhaust many parts and systems including some inside the vehicle many fluids and some component wear by products contain and or emit these chemicals Doing Your Own Service Work A CAUTION You can be injured and your vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough about it e Be sure you have sufficient knowledge experience the proper replacement parts and tools before you attempt any vehicle maintenance task Be sure to use the proper nuts bo
59. Press the tune select knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle 2 66 LOCK DELAY This feature delays the locking of the vehicle s doors for eight seconds after a power door lock switch or the lock button on the keyless access transmitter is pressed The eight second delay occurs after the last door is closed If the keyless access transmitter is left inside of the vehicle the doors will not lock Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory it was programmed to Mode 1 The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory To program the vehicle to a different mode use the following procedure 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until LOCK DELAY is highlighted 3 Press the tune select knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or pr
60. Reminder on page 3 35 for more information 3 71 Cruise Control Light This light comes on y whenever you set your cruise control The light will go out when the cruise control is turned off See Cruise Control on page 3 16 and Adaptive Cruise Control on page 3 19 for more information Highbeam On Light This light comes on whenever the high beam headlamps are on See Intellibeam Intelligent High Beam Headlamp Control System under Headlamps on page 3 31 and Headlamp High Low Beam Changer on page 3 8 for more information 3 72 Fuel Gage The fuel gage shows approximately how much fuel is in the tank It works only when the engine is on If the fuel supply gets low the Full Level Low message will appear on the DIC and a single chime will sound See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 79 for more information Here are a few concerns some owners have had about the fuel gage All of these situations are normal and do not indicate that anything is wrong with the fuel gage e At the gas station the gas pump shuts off before the gage reads full e The gage may change when you turn stop quickly or accelerate quickly e It takes a little more or less fuel to fill the tank than the gage indicated For example the gage may have indicated that the tank was half full but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank s capacity to fill the tank Driver Information Center DIC The Driver
61. When you are stuck spin the wheels as little as possible Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph 55 km h as shown on the speedometer Notice Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your vehicle as well as the tires If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting your transmission back and forth you can destroy your transmission For more information about using tire chains on your vehicle see Tire Chains on page 5 78 4 31 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out First turn your steering wheel left and right That will clear the area around your front wheels You should turn your traction control system off See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 9 Then shift back and forth between REVERSE R and a forward gear spinning the wheels as little as possible Release the accelerator pedal while you shift and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and reverse directions you will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle If that does not get you out after a few tries you may need to be towed out If you do need to be towed out see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4 37 4 32 Loading Your Vehicle It is very important to know how much weight your vehicle can carry This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants cargo and all nonfactory installed options Two labels on your vehicle show how much
62. a skid In any rear blowout remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go It may be very bumpy and noisy but you can still steer Gently brake to a stop well off the road if possible 5 81 If a tire goes flat and your vehicle has a spare tire see Run Flat Tires STS V Changing a Flat Tire STS Only on page 5 83 This information shows you how to use your vehicle s tire changing equipment and how to change a flat tire safely If your vehicle has run flat tires there is no spare tire and no tire changing equipment Run flat tires can operate effectively with no air pressure for a limited distance and speed Your vehicle also has a Tire A Pressure Monitor TPM which will alert you if there is a A CAUTION loss of tire e in o of the tires These tires perform so well without any air pressure that a Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do Tire Pressure Monitor TPM is used to alert you when maintenance or repairs is dangerous without there is a low tire condition the appropriate safety equipment and training The jack provided with your vehicle is ae a at for eek a flat tire If it is AN CAUTION used for anything else you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack Use the jack provided with your vehicle only for changing a flat tire When the low tire warning light is displayed on the instrument panel cluster yo
63. a speed of about 25 mph 40 km h or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator This can really help on long trips Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph 40 km h If you apply your brakes the cruise control will shut off A CAUTION Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot drive safely at a steady speed So do not use your cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads On such roads fast changes in tire traction can cause needless wheel spinning and you could lose control Do not use cruise control on slippery roads If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction control system begins to limit wheel spin the cruise control will automatically disengage See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 9 and StabiliTrak System on page 4 11 When road conditions allow you to safely use it again you may turn the cruise control back on Setting Cruise Control A CAUTION If you leave your cruise control on when you are not using cruise you might hit a button and go into cruise when you do not want to You could be startled and even lose control Keep the cruise control switch off until you want to use cruise control 1 Move the cruise control switch to on 2 Get up to the speed you want 3 Press in the set button at the end of the lever and release it 4 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal This light
64. activate the cigarette lighter push it into the heating element and let go When the lighter is ready it will pop back out by itself 3 47 Climate Controls AUTO will appear on the display next to the fan mode indicators and recirculation indicator if your vehicle is equipped with the optional air quality sensor Dual Climate Control System 4 Press the AUTO button With this system you can control the heating cooling 2 Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting and ventilation for your vehicle generally between 70 F 21 C and 80 F 27 C Choosing the coldest or warmest temperature Automatic Operation setting will not cause the system to heat or cool any faster If you set the system at the warmest temperature setting the system will try to continuously heat the vehicle and will not adjust the system down as the vehicle warms up In cold weather the system may start at reduced fan speeds to avoid blowing cold air into your vehicle until warmer air is available The system will start out blowing air at the floor but may change modes automatically as the vehicle warms up to maintain the chosen temperature setting The length of time needed for warm up will depend Vehicles With Heated and Ventilated Seats Shown on the outside temperature and the length of time Vehicles Without Similar that has elapsed since your vehicle was last driven 3 Wait for the system to regulate This may take from AUTO
65. an automatic car wash The mist and wash cycles operate as normal and are not affected by the Rainsense function The Rainsense system can be overridden at any time by manually turning the wiper band to low or high speed When Rainsense is active the headlamps will turn on automatically The headlamps will turn off again once the wipers turn off if it is light enough outside If it is dark they will remain on See Wiper Activated Headlamps on page 3 35 Notice Do not place stickers or other items on the exterior glass surface directly in front of the moisture sensor Doing this could cause the moisture sensor to malfunction Windshield Washer 2 Washer Fluid The lever on the right side of the steering column also controls the windshield washer There is a button at the end of the lever To spray washer fluid on the windshield press the button and hold it The washer will spray until you release the button The wipers will continue to clear the window for about six seconds after the button is released and then stop or return to your preset speed A CAUTION In freezing weather do not use your washer until the windshield is warmed Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield blocking your vision If the fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir is low the message CHECK WASHER FLUID will appear on the Driver Information Center DIC display It will take 60 seconds after the bottle is ref
66. and Shifting Into Park P on page 2 36 WAIT XX MIN Minutes See Matching Transmitter s to Your Vehicle under Keyless Access System Operation on page 2 5 3 93 Audio System s Driving without distraction is a necessity for a safer driving experience See Defensive Driving on page 4 2 By taking a few moments to read this manual and get familiar with your vehicle s audio system you can use it with less effort as well as take advantage of its features While your vehicle is parked set up your audio system by presetting your favorite radio stations setting the tone and adjusting the speakers Then when driving conditions permit you can tune to your favorite stations using the presets and steering wheel controls if equipped A CAUTION This system provides you with a far greater access to audio stations and song listings Giving extended attention to entertainment tasks while driving can cause a crash and you or others can be injured or killed Always keep your eyes on the road and your mind on the drive avoid engaging in extended searching while driving 3 94 Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe driving For more information see Defensive Driving on page 4 2 Get familiar with your vehicle s audio system so you can use it with less effort and take full advantage of its features Here are some ways in which you can help avoid distraction while driving While your vehicle
67. be on for the fog lamps to work To turn the fog lamps on turn the fog lamp band on the lever up to the dot and release it The band will return to its original position To turn the fog lamps off turn the fog lamp band up to the dot and release it The band will return to its original position and the fog lamps will turn off If you turn on the high beam headlamps the fog lamps will also turn off They ll turn back on again when you switch back to low beam headlamps Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to be on along with the fog lamps Twilight Sentinel Twilight Sentinel can turn your lamps on and off for you A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes the Twilight Sentinel work so be sure it is not covered 3 37 With Twilight Sentinel you will see the following happen e When it is dark enough outside the front turn signal lamps DRL will go off and the headlamps and parking lamps will come on The other lamps that come on with headlamps will also come on e When it is bright enough outside the headlamps will go off and the front turn signal lamps DRL will come on as long as the exterior lamp switch is in the off position If you start your vehicle in a dark garage the automatic headlamp system will come on immediately Once you leave the garage it will take approximately one minute for the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it is light outside During t
68. belt system from doing its job have it repaired Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you ina crash They can rip apart under impact forces If a belt is torn or frayed get a new one right away Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers and have them repaired or replaced The airbag system does not need regular maintenance Notice If you damage the covering for the driver s or the right front passenger s airbag or the airbag covering on the driver s and right front passenger s seatback or the side impact airbag covering on the ceiling near the side windows the bag may not work properly You may have to replace the airbag module in the steering wheel both the airbag module and the instrument panel for the right front passenger s airbag the airbag module and seatback for the driver s and right front passenger s seat mounted side impact airbags or side impact airbag module and ceiling covering for the roof mounted side impact airbag Do not open or break the airbag coverings 1 63 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash A CAUTION A crash can damage the restraint systems in your vehicle A damaged restraint system may not properly protect the person using it resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash To help make sure your restraint systems are working properly after a crash have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible If you have
69. button will display while the feature is on The button for this feature is located on the steering wheel The steering wheel will take about three minutes to reach its maximum temperature Turn Signal Multifunction Lever The lever on the left side of the steering column includes the following e Turn and Lane Change Signals See Turn and Lane Change Signals on page 3 8 0 Headlamps See Headlamps on page 3 31 e D Headlamp High Low Beam Changer See Headlamp High Low Beam Changer on page 3 8 e Flash To Pass Feature See Flash to Pass on page 3 12 40 Fog Lamps See Fog Lamps on page 3 37 e Cruise Control See Cruise Control on page 3 16 e Adaptive Cruise Control If Equipped See Adaptive Cruise Control on page 3 19 e Forward Collision Alert FCA If Equipped See Forward Collision Alert FCA System on page 3 9 3 7 Turn and Lane Change Signals To signal a turn move the lever all the way up or down The lever returns automatically when the turn is complete An arrow on the instrument panel cluster will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash to signal a lane change Hold it there until the lane change is complete The lever returns to its original position when it s released Arrows that flash rapidly when signaling for a turn or lane change may be caused by a burned out signal bulb Other driver s won t s
70. by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle DOORS UNLOCK IN PARK The feature allows all of the doors to automatically unlock when the transmission is shifted into PARK P Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory it was programmed to Mode 1 The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory To program the vehicle to a different mode use the following procedure 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until DOORS UNLOCK IN PARK is highlighted 3 Press the tune select knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle KEYLESS FT Front DOOR UNLOCK This feature automatically unlocks the appropriate front door when you approach the vehicle with your keyless access transmitter and pull the respective door handle See Door Locks on page 2 12 for more information Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory it was programmed to Mode
71. can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals Windshield Washer Fluid What to Use When you need windshield washer fluid be sure to read the manufacturer s instructions before use If you will be operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing Adding Washer Fluid The CHECK WASHER FLUID message will appear on the Driver Information Center DIC when the fluid level is low See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 79 for more information Open the cap with the washer symbol on it Add washer fluid until the tank is full See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for reservoir location Notice e When using concentrated washer fluid follow the manufacturer s instructions for adding water Do not mix water with ready to use washer fluid Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system Also water does not clean as well as washer fluid Fill your washer fluid tank only three quarters full when it is very cold This allows for expansion if freezing occurs which could damage the tank if it is completely full Do not use engine coolant antifreeze in your windshield washer It can damage your washer system and paint 5 41 Brakes Brake Fluid Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5
72. cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water If so your electrical system may be wet The condition will usually be corrected when the electrical system dries out A few driving trips should turn the light off Have you recently changed brands of fuel If so be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel See Gasoline Octane on page 5 5 Poor fuel quality will cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed You may notice this as stalling after start up stalling when you put the vehicle into gear misfiring hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration These conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up This will be detected by the system and cause the light to turn on If you experience one or more of these conditions change the fuel brand you use It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off If none of the above steps have made the light turn off your dealer can check the vehicle Your dealer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that may have developed Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs Some state provincial and local governments have or may begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle Failure to pass this inspec
73. come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts Battery Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery When it is time for a new battery get one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery s label We recommend an ACDelco replacement battery See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for battery location and access Warning Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm Wash hands after handling 5 45 Vehicle Storage If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or more remove the black negative cable from the battery This will help keep your battery from running down A CAUTION Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode You can be badly hurt if you are not careful See Jump Starting on page 5 46 for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt 5 46 Jump Starting If your vehicle s battery has run down you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely A CAUTION Batteries can hurt you They can be dangerous because e They contain acid that can burn you e They contain gas that can explode or ignite e They contain enough electricity to burn you If you do not follow these steps ex
74. control A CAUTION If you operate Adaptive Cruise Control without your Head up Display HUD properly adjusted your Adaptive Cruise Control settings may not be visible You could forget your settings and be startled by Adaptive Cruise Control response and even lose control Keep your HUD on and properly adjusted when using Adaptive Cruise Conirol 3 22 The set speed is selected by the driver This is the speed you will travel if there is no vehicle detected in your path To set Adaptive Cruise Control do the following 1 Make sure the Head Up Display HUD is on and properly adjusted You cannot engage Adaptive Cruise Control unless the HUD is on See Head Up Display HUD on page 3 40 for more information 2 Move the switch to on 3 Get up to the speed you want 4 Press in the set button at the end of the lever and release it 5 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal Once Adaptive Cruise Control is set it may immediately apply the brakes if it detects a vehicle ahead is too close or moving slower than your vehicle This symbol will appear on the Head Up Display HUD to indicate that Adaptive Cruise Control is active The number indicates the set speed SET 63 O Sues SET SPEED 63 meu United States version shown Canada similar See Head Up Display HUD on page 3 40 for more information Make sure the set speed is visible on the HUD so you know the speed your vehicle will accelerate to
75. crashes A side impact airbag will inflate if the crash severity is above the system s designed threshold level The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design Side impact airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal or near frontal impacts rollovers or rear impacts A side impact airbag is intended to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck In any particular crash no one can say whether an airbag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were For frontal airbags inflation is determined by what the vehicle hits the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal and near frontal impacts For side impact airbags inflation is determined by the location and severity of the impact What Makes an Airbag Inflate In an impact of sufficient severity the airbag sensing system detects that the vehicle is in a crash The sensing system triggers a release of gas from the inflator which inflates the airbag The inflator airbag and related hardware are all part of the airbag modules inside the steering wheel instrument panel the side of the front seatbacks closest to the door and the ceiling of the vehicle near the side windows 1 56 How Does an Airbag Restrain In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel In moderate to severe side
76. dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground use the steps that follow If you are pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer STS Only on page 4 40 To shift into PARK P use the following steps 1 Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot 2 Move the shift lever into PARK P by pressing the button on the front of the shift lever while pushing the lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle Release the button 3 With your right foot still holding the brake pedal down set the parking brake with your left foot See Parking Brake on page 2 35 for more information 4 Turn the ignition off Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running A CAUTION It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the engine running Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set And if you leave the vehicle with the engine running it could overheat and even catch fire You or others could be injured Do not leave your vehicle with the engine running If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running be sure your vehicle is in PARK P and your parking brake is firmly set before you leav
77. discolorations and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface Although no defect in the paint job causes this GM will repair at no charge to the owner the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km of purchase whichever occurs first 5 101 Vehicle Care Appearance Materials Description Usage Removes swirl marks fine Tt Swirl Remover Polish scratches and other light surface contamination olishing Clo nterior and exterior Wax Treated polishing cloth Bone et ere Tar and Road Removes tar road oil and asphalt Foaming Tire Shine au o Chrome Cleaner Use on chrome or Low Gloss No wiping necessary and Polish stainless steel Medium foaming White Sidewall Removes soil and black shampoo Cleans and Tire Cleaner marks from whitewalls Wash Wax Concentrate lightly waxes Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl Biodegradable and z hosphate free Removes dirt grime p Glass Cleaner smoke and fingerprints ea Ae n Removes dirt and grime Spot Lifter Ane ieee gr aaa Chrome and Wire irom chrome wheels and vinyl and cloth Wheel Cleaner wire wheel covers upholstery Odorless spray odor E freer ane ord surface Odor Eliminator eliminator used on fabrics Finish Enhancer contaminants Spray on vinyl leather and carpet and wipe off 5 102 Vehicle Identification Engine Identification The eighth character in the VIN is the engin
78. except AUTO When this occurs Intellibeam will be disabled until the control is turned back to the AUTO position and the AUTOMATIC LIGHTS ON message is displayed on the DIC The Intellibeam system is turned off at the inside rearview mirror The vehicle s speed drops below 15 mph 24 km h Intellibeam may not turn off the high beams if the system cannot detect other vehicle s lamps because of any of the following The others vehicle s lamp s are missing damaged obstructed from view or otherwise undetected The other vehicle s lamp s are covered with dirt snow and or road spray The other vehicle s lamp s cannot be detected due to dense exhaust smoke fog snow road spray mist or other airborne obstructions Your vehicle s windshield is dirty cracked or obstructed by something that blocks the view of the Intellibeam light sensor 3 33 e Your vehicle s windshield is covered with ice dirt haze or other obstructions e Your vehicle is loaded such that the front end of the vehicle points upward causing the Intellibeam sensor to aim high and not detect headlamps and taillamps e You are driving on winding or hilly roads You may need to manually disable or cancel the high beam headlamps by turning the low beam headlamps on if any of the above conditions exist Disabling and Resetting Intellibeam at the Rearview Mirror Intellibeam can be disabled and reset to the origin
79. features can be programmed not to recall until the ignition is turned off To change feature preferences use the following procedure Entering the Personal Settings Menu To enter the feature programming mode use the following procedure 1 Be sure the ignition is either on in ACC position or in RAP and place the transmission in PARK P or the vehicle speed is less than 6 mph 9 km h 2 Press any button on the appropriate keyless access transmitter to identify yourself as Driver 1 or Driver 2 2 53 3 Turn on the radio by pressing the power volume knob 4 Press the CNFG radio button or the tune select knob located on the right side of the radio to enter the radio s main menu 5 Turn the tune select knob and scroll to SETUP 6 Press the tune select knob to enter the SETUP menu 7 Turn the tune select knob and scroll to PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU then press the tune select knob to turn the feature on A check mark appears after this selection when it is turned on and the entire list of personalization features will appear 8 Turn the tune select knob and scroll to the feature you want to change then press the tune select knob to turn the feature on or off If the feature is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name Some features have submenus that show additional features that can be turned on or off After entering a submenu turn the tune select knob and scroll to the feature you want t
80. had a crash do you need new belts or LATCH system parts After a very minor collision nothing may be necessary But if the belts were stretched as they would be if worn during a more severe crash then you need new parts 1 64 If the LATCH system was being used during a more severe crash you may need new LATCH system parts If belts are cut or damaged replace them Collision damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH system safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt or LATCH system was not being used at the time of the collision If an airbag inflates you will need to replace airbag system parts See the part on the airbag system earlier in this section If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need to replace the driver s and right front passenger s safety belt buckle assembly Be sure to do so Then the new buckle assembly will be there to help protect you in a collision After a crash you may need to replace the driver and front passenger s safety belt buckle assemblies even if the frontal airbags have not deployed The driver and front passenger s safety belt buckle assemblies contain the safety belt pretensioners Have your safety belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle has been in a collision or if your airbag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle or while you are driving See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 60 Se
81. hill and find a truck stopped in your lane or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you You can avoid these problems by braking if you can stop in time But sometimes you cannot there is not room That is the time for evasive action steering around the problem Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these First apply your brakes See Braking on page 4 6 It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a possible collision Then steer around the problem to the left or right depending on the space available An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o clock positions you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand But you have to act fast steer quickly and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly Off Road Recovery You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are driving If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement recovery should be fairly easy Ease off the accelerator and then if there is nothing in the way steer so that
82. if a vehicle is not detected in your path Keep in mind speed limits surrounding traffic speeds and weather conditions when adjusting your set speed If your vehicle is in Adaptive Cruise Control when the traction control system begins to limit wheel spin the Adaptive Cruise Control will automatically disengage See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 9 and StabiliTrak System on page 4 11 When road conditions allow you to safely use it again you may turn the Adaptive Cruise Control back on Increasing Set Speed While Using Adaptive Cruise Control There are two ways to increase the set speed e Use the accelerator to get to the higher speed Press the set button at the end of the lever then release the button and the accelerator pedal You will now cruise at the higher speed e Move the Adaptive Cruise Control switch from on to resume increase Hold it there until the desired set speed is displayed in the HUD then release the switch To increase your set speed in very small amounts move the switch briefly to resume increase Each time you do this your vehicle set speed will increase by 1 mph 1 6 km h Your vehicle will not reach the set speed until the system determines there is not a vehicle in front of you At that point your vehicle speed will increase to the set speed Decreasing Set Speed While Using Adaptive Cruise Control Press in the set decrease button on the end of the lever until you reach the lower s
83. in finding tracks and or difficulty in loading and ejecting If these problems occur check the bottom surface of the CD If the surface of the CD is damaged such as cracked broken or scratched the CD will not play properly If the surface of the CD is soiled see Care of Your CDs later in this section If there is no apparent damage try a known good CD Do not add any label to a CD it could get caught in the CD player If a CD is recorded on a personal computer and a description label is needed try labeling the top of the recorded CD with a soft marker instead Notice If you add any label to a CD insert more than one CD into the slot at a time or attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs you could damage the CD player When using the CD player use only CDs in good condition without any label load one CD at a time and keep the CD player and the loading slot free of foreign materials liquids and debris If an error appears on the display see CD Messages later in this section 3 111 F1 U Previous Folder Press this pushbutton to go to the first track in the previous folder Press and hold this pushbutton to reverse quickly within a track Release this pushbutton to play the passage REV and the elapsed time of the track will appear on the display Pressing this button while in folder random mode will take you to the previous folder and random the tracks in that folder F2 gt Next Folder Pr
84. in sport mode When you are in the sport mode the vehicle will still shift automatically While driving in sport mode the transmission may remain in a gear longer than it would in normal driving mode based on braking throttle input and vehicle lateral acceleration 2 Press the shift lever forward to upshift or rearward to downshift The DIC will show the requested gear range when moving the shift lever forward or rearward See Driver Information Center DIC on page 3 73 for more information on the DIC DRIVER DOOR AJAR A 00M m3 65 F While using the DSC feature the vehicle will have firmer shifting and increased performance You can use this for sport driving or when climbing descending hills to stay in gear longer or to down shift for more power or engine braking The transmission will only allow you to shift into gears appropriate for the vehicle speed and engine Revolutions Per Minute RPM The transmission will not automatically shift to the next higher gear if the engine rpm is too high If shifting is prevented for any reason the currently selected gear will flash multiple times indicating that the transmission has not shifted gears The transmission will allow you to shift to the gear selected and will automatically downshift when the vehicle comes to a stop This will allow for more power during take off and passing When accelerating your vehicle from a stop in snowy and icy conditions you may wan
85. in the receiver is being updated and encryption code no action is required This process should take no longer than 30 seconds No XM Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly but the vehicle is ina location that is blocking the XM signal When the vehicle is moved into an open area the signal should return Loading XM Acquiring channel audio The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and after 4 second delay text data No action is needed This message should disappear shortly Channel Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service Tune in to another channel Channel Unavail Channel no This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned longer available Tune to another station If this station was one of the presets choose another station for that preset button No Artist Info Artist Name Feature No artist information is available at this time on this channel not available The system is working properly 3 103 XM Radio Messages cont d Radio Display No Title Info Song Program Title No song title information is available at this time on this not available channel The system is working properly No CAT Info Category Name No category information is available at this time on this not available channel The system is working properly Not Found No channel available for There are no channels available for the selected category the chosen category The syst
86. in this section for more information Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory it was programmed to Mode 1 The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory To program the vehicle to a different mode use the following procedure 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until LIGHTS FLASH AT LOCK is highlighted 3 Press the tune select knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name You can select this feature by itself or you can combine it with Horn Chirps At Lock so that both the exterior lamps flash and the horn chirps when you lock your vehicle The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle EXT Exterior LIGHTS AT UNLOCK This feature turns on the exterior lamps when the keyless access transmitter is used to unlock the vehicle The lamps will remain on for about 20 seconds unless a door is opened the ignition is in ACC on or START or the keyless access transmitter is used to lock the vehicle Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from t
87. it is not going across the top of the engine air cleaner filter 5 26 3 Loosen the clamp and remove the duct from the passenger s side of the engine air cleaner filter 4 The two sides of the airbox are hinged at the bottom Open the airbox by pushing the top of the airbox cover toward the engine 5 Remove the air filter by lifting it straight up through the opening in the airbox 6 Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner filter See Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6 14 for the correct part number for the filter 7 Reinstall the cover by reversing Steps 1 through 4 If your vehicle has the 4 4L V8 STS V engine there is a special procedure for checking and changing the air cleaner filter Because this procedure is difficult you should have this done at the dealership service department Contact your dealer for additional information or the procedure can be found in the service manual To purchase a service manual see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7 14 A CAUTION Operating the engine with the air cleaner filter off can cause you or others to be burned The air cleaner not only cleans the air it helps to stop flames if the engine backfires If it is not there and the engine backfires you could be burned Do not drive with it off and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner filter off Notice lf the air cleaner filter is off a backfire can cause a damaging engin
88. lighter or the accessory power outlets Turn off the radio and all lamps that are not needed This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries And it could save the radio ih Wi iin mA Wy y DD Z My COE 4 Open the hoods and locate the positive and negative terminal locations of the other vehicle as well as the positive terminal location on your vehicle s battery See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for more information on the location of the battery 5 47 Notice lf you connect a negative cable to the ECM ECM mounting bracket or any cables that attach to the ECM bracket you may damage the ECM Always attach the negative cable to your vehicle s remote negative ground location instead of the ECM ECM bracket or any cables attached to the ECM bracket A CAUTION An electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan Your vehicle has a remote negative ground location as shown in the illustration It is located between the battery and the underhood fuse block You should always use this remote ground location instead of the terminal on the battery 5 48 A CAUTION A CAUTION Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode People have been hurt doing this and some have been blinded Use a flashli
89. lower attachments on the child restraint to the lower anchors if equipped in the vehicle The child restraint instructions will show you how 1 41 5 If the child restraint is forward facing attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor Refer to the child restraint instructions and the following steps 5 1 Find the top tether anchor 5 2 Open the top tether anchor trim cover to expose the anchor 5 3 If you have an adjustable head restraint raise the head restraint 5 4 Route attach and tighten the top tether according to your child restraint instructions and the following instructions If the position you are using does not have a head restraint and you are using a single tether route the tether over the seatback 1 42 If the position you are using does not have a head restraint and you are using a dual tether route the tether over the seatback If the position you are using has an adjustable head restraint and you are using a dual tether route the tether under the head restraint and in between the head restraint posts If the position you are using has an adjustable head restraint and you are using a single tether route the tether under the head restraint and in between the head restraint posts 6 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position If your child restraint is equip
90. now required to contain additives that will help prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming allowing your emission control system to work properly In most cases you should not have to add anything to your fuel However some gasolines contain only the minimum amount of additive required to meet U S Environmental Protection Agency regulations To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean or if your vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Also your GM dealer has additives that will help correct and prevent most deposit related problems Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol and reformulated gasolines may be available in your area General Motors recommends that you use these gasolines if they comply with the specifications described earlier However E85 85 ethanol and other fuels containing more than 10 ethanol must not be used in vehicles that were not designed for those fuels Notice Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol Do not use fuel containing methanol It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and also damage the plastic and rubber parts That damage would not be covered under your warranty Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions may contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl MMT ask the at
91. on page 2 25 for more information 3 87 RADAR CRUISE NOT READY When this message displays it means that the Adaptive Cruise Control system will not activate due to a temporary condition Your vehicle does not require service This message will also display when either of the following conditions occurs e The driver turns off the head up display HUD while the Adaptive Cruise Control is engaged e The driver attempts to engage the Adaptive Cruise Control while the HUD is off If this message appears when you attempt to activate the system continue driving for several minutes and then try activating the system again RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR This symbol appears with the RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR message When this message displays it means that the passenger s side rear door was not closed completely You should check to make sure that the door is closed completely 3 88 SERVICE AC Air Conditioning SYSTEM This message will display when the electronic sensors that control the air conditioning and heating systems are no longer working Have the climate control system serviced by your GM dealer if you notice a drop in heating and air conditioning efficiency SERVICE AIR BAG This message will display when there is a problem with the airbag system Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer immediately See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 60 for more information SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST This message will display whe
92. on page 5 3 for more information Competitive Driving Mode STS V The driver can select this optional handling mode by pressing the Traction Control button located near the shift lever twice within five seconds Competitive driving mode allows the driver to have control of the power applied to the rear wheels while the StabiliTrak system helps steer the vehicle by selective brake application In competitive mode the levels at which StabiliTrak is engaged have been modified to better suit a performance driving environment When the traction control warning light is on the Traction Control System will not be operating Adjust your driving accordingly When you press the Traction Control button again the Traction Control System will be on The traction engaged symbol will be displayed temporarily in the DIC and a chime will be heard See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 79 for more information Magnetic Ride Control Your vehicle may have Magnetic Ride Control that automatically adjusts the ride of your vehicle Automatic ride control is achieved through a computer used to control and monitor the suspension system The controller receives input from various sensors to determine the proper system response If the controller detects a problem within the system the DIC will display a SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS message See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 79 for more information See your dealer for service Limited Slip Re
93. on the DIC display When the normal mode is active only the shift position indicator will appear While the Driver Shift Control DSC feature is active the DIC will change to show the selected gear See Driver Shift Control DSC under Automatic Transmission Operation STS on page 2 28 or Automatic Transmission Operation STS V on page 2 32 for more information If a problem is detected a warning message will appear on the display Be sure to take any message that appears on the display seriously and remember that clearing the message will only make the message disappear not correct the problem 3 73 DIC Controls and Displays The Driver Information Center DIC has different modes which can be accessed by pressing the four DIC buttons located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel DIC Buttons Base Level If your vehicle does not have a Head Up Display HUD these are the buttons for your DIC 3 74 A IV Information Press the top or bottom of this button to scroll through the available vehicle information displays which include digital speed display if your vehicle has this feature fuel range fuel economy fuel used average speed timer battery voltage tire pressure if your vehicle has a tire pressure monitor TPM system and engine oil life if your vehicle has this feature If you have an STS V the DIC also has additional vehicle information displays which include engine b
94. on the instrument y panel cluster will come on while cruise control is on Resuming a Set Speed Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed and then you apply the brake This of course disengages the cruise control But you don t need to reset it Once you re going about 25 mph 40 km h or more you can move the cruise control switch briefly from on to resume accelerate You ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay there If you hold the switch at resume accelerate the vehicle will keep going faster until you release the switch or apply the brake So unless you want to go faster don t hold the switch at resume accelerate 3 17 Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two ways to go to a higher speed e Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed Press the set button at the end of the lever then release the button and the accelerator pedal You ll now cruise at the higher speed e Move the cruise switch from on to resume accelerate Hold it there until you get up to the speed you want and then release the switch To increase your speed in very small amounts move the switch briefly to resume accelerate Each time you do this your vehicle will go about 1 mph 1 6 km h faster If using the accelerator pedal and the set button at end of the lever to increase cruise set speed your new set speed must be at least 5 mph higher than current speed for this method to
95. original equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for your vehicle s tires when they are cold See Loading 5 68 Your Vehicle on page 4 32 for an example of the tire and loading information label and its location on your vehicle Also see nflation Tire Pressure on page 5 65 Your vehicle s TPMS can alert you about a low tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire maintenance See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 70 and Tires on page 5 57 Notice Do not use a tire sealant if your vehicle has Tire Pressure Monitors The liquid sealant can damage the tire pressure monitor sensors TPM Sensor Identification Codes Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors or rotate your vehicle s tires the identification codes will need to be matched to the new tire wheel position The sensors are matched to the tire wheel positions in the following order driver s side front tire passenger s side front tire passenger s side rear tire and driver s side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool See your GM dealer for service The TPMS sensors may also be matched to each tire wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire s air pressure If using this method to match TPMS sensors the complete procedure outlined below must be performed within 15 minutes of the vehicle being stationary You will have one minute to match the first tire w
96. page 5 18 J K Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir See Brake Fluid under Brakes on page 5 42 Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap See Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 5 31 and Cooling System on page 5 33 Engine Air Cleaner Filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 25 If your vehicle is equipped with front compartment underhood sight shields before closing the hood be sure to reinstall the sight shields To reinstall the shields locate the tabs on the left and right sides and insert them into the openings in the tower to tower brace Then insert the fasteners into the top of the shield and push the fasteners back into place Engine Oil Checking Engine Oil It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you get fuel In order to get an accurate reading the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for the location of the engine oil dipstick 1 Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan If you do not do this the oil dipstick might not show the actual level 2 Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth then push it back in all the way Remove it again keeping the tip down and check the level When to Add Engine Oil V6 Engine EE V8 Engine If the oil is below the cross hatched area at the tip of th
97. performance This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches 25 to 30 cm or to some limited production tires While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades they must also conform to federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria TPC standards Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 5 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction
98. performance Warning The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 5 75 Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Warning The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure 5 76 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis However if you n
99. press the BACK F6 button or wait for the display to time out Once program type is activated the PTYs will appear on the display above the pushbuttons in place of the preset stations if programmed Press the pushbutton for the PTY that you would like to listen to Not all stations support PTYs The radio may not go to all of the stations with that music type when pressing the pushbutton 3 102 AF Alternate Frequency Alternate frequency allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the same program type To turn AF on or off perform the following steps 1 Press the tune select knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until ALTERNATE FREQ appears on the display 3 Press the tune select knob to select AF OFF AF ON or AF REG An X will appear in the box when AF is selected on 4 Press the BACK F6 button to exit the display To return to the original display repeatedly press the BACK F6 button or wait for the display to time out Radio Message THEFTLOCK This message is displayed when the THEFTLOCK system has been activated Take the vehicle to the dealer for service XM Radio Messages Radio Display sus XL Explicit Language XL on the radio display These channels or any others can be blocked at a Channels after the channel name customer s request by calling 1 800 852 XMXM 9696 indicates content with explicit language XM Updating Updating The encryption code
100. proper type of replacement bulbs see Replacement Bulbs on page 5 55 A CAUTION For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this A CAUTION OOO section contact your dealer Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and i A can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb You or High Intensity Discharge HID others could be injured Be sure to read and Lighting follow the instructions on the bulb package A CAUTION Back Up Lamps To replace a back up lamp bulb do the following system operates at a very high voltage If you 1 Open the trunk See Trunk on page 2 14 for more try to service any of the system components information you could be seriously injured Have your dealer or a qualified technician service them The low beam high intensity discharge lighting Your vehicle may have HID headlamps and fog lamps After your vehicle s HID headlamp or fog lamp bulb has been replaced you may notice that the beam is a slightly different shade than it was originally This is normal 5 54 3 Fold the cover down slightly and locate the lamp assembly 4 Turn the socket counterclockwise and pull it straight out to remove it from the lamp assembly 5 Pull the old bulb straight out and reinstall the new bulb 6 Reverse the steps to reinstall Replacement Bulbs Exterior Lamp Bulb Number 3157K For replacement bulbs not listed here contact your dealer 2 Pull out the push pins holding down the top
101. readings are sent to a receiver located in the vehicle once every 60 seconds while the vehicle is being driven and once every 60 minutes if the vehicle is stationary for more than 15 minutes Using the Driver Information Center DIC tire pressure levels may be viewed by the driver For additional information and details about the DIC operation and displays see DIC Controls and Displays on page 3 74 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 79 5 67 If a low tire pressure condition is detected the TPM system will display the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning message on the DIC and at the same time illuminate the low tire pressure warning symbol on the instrument panel cluster Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label When the low tire pressure telltale is illuminated one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability A Tire and Loading Information Label attached to your vehicle shows the size of your vehicle s
102. return to the original display repeatedly press the BACK F6 button or wait for the display to time out The equalization settings are preset to EQO Normal EQ1 Pop EQ2 Rock EQ3 Jazz EQ4 Talk and EQ5 Country Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade To adjust the balance or fade perform the following steps 1 Press the tune select knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until BASS MID TREBLE appears on the display 3 Press the tune select knob to enter the tone settings 3 100 4 Press the tune select knob to scroll to BALANCE or FADER 5 Turn the tune select knob to adjust the BALANCE to the right or the left soeakers and the FADER to the front or the rear speakers 6 Press the tune select knob to set the adjustment 7 Press the BACK F6 button to exit the display To return to the original display repeatedly press the BACK F6 button or wait for the display to time out EQO will not appear on the display when in this mode RDS Messages ALERT Alert warns of local and national emergencies When an alert announcement comes on the current radio station or a related network station ALERT will appear on the display You will hear the announcement even if the volume is low or a CD is playing If a CD is playing play will stop during the announcement Alert announcements cannot be turned off If the radio tunes to a related network station for the announcement it will retur
103. running and transmission in NEUTRAL N slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only e To check the PARK P mechanism s holding ability With the engine running shift to PARK P Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service is required Underbody Flushing Service At least every spring use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect Recommended Fluids and Usage Fiuia Lubricant i 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable Lubricants PRE Engine water and use only DEX COOL Fluids and lubricants identified below by name part Cooling Coolant See Engine Coolant on number or specification may be obtained from System page 5 27 your dealer Intercooler Usage Fluid Lubricant System 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable Engine oil which meets GM Standard 4 4L V8 water and use only DEX COOL GM6094M and displays the American Supercharged Coolant Petroleum Institute API Certified for engine l Engine Oil Gasoline Engines starburst symbol Hydraulic Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or VEE ine GM Goodwrench oil meets all the Brake System equivalent DOT 3 brake fluid gine requirements for your vehicle To Windshield l 5 determine the proper viscosity for your Washer GM Optikl
104. select knob to enter the DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS submenu The following items will appear e RECALL EXIT SETTINGS e STORE EXIT SETTINGS Driver Exit Settings Submenu Items RECALL EXIT SETTINGS To recall exit settings use the following procedure 1 Enter the memory programming mode for your exit settings by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Driver Exit Settings Submenu 2 From the DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS submenu turn the tune select knob to scroll to RECALL EXIT SETTINGS and press in the knob If the vehicle is in PARK P one beep will sound and your previously saved exit position will then be recalled If the vehicle is not in PARK P three beeps will sound and your previously saved exit position will not be recalled A memory recall can be stopped by pressing any memory seat or mirror position button If you would like the stored exit positions to be recalled when your vehicle is in PARK P the vehicle is off and the driver s door is opened see AUTO EXIT SEAT and AUTO EXIT COLUMN under Vehicle Personalization on page 2 53 2 73 STORE EXIT SETTINGS To store exit settings use the following procedure 1 Adjust your settings for the driver s seat the outside rearview mirrors and the steering column to a comfortable exit position 2 Enter the memory programming mode for your exit settings by following the instructions listed previously under Entering th
105. selecting the follow distance The range of selectable distances may not be appropriate for all drivers and driving conditions If you prefer to travel at a follow distance farther than Adaptive Cruise Control allows disengage the system and drive manually SET Driver action is required when e Adaptive Cruise Control cannot apply sufficient 70 braking because you are approaching a vehicle 6 too rapidly e The vehicle speed drops below about MPH 20 mph 32 km h FOLLOWING GAP e A temporary condition prohibits Adaptive Cruise Control from operating See DIC Warnings and ge CCl l l I a Messages on page 3 79 for more information e A malfunction is detected in the system See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 79 for more A graphic on the HUD indicates the selected follow information distance This picture shows a maximum follow distance The vehicles will move closer together as you select a smaller follow distance Alerting the Driver A CAUTION The alert symbol will flash om tte HOD ancra warning braking ability to slow your vehicle In some beep will sound when 2 driver action is required cases Adaptive Cruise Control may not have time to slow your vehicle enough to avoid a collision Be ready to take action and apply the brakes yourself See Defensive Driving on page 4 2 United States version shown Canada similar See Defensive Driving on page 4 2 Adaptive Cruise Control has only limited 3 25 App
106. start the engine because your vehicle cannot move easily 2 32 Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK P before starting the engine Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system You must fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK P when the vehicle is running If you cannot shift out of PARK P ease pressure on the shift lever Push the shift lever all the way into PARK P while pressing the button on the shift lever as you maintain brake application Then move the shift lever into the gear you wish See Shifting Out of Park P on page 2 38 Notice Shifting to REVERSE R while your vehicle is moving forward could damage the transmission The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Shift to REVERSE R only after your vehicle is stopped REVERSE R Use this gear to back up At low vehicle speeds you can also use REVERSE R to rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow ice or sand without damaging your transmission See f Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 4 31 for additional information NEUTRAL N In this position the engine does not connect with the wheels To restart when you are already moving use NEUTRAL N only You can also use NEUTRAL N when your vehicle is being towed A CAUTION Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is running at high speed is dangerous Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal your
107. system is designed to turn off the passenger s frontal airbag if the system detects a rear facing child restraint no system is fail safe and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off General Motors recommends that rear facing child restraints be secured in the rear seat even if the airbag is off If you need to secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint ina rear seat 1 59 The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger s frontal airbag if e the right front passenger seat is unoccupied e the system determines that an infant is present in a rear facing infant seat e the system determines that a small child is present in a forward facing child restraint e the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat e aright front passenger takes his her weight off of the seat for a period of time e the right front passenger seat is occupied by a smaller person such as a child who has outgrown child restraints e or if there is a critical problem with the airbag system or the passenger sensing system When the passenger sensing system has turned off the passenger s frontal airbag the off indicator in the overhead console will light and stay lit to remind you that the airba
108. system operates Remove any additional material from the seat cushion before reinstalling or securing the child restraint or small occupant You may want to consider not using seat covers or other aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has the passenger sensing system See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 62 for more information about modifications that can affect how the system operates 1 61 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced There are parts of the airbag system in several places around your vehicle Your dealer and the service manual have information about servicing your vehicle and the airbag system To purchase a service manual see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7 14 A CAUTION For up to 20 seconds after the ignition key is turned off and the battery is disconnected an airbag can still inflate during improper service You can be injured if you are too close to an airbag when it inflates Avoid wires wrapped with yellow tape yellow coverings or yellow connectors They are probably part of the airbag systems Be sure to follow proper service procedures and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so The airbag system does not need regular maintenance 1 62 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle Q Is there anything might add to the front or sides of the vehicle that could keep
109. that a new battery be installed in your hand held transmitter for quicker and more accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal 2 48 Programming Universal Home Remote Follow these steps to program up to three channels 1 Press and hold down the two outside Universal Home Remote buttons releasing only when the Universal Home Remote indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not hold down the buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat this step to program a second and or third hand held transmitter to the remaining two Universal Home Remote buttons 2 Position the end of your hand held transmitter about 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the Universal Home Remote buttons while keeping the indicator light in view 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the desired Universal Home Remote button and the hand held transmitter button Do not release the buttons until Step 4 has been completed Some entry gates and garage door openers may require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure noted in Gate Operator and Canadian Programming later in this section 4 The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly after Universal Home Remote successfully receives the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter Release both buttons 5 Press and hold the newly trained Universal Home Remote button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly progr
110. the driver the system can apply limited braking or acceleration of the vehicle automatically to maintain a selected follow distance to the vehicle ahead The vehicle s braking during Adaptive Cruise Control is comparable to a person applying moderate pressure to the vehicle s brake pedal 3 19 To disengage Adaptive Cruise Control apply the brake If no vehicle is in your path your vehicle will react like traditional cruise control A CAUTION Adaptive Cruise Control will not apply hard braking or bring the vehicle to a complete stop It will not respond to stopped vehicles pedestrians or animals When you are approaching a vehicle or object Adaptive Cruise Control may not have time to slow your vehicle enough to avoid a collision Your complete attention is always required while driving and you should be ready to take action and apply the brakes For more information see Defensive Driving on page 4 2 3 20 A CAUTION e On winding roads Adaptive Cruise Control may not detect a vehicle ahead You could crash into a vehicle ahead of you Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control on winding roads Adaptive Cruise Control may not have time to slow your vehicle enough to avoid a crash when you are driving in conditions where vehicles may suddenly slow or stop ahead of you enter your lane or cross your vehicle s path If you are driving in these conditions do not use Adaptive Cruise Control The warning beep and a
111. the following 1 Press and hold down the two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not hold the two outside buttons for longer than 30 seconds 2 Release both buttons The Universal Home Remote is now in the train learning mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Step 2 under Programming Universal Home Remote shown earlier in this section Individual buttons cannot be erased but they can be reprogrammed See Reprogramming a Single Universal Home Remote Button following this section Reprogramming a Single Universal Home Remote Button To program a device to Universal Home Remote using a Universal Home Remote button previously trained follow these steps 1 Press and hold the desired Universal Home Remote button Do not release the button 2 The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds While still holding the Universal Home Remote button proceed with Step 2 under Programming Universal Home Remote shown earlier in this section For additional information on Universal Home Remote see Customer Assistance Offices on page 7 4 Storage Areas Glove Box To open the glove box lift up on the lever The glove box has a light inside Cupholder s Your vehicle has two cupholders in the center console area Center Console Storage Area Your vehicle has a center console storage area located between the front seats It includes stor
112. the high beams are on See Highbeam On Light on page 3 72 Your vehicle is equipped with variable intensity high beams The high beam indicator on the instrument panel will illuminate as soon as the high beams start to come on and will remain on until the high beams have completely turned off All Intellibeam equipped vehicles however will quickly turn off the high beams if the system detects the sudden presence of vehicle lights ahead Driving with Intellibeam Intellibeam will only activate your high beams when driving over 20 mph 32 km h The high beam headlamps will remain on under the control of Intellibeam until any of the following situations occur e The system detects an approaching vehicle s headlamps e The system detects a preceding vehicle s taillamps e The outside light is bright enough that high beam headlamps are not required e The high beam headlamps are manually turned on or you use the flash to pass feature See Headlamp High Low Beam Changer on page 3 8 and Flash to Pass on page 3 12 When either of these conditions occur the Intellibeam feature will be temporarily disabled until the high beam stalk is returned to the neutral position If either of these conditions occur and Intellibeam already has the high beam headlamps on the Intellibeam feature will be disabled and the Intellibeam light in the mirror will turn off The exterior lamp control is turned to any setting
113. the oil from the filter before disposal Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash pouring it on the ground into sewers or into streams or bodies of water Instead recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil If you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil ask your dealer a service station or a local recycling center for help Engine Air Cleaner Filter P 4 6L V8 Engine shown 3 6L V6 Engine similar The engine air cleaner filter is in the engine compartment on the driver s side of the vehicle near the front See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for more information on locating the air cleaner filter 5 25 When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspect the air cleaner filter at the Maintenance II intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each 50 000 mile 83 000 km interval See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 for more information If you are driving in dusty dirty conditions inspect the filter at each engine oil change How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner Filter To inspect the air cleaner filter remove the filter from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dust and dirt If the filter remains caked with dirt a new filter is required To inspect or replace the filter in the 3 6L V6 or 4 6L V8 engines do the following 1 Remove the two screws located on the top of the cover 2 Disconnect the coolant recovery hose so that
114. the proper tools and equipment for the job If you have any doubt see your GM Goodwrench dealer to have a qualified technician do the work Some maintenance services can be complex So unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equipment you should have your GM Goodwrench dealer do these jobs When you go to your GM Goodwrench dealer for your service needs you will know that GM trained and supported service technicians will perform the work using genuine GM parts If you want to purchase service information see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7 14 Owner Checks and Services on page 6 8 tells you what should be checked when to check it and what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition The proper replacement parts fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 and Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6 14 When your vehicle is serviced make sure these are used All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle We recommend the use of genuine GM parts Scheduled Maintenance When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message in the Driver Information Center DIC comes on it means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 600 miles 1 000 km It is possible that if you are driving under the best c
115. tires This damage would not be covered by warranty Do not use liquid sealants in your vehicle s run flat tires Inflation Tire Pressure Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate effectively Notice Do not let anyone tell you that under inflation or over inflation is all right It is not If your tires do not have enough air under inflation you can get the following e Too much flexing e Too much heat e Tire overloading e Premature or irregular wear e Poor handling e Reduced fuel economy If your tires have too much air over inflation you can get the following e Unusual wear e Poor handling e Rough ride e Needless damage from road hazards 5 65 A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the vehicle s center pillar below the driver s door latch This label lists your vehicle s original equipment tires and shows the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they are cold The recommended cold tire inflation pressure shown on the label is the minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your vehicle s maximum load carrying capacity For additional information regarding how much weight your vehicle can carry and an example of the tire and loading information label see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 32 How you load your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort never load your vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry When to Chec
116. to keep it away from moving engine parts If you do not it could be damaged How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in The answer depends on the outside temperature the kind of oil you have and some other things Instead of trying to list everything here we ask that you contact your dealer in the area where you will be parking your vehicle The dealer can give you the best advice for that particular area 2 27 Automatic Transmission Operation STS A CAUTION The shift lever is located on the center console between the front seats It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the There are several different parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll positions for the shift lever Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK P See Shifting Into Park P on page 2 36 If you are pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer STS Only on page 4 40 PARK P This position locks the rear wheels It is the best position to use when you start the engine because your vehicle cannot move easily 2 28 Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK P before starting the engine Your vehicle has
117. turned off the passenger s frontal airbag A child ina rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag Do not use a rear facing child restraint in the right front passenger s seat if the airbag is turned on 3 62 Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a rear facing child restraint A label on your sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys A CAUTION Even though the passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the passenger s frontal airbag if the system detects a rear facing child restraint no system is failsafe and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off We recommend that rear facing child restraints be secured in the rear seat even if the airbag is off If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag status indicator it means that the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger s frontal airbag See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 58 for more on this including important safety information If after several seconds all status indicator lights Charging System Lig ht remain on or if there are no lights at al
118. under Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 67 e The valet lockout switch is on e The keyless access transmitter is in the vehicle e The vehicle s hood is open e The vehicle personalization feature is not enabled e An unauthorized vehicle entry or a vehicle theft was attempted Your keyless access transmitter with the remote start button provides an increased range of operation However the range may be less while the vehicle is running As a result you may need to be closer to your vehicle to turn it off than you were to turn it on There are other conditions which can affect the performance of the transmitter see Keyless Access System on page 2 4 Doors and Locks Door Locks A CAUTION Unlocked doors can be dangerous e Passengers especially children can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle When a door is locked the handle will not open it You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors are not locked So wear safety belts properly and lock the doors whenever you drive Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Always lock your vehicle whenever you leave it Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle Locking your doors can help prevent this from happening
119. 06 percent The person would reach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce 120 ml glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1 1 2 ounces 45 ml of liquors like whiskey gin or vodka It is the amount of alcohol that counts For example if the same person drank three double martinis 3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each within an hour the person s 4 4 BAC would be close to 0 12 percent A person who consumes food just before or during drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level There is a gender difference too Women generally have a lower relative percentage of body water than men Since alcohol is carried in body water this means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same body weight will when each has the same number of drinks The law in most U S states and throughout Canada sets the legal limit at 0 08 percent In some other countries the limit is even lower For example it is 0 05 percent in both France and Germany The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States is 0 04 percent The BAC will be over 0 10 percent after three to six drinks in one hour Of course as we have seen it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks and how quickly the person drinks them But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of 0 10 percent Research shows that the driving skills of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching 0 05 percent and that the e
120. 1 52 53 29 0 800 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program EIMOBILITY This program available to qualified applicants can reimburse you up to 1 000 of the cost of eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle such as hand controls or a wheelchair scooter lift The offer is available for a very limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase lease For more details or to determine your vehicle s eligibility visit gmmobility com or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1 800 323 9935 Text telephone TTY users call 1 800 833 9935 GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program Call 1 800 GM DRIVE 463 7483 for details TTY users call 1 800 263 3830 Roadside Service Cadillac s exceptional Roadside Service is more than an auto club or towing service It provides every Cadillac owner with the advantage of contacting a Cadillac advisor and where available a Cadillac trained dealer technician who can provide on site service Each technician travels with a specially equipped service vehicle complete with the necessary Cadillac parts and tools required to handle most roadside repairs Cadillac Roadside Service can be reached by dialing 1 800 882 1112 24 hours a day 365 days a year This service is provided at no charge for any situation covered by the base warranty coverage and ata nominal charge if the Cadillac is no longer covered by the base warranty Roadside Service is available only in
121. 2 AM or XM1 or XM2 if equipped Tune Turn this knob to select radio stations K1 l Seek Press the left single arrow button to go to the previous station and stay there Press the right single arrow button to go to the next station and stay there The sound will mute while seeking The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band K HI Scan Press the double arrow scan button to enter scan mode SCAN will appear on the display Press this button to scan to the next station The radio will go to a station play for 5 seconds then go on to the next station Press this button again to stop scanning To scan preset stations press and hold the double arrow scan button for more than two seconds until you hear a beep and PSCAN appears on the display The radio will go to the first preset station play for 5 seconds then go on to the next preset station Press this button again to stop scanning presets The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band 3 97 LOCAL DISTANT Selection With this feature you can set the radio to search for local stations or stations that are further away for a larger selection To set this feature to LOCAL or DISTANT perform the following steps 1 Press the tune select knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until SEEK LOCAL or SEEK DISTANT appears on the display 3 Press the tune select kn
122. 2 ATST Artist To display the artist name e F3 ALBM Album To display the album name F4 FLDR Folder To display the folder name 5 Press the BACK F6 button to exit the display To return to the original display repeatedly press the BACK F6 button or wait for the display to time out SRCE Source Press this button to select a source either radio or CD The CD must be loaded to select the source and to play CD will appear on the display if a CD is loaded If a CD is not loaded the display will not change from the radio source 2 Eject Press this button to stop a CD when it is playing or to eject a CD when it is not playing Eject may be activated with the ignition and the radio off 3 113 CD Messages If the CD comes out it could be for one of the following reasons e If itis very hot When the temperature returns to normal the CD should play e If you are driving on a very rough road When the road becomes smoother the CD should play e The CD is dirty scratched wet or upside down e The air is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again e The format of the CD may not be compatible See MP3 Format earlier in this section e There may have been a problem while burning the CD e The label may be caught in the CD player If the CD is not playing correctly for any other reason try a known good CD If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected contact y
123. 2006 Cadillac STS STS V Owner Manual Q Seats and Restraint Systems 006 1 1 Front Seats sore e E scat anette 1 2 Rear Seals saropan naea naa 1 7 Safety Belis asdecicsocseweteorcaredaciifaciieuet deters 1 8 Child Restraints oo ccccecce cece sees ee eees 1 26 Airbag Systemi oo cece ccc ccc aaar eenenes 1 48 Restraint System Check oo ce cece eee eee ee 1 63 Features and Controls 00ccccceeseeeseeeeeenees 2 1 KOYS scsertesiesi AEREA EE EEEN 2 3 Doors and LOCKS oo cece eee cecececeeeeeeeeeaees 2 12 WINDOWS oziccencdehst chicos ndccsseeatawehortenevee titan 2 17 Theft Deterrent Systems 0 eee cece eee ee 2 20 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle _ 2 24 Minois i esnin a Srotiedamnadeamesetans 2 41 OnStar System aeeeonororrreereeorooerrrerererer 2 45 Universal Home Remote System _ 2 47 Storage Areas exscsawechecncocuswceid rean i RES 2 51 SUMOON peee ia r Aea 2 52 Vehicle Personalization ssscsssessecreeerrenne 2 53 Instrument Panel c0cccccceeceee sees sees eeeeeenees 3 1 Instrument Panel Overview oo eee eeeeeeeeeee es 3 4 Climate Controls oo ccceceeeeceee cease eee 3 48 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators _ 3 57 Driver Information Center DIC ow 3 73 Audio System s Driving Your Vehicle 00ccceseeeeeeeeees 4 1 Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle _ 4 2 TOWING taisescunsan
124. 3 Press the tune select knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name 2 57 If this feature is selected START BUTTON RECALL cannot be selected The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle START BUTTON RECALL If your vehicle has the optional memory package you will have this feature When this feature is turned on you can recall any previously programmed seat mirror and steering column position when the start button on the ignition is pressed Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory it was programmed to Mode 2 The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory To program the vehicle to a different mode use the following procedure 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until START BUTTON RECALL is highlighted 2 58 3 Press the tune select knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name If this feature is selected REMOTE RECALL MEMORY cannot be selected The mode you selected is now set Y
125. 4 A beep will sound and the DIC will read READY FOR FOB 1 At this time all previously known transmitters have been erased 15 Once the transmitter is recognized and programmed a beep will sound and the DIC will display READY FOR FOB 2 2 Place the new unrecognized transmitter into the transmitter pocket with the transmitter buttons facing the front of the vehicle The transmitter pocket is inside the center console storage area located 16 Remove the keyless access transmitter and press between the driver and front passenger seats the unlock button twice to initialize it If you have additional transmitters to program this process can be repeated until four transmitters have been programmed The DIC will then display MAX FOBS LEARNED and will exit the programming mode When you are done programming transmitters press the unlock button on each keyless access transmitter twice After performing this process transmitters previously programmed will no longer work with your vehicle and must be reprogrammed Battery Replacement Under normal use the battery in your keyless access transmitter should last about three years You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter will not work at the normal range in any location If you have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works it is probably time to change the battery The DIC may display KEY FOB BATTERY LOW A weak battery may also cause the DIC to di
126. 5 If you drive regularly in steep country or if you are planning to visit there here are some tips that can make your trips safer and more enjoyable e Keep your vehicle in good shape Check all fluid levels and also the brakes tires cooling system and transmission These parts can work hard on mountain roads A CAUTION If you do not shift down your brakes could get so hot that they would not work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Shift down to let your engine assist your brakes on a steep downhill slope A CAUTION Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL N or with the ignition off is dangerous Your brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down They could get so hot that they would not work well CAUTION Continued 4 26 CAUTION Continued You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Always have your engine running and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill e Know how to go down hills The most important thing to know is this let your engine do some of the slowing down Shift to a lower gear when you go down a steep or long hill e Know how to go uphill You may want to shift down to a lower gear The lower gears help cool your engine and transmission and you can climb the hill better e Stay in your own lane when driving on two lane roads in hills or mountains Do not swing wide or cut across the center
127. 8 E Enty LIONN 5 2 cacesac ne atest antuniaae e aaie 3 39 Event Data Recorders EDR cseeeeeeeee ees 7 8 Electrical System Extender Safety Belt 0 eee 1 26 Add On Equipment 0 ccccsceeeceeeeeeeeeeees 5 104 Exterior Lighting Battery Saver 0 eee 3 38 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 00 5 105 Headlamp Wiring cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 104 Power Windows and Other Power Options 5 105 F Rear Underseat Fuse Block 8 5 110 Fil Underhood Fuse Block ccccccccsceeseecenesees 5 106 HE ot ae Windshield Wiper Fuses cccccccecee 5 104 Mae Nc Ia ka aa a i Endi Finish Damage crees sanae aean teases 5 101 gine Flash to Pass 3 12 Air Cleaner Filter ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen trees 5 25 AP O PASS raean Ternir poa Oeean aka cee 5 Flat Tire tsccccsecnebeavians ese cenetucanuncamabenaienennaiete 5 81 Battery icicicetiiignsesnes anionen anna a 5 45 Flat Tire Changi 5 83 Check and Service Engine Soon Light 3 67 ee T ANGING A a COGAN secssdcuisemieddavcsacsiaatamicuantahien a 5 27 Bcd ME aN a eia ar Eiee agate Coolant Heater scccietsvevscodiseecevtatcerdiceareeleies 2 27 j CeT ae T Coolant Temperature Gage esessereeeeree 3 67 ea ae raS MISSION aaae rrr gE reee hae 5 40 Coolant Temperature Warning Light 3 66 Ower Steering 0 ceseeseseeseneeeersetsneeteeees Windshield Washer
128. 8 or Automatic Transmission Operation Be sure to continue scanning your displays controls TS V 2 32 and driving environment just as you would in a vehicle OS T aA page without HUD If you never look at your instrument Check Gages Icon panel cluster you may not see something important Adaptive Cruise Control Features and Indicators P a pra I GAGES E akt eer oi If Equipped Adaptive Cruise Control on conditions tne message will display in ere E the HUD View your Driver Information Center DIC fu for more information e Forward Collision Alert Features and Indicators If Equipped see Forward Collision Alert FCA System on page 3 9 e Radio Features 3 41 The HUD controls are located to the left of the steering wheel on the DIC control panel TI TT uw __J a Oy Head Up Display Press this button to change the position of the HUD on the windshield Press the top part of the button to move the HUD image up Press the bottom part of the button to move the HUD image down You can also adjust the brightness of the HUD image Press the knob on the center of the DIC control panel in until it pops out and then pull the knob until is completely extended Turn the knob clockwise or counter clockwise to increase or decrease the brightness If you turn the knob all the way to the left the HUD image will turn off 3 42 To adjust the HUD so you can see it properly do the following 1 Adjust the seat to a comf
129. A tire used on light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles Load Index An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall Maximum Load Rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight The sum of curb weight accessory weight vehicle capacity weight and production options weight Normal Occupant Weight The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 Ibs 68 kg See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 32 Occupant Distribution Designated seating positions Outward Facing Sidewall The side of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle The side of the tire that contains a whitewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer brand and or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the other sidewall of the tire Passenger P Metric Tire A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommended tire inflation pressure and shown on the tire placard See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 65 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 32 Radial Ply Tire A pne
130. ACCESSORY button to place the vehicle in accessory mode Press the button again and the vehicle will return to RAP Starting the Engine Move your shift lever to PARK P or NEUTRAL N Your engine will not start in any other position that is a safety feature To restart when you are already moving use NEUTRAL N only The keyless access transmitter must be in the vehicle for the ignition to work 2 25 Notice Do not try to shift to PARK P if your vehicle is moving If you do you could damage the transmission Shift to PARK P only when your vehicle is stopped 1 With your foot on the brake pedal press the START button located on the instrument panel If there is not a keyless access transmitter present the DIC will display NO FOB DETECTED See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 79 for more information When the engine begins cranking let go of the button The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm If the battery in the keyless access transmitter is weak the DIC will display FOB BATTERY LOW You can still drive the vehicle See Battery Replacement under Keyless Access System Operation on page 2 5 for more information Notice Holding the button in for longer than 15 seconds at a time will cause the vehicle s battery to be drained much sooner This can also cause damage to the starter motor Wait 15 seconds between each try to avoid draining your vehicle s battery or damaging the starter
131. Airbag Inflate 0 1 56 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates 1 57 When Should an Airbag Inflate 0 1 55 Where Are the Airbags ceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 51 All Wheel Drive sessirnir cenir tier vane 5 51 All Wheel Drive AWD System n 4 12 Antenna Diversity Antenna System 0 3 122 Antenna XM Satellite Radio Antenna System ccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 3 122 Anti Lock Brake System ABS o ae 4 7 Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light 3 65 Appearance Care Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels 5 99 Care of Safety Belts eeceeeeeeeeee eee neee 5 97 Chemical Paint Spotting ceeeeeeeeeee ees 5 101 Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses 05 5 98 Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle 5 94 Fabric Carpet ccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 5 96 Finish CANS oscinina aie SE 5 98 Finish Damage iseci irena daar cceetesceas 5 101 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic Surfaces iersinii 5 97 Leather ri r r E A 5 96 Sheet Metal Damage eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 100 Speaker COVErs cccceceeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 97 TINGS estrone tesa tisnonaatmasehanncaterecateg eta imate seaseats 5 100 Underbody Maintenance 5 101 Vehicle Care Appearance Materials 5 102 Washing Your Vehicle seeeeeeeeeeeeeee tees 5 98 Weathersitps ensin thet anina
132. Automatic When this button is pressed and 10 to 30 minutes Then adjust the temperature if the temperature is set the system will automatically necessary control the inside temperature the air delivery mode the air conditioning compressor and the fan speed 3 48 You can switch from English to metric units through the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Controls and Displays on page 3 74 The air conditioning system removes moisture from the air SO you may notice water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine This is normal Manual Operation 74 V Mode Pressing the mode switch and changing the mode cancels automatic operation and allows the operator to manually select the air delivery location Press AUTO to return to automatic operation The outboard air outlets will always receive airflow regardless of the mode selected See Outlet Adjustment on page 3 54 to change this airflow from the outboard outlets To change the current mode select one of the following 74 Vent This mode directs air to the instrument panel outlets 7 Bi Level This mode directs approximately half of the air to the instrument panel outlets and then directs most of the remaining air to the floor outlets In automatic operation cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets td Floor This mode directs most of the air to the floor outlets with some air d
133. C e Protect against rust and corrosion e Help keep the proper engine temperature e Let the warning lights and gages work as they should Notice Using coolant other than DEX COOL may cause premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion In addition the engine coolant may require changing sooner at the first maintenance service after each 25 000 miles 41 500 km or 24 months whichever occurs first Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always use DEX COOL silicate free coolant in your vehicle What to Use Use a mixture of one half clean drinkable water and one half DEX COOL coolant which will not damage aluminum parts If you use this coolant mixture you do not need to add anything else 5 28 A CAUTION Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid such as alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will Your vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture your engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant Notice f you use an improper coolant mixture your engine could overheat and be badly damaged The repair cost would not be covered by your warranty Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crac
134. CD contains only playlists and compressed audio files but no folders all files will be located under the root folder The folder down and the folder up buttons will search playlists Px first and then go to the root folder When the radio displays the name of the folder the radio will display ROOT Order of Play Tracks will be played in the following order e Play will begin from the first track in the first playlist and will continue sequentially through all tracks in each playlist When the last track of the last playlist has been played play will continue from the first track of the first playlist 3 110 e Ifthe CD does not contain any playlists then play will begin from the first track under the root directory When all tracks from the root directory have been played play will continue from files according to their numerical listing After playing the last track from the last folder play will begin again at the first track of the first folder or root directory When play enters a new folder the display will not automatically show the new folder name The new track name will appear on the display File System and Naming The song name that will be displayed will be the song name that is contained in the ID3 tag If the song name is not present in the ID3 tag then the radio will display the file name without the extension such as mp3 as the track name Track names longer than 32 characters or 4 pages will be shorte
135. COOLANT LEVEL message displayed in the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 79 for more information There is also a coolant temperature gage and a coolant warning light on the instrument panel See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3 67 and Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light on page 3 66 for more information If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine A CAUTION Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly even if you just open the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Just turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood If you keep driving when your engine is overheated the liquids in it can catch fire You or others could be badly burned Stop your engine if it overheats and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5 32 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency Notice If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant your vehicle can be badly damaged The costly repairs would not be covered by your warranty See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5 32 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency 5 31 If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine An overheat warning along with a CHECK COOLANT LEVEL message
136. D is damaged such as cracked broken or scratched the CD will not play properly or not at all If the surface of a CD is soiled take a soft lint free cloth or dampen a clean soft cloth in a mild neutral detergent solution mixed with water and clean it Make sure the wiping process starts from the center to the edge Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it this could damage the surface Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge 3 121 Care of the CD Player The use of CD lens cleaners for CD players is not advised due to the risk of contaminating the internal lens of the CD optics with lubricants Diversity Antenna System The AM FM antenna is integrated with the rear window defogger located in the rear window Make sure that the inside surface of the rear window is not scratched and that the grid lines on the glass are not damaged If the inside surface is damaged it could interfere with radio reception Notice Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting with metallic film The metallic film in some tinting materials will interfere with or distort the incoming radio reception Any damage caused to your antenna due to metallic tinting materials will not be covered by your warranty Notice Do not try to clear frost or other material from the inside of the rear window with a razor blade or anything else that is sharp as this may damage the rear window defogger grid an
137. ERY VOLTS BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW This symbol appears with the BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW message When this message displays the electrical system is charging less than 10 volts or the battery has been drained If this message appears immediately after starting the engine it is possible that the generator can still recharge the battery The battery should recharge while driving but may take a few hours to do so Consider using an auxiliary charger to boost the battery after returning home or to a final destination Make sure you follow the manufacturer s instructions If this message appears while driving or after starting your vehicle and stays on have it checked immediately to determine the cause of this problem To help the generator recharge the battery quickly you can reduce the load on the electrical system by turning off the accessories The normal battery voltage range is 11 5 to 15 5 volts You can monitor battery voltage on the DIC by pressing the information button until you find BATTERY VOLTS CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON When this message displays it means that service is required for your vehicle See your GM dealer See Engine Oil on page 5 18 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 for more information When you reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message by clearing it from the display you still must reset the engine oil life system separately For more information on resetting the engine oil life system see Engine Oi
138. EXRON III Automatic Transmission All Wheel Fluid Look for Approved for the Drive H Specification on the label Front Axle All Wheel Drive Usage Fluid Lubricant Hood Latch Assembly Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol Secondary GM Part No U S 12346293 in Latch Pivots Canada 992723 or lubricant meeting Spring requirements of NLGI 2 Category Anchor and LB or GC LB Release Pawl Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube pee eine GM Part No U S 12346241 in ges Canada 10953474 Weatherstrip Dielectric Silicone Grease Conditioning GM Part No U S 12345579 in 9 Canada 992887 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement parts identified below by name part number or specification can be obtained from your GM dealer po Part TM Part Number ACDelco Part Number PF2129 PF 26 PF61 CF13C 41 990 41 991 41 986 Driver s Side 22 inches 56 5cm 88958361 yY O Passenger s Side 21 inches 53 0cm 88958359 Y Notice If your vehicle is an STS V model the engine uses a special oil filter The use of any other engine oil filter could lead to filter failure and result in severe engine damage Damage caused by use of the wrong engine oil filter would not be covered by your new vehicle warranty Engine Drive Belt Routing STS V 4 4L V8 Engine Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed record the date odometer reading who performe
139. Engine Only If you need more coolant add the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture at the intercooler fill neck but only when the engine is cool See Cooling System on page 5 33 for instructions on how to add coolant to the intercooler fill neck A CAUTION You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Do not spill coolant on a hot engine When replacing a pressure cap make sure it is See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for hand tight and fully seated the location of the intercooler system pressure cap Notice This vehicle has a specific coolant fill procedure Failure to follow this procedure could cause your engine to overheat and be severely damaged Park the vehicle on a level surface and turn off the engine When the engine is cold the coolant level should be at or above the FULL COLD line The FULL COLD line has an arrow pointing to it 5 30 Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap Notice lf the pressure cap is not tightly installed coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully installed on the coolant surge tank See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for more information on location Engine Overheating You will find an ENGINE COOLANT HOT IDLE ENGINE an ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE and a CHECK
140. OPT Module Option REAR DR MOD Rear Door Modules ELC SOL Automatic Level Control Exhaust OPT Solenoid Option ats DR Driver Door Module TV VICS Infotainment Export Only SPEAKER Rear Shelf Speaker DPM Memory Seat Lumbar TRUNK DR Trunk Release Valet VALET Lockout Switch REVERSE Reverse Lamps Rear Parking Aid LAMP Inside Rearview Mirror 5 112 Relays Usage R POSITION Right Rear Taillamp Position RELAY MICRO Lamps Option RUN RELAY bs ica Ignition 3 ELC RELAY f OPT Automatic Level Control Option Fuses Usage AIR BAG LAMBS OPT Rear Taillamps CONNECTOR Relays Usage Dee Rear Taillamps Position MICRO OPT Lamps Option Circuit Breakers SEATS C B INTERCOOLER PUMP MICRO Intercooler Pump Option OPT ELC RELAY Automatic Level Control MINI OPT Compressor Option L EREA Left Rear Taillamp Position RELAY EREA Lamps Option REL RELAY Doss Us REL RELAY Trunk Release Motor Diodes MICRO SPARE REV LAMP Reverse Lamps Rear Parking Aid RELAY MICRO Inside Rearview Mirror 5 113 Passenger s Side REAR FUEL PUMP winpow SPARE EFO RELAY MTRS C B TRUNK ELA MICRO SPARE DIODE REAR FOG STOP LAMP LAMP RLY RELAY 3 MICRO OPT MICRO STOP LAMPS FUEL RF HTD ST S BAND RADIO ONSTAR RUN VENT DIFF PUMP OPT PUMP COCO PSGRDR RTTURN RIM CIAC SUNROOF OPT COCO EL HTD STG
141. Olano er ee E OERE 5 5 Specifications viv s lt dess cesses eateries EEAS 5 6 GIOVE BOX ss cca daccvuconcans mad baccnceadadeauadagewosacuesess 2 51 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program 5 7 5 Hazard Warning Flashers ceceeeeeeeeee nee es 3 6 Head Restraints iisistestetcsasaaatuncesaaiaceredsieediase seine 1 6 Headlamp Wiring ccceeeeeeeeee eee teeta eeeen tees 5 104 Headlamps csndsectsandoeacs a A 3 31 Bulb Replacement eeceeeeeereeeeeeeeeees 5 54 Daytime Running Lamps eeeeeeeeee eee ee 3 35 Flashi to PaaS S enar aaenanened 3 12 Halogen BUDS ixcccicccacenect siitinostiiionniv ninas 5 54 High Intensity Discharge HID Lighting 5 54 High Low Beam Changer ceeeeeeeeeeerees 3 8 On Reminder wise icisieececetctsoneceeewsdeetdacancensaneas 3 35 WasShe somonras e a tua E 3 15 Wiper Activated esisiini sisiane 3 35 Head Up Display HUD csiceirisisiniiniii rnense 3 40 Heated Seats ccccccccceecccaeeeeeeeeeeeeeuees 1 3 1 4 Heated Steering Wheel ceeeeeeeeeeeeee eee es 3 7 Heater senei inoi RE S 3 48 Highbeam On Light c ceeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeneees 3 72 Highway Hypnosis meiscce nnsa R 4 25 Hill and Mountain Roads s e 4 25 Hood Checking Things Under eeeeeeeeeeeees 5 10 RECAS E sass tenateetncetn cane T RA 5 11 IOI ME E E E detente A NS 3 6 How to Use This Manual ncssssseesesinrnerserernrerenas ii
142. REETING is highlighted 3 Press the tune select knob to turn on the DRIVER GREETING feature The check mark will be cleared and the customized driver greeting is off The only way to correct a customized driver greeting once you have exited the screen to spell the name is to turn the driver greeting feature off and then turn it back on 2 55 KEY FOB REMINDER This feature chirps the horn three times when the driver s door is closed and there is a keyless access transmitter left inside of the vehicle This will only occur when the vehicle is off Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory it was programmed to Mode 1 The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory To program the vehicle to a different mode use the following procedure 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until KEY FOB REMINDER is highlighted 3 Press the tune select knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle 2 56 REMOTE START If your vehicle has this feature
143. RK P and release the shift lever button as you maintain brake application Then press the shift lever button and move the shift lever into the gear you wish If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still cannot shift out of PARK P try this 1 Press the ACC button twice to place the ignition in accessory mode 2 Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4 3 Shift to NEUTRAL N 4 Start the engine and then shift to the drive gear S you want A CAUTION 5 Have your vehicle inspected by your dealer as soon as possible Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under your vehicle and ignite Do not park over papers leaves dry grass or other things that can burn 2 38 Engine Exhaust A CAUTION Engine exhaust can kill It contains the gas carbon monoxide CO which you cannot see or smell It can cause unconsciousness and death You might have exhaust coming in if e Your exhaust system sounds strange or different e Your vehicle gets rusty underneath e Your vehicle was damaged in a collision CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued Your vehicle was damaged when driving over high points on the road or over road debris Repairs were not done correctly Your vehicle or exhaust system had been modified improperly If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your vehicle e Drive it only with all the windows down to blow out any CO and e Have your vehicle fixed immediately
144. S DETECTED This message is displayed if the vehicle does not detect the presence of a keyless access transmitter when you have attempted to start the vehicle or a vehicle door has just closed The following conditions may cause this message to appear e Driver added equipment plugged into the accessory power outlet on the center console is causing interference Examples of these devices are cell phones and cell phone chargers two way radios power inverters or similar items Try moving the keyless access transmitter away from these devices when starting the vehicle In addition PDA devices and remote garage and gate openers may also generate Electromagnetic Interference If moving the transmitter to different locations within the EMI that may interfere with the keyless access vehicle does not help place the transmitter in the transmitter Do not carry the keyless access center console transmitter pocket with the buttons facing transmitter in the same pocket or bag as forward and then press the START button these devices e The vehicle is experiencing Electromagnetic Interference EMI Some locations such as airports automatic toll booths and some gas stations have EMI fields which may interfere with your keyless access transmitter 3 86 NO FOB OFF OR RUN When this message displays it means that the keyless access transmitter is not detected inside the vehicle while you are trying to turn the ignition off Your vehi
145. Security Light cece eects eee eeeeee eee eeees 3 71 Care of the CD Player cccccccccccseeseesessessees 3 122 Fog Lamp Light sessseeeseeeseeeeseeeens 3 71 Diversity Antenna System c0cccccceeceeeeee 3 122 Lights On Reminder eeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteee eens 3 71 XM Satellite Radio Antenna System 3 122 Cruise Control Light c eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 3 72 Highbeam On Light senesinin ienris 3 72 Fuel GAJE ssevcicticesesagdslevicsectkeniddetacianedeceeoate 3 72 4 NOTES 3 3 Instrument Panel Overview The main components of your instrument panel are the following A Instrument Panel Brightness Control See nstrument Panel Brightness on page 3 39 Driver Information Center DIC Buttons See DIC Controls and Displays on page 3 74 HUD Controls If Equipped See Head Up Display HUD on page 3 40 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever See Turn Signal Multifunction Lever on page 3 7 Headlamp Controls See Headlamps on page 3 31 Cruise Control See Cruise Control on page 3 16 Adaptive Cruise Control If Equipped See Adaptive Cruise Control on page 3 19 Forward Collision Alert FCA If Equipped See Forward Collision Alert FCA System on page 3 9 Instrument Panel Cluster See Instrument Panel Cluster on page 3 58 Windshield Wiper Washer Lever See Windshield Wipers on page 3 13 Navigation Radio System See A
146. TINGS later in this section If you would like to store exit settings for the selected driver see STORE EXIT SETTINGS later in this section 2 71 RECALL DRIVER SETTINGS To recall driver settings use the following procedure 1 Enter the memory programming mode for your driver settings by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Driver Selection Submenu 2 From the DRIVER SELECTION submenu turn the tune select knob to scroll to RECALL DRIVER SETTINGS and press in the knob If the vehicle is in PARK P one beep will sound and your previously saved driving position will then be recalled If the vehicle is not in PARK P three beeps will sound and your previously saved driving position will not be recalled A memory recall can be stopped by pressing any memory seat or mirror position button If you would like the stored driving positions to be recalled when unlocking your vehicle with the keyless access transmitter or when starting your vehicle see REMOTE RECALL MEMORY or START BUTTON RECALL under Vehicle Personalization on page 2 53 2 72 STORE DRIVER SETTINGS To store driver settings use the following procedure ili Adjust your settings for the driver s seat the outside rearview mirrors and the steering column to a comfortable driving position Enter the memory programming mode for your driver settings by following the instructions listed prev
147. The battery saver does not work if the headlamps are turned on after the ignition is turned off If you need to leave the lamps on for more than 10 minutes use the exterior lamp control to turn the lamps back on Instrument Panel Brightness This feature controls the brightness of the instrument panel lights Ae Base Level Shown Uplevel Similar Press in the center knob on the DIC control panel until the knob pops out Then turn the knob clockwise to brighten the lights or counterclockwise to dim them If you turn the knob completely clockwise the interior lamps will turn on Entry Lighting The entry lighting system turns on the reading and dome lamps and the backlighting to the exterior lamp control when a door is opened or if you press the remote keyless entry transmitter unlock button If activated by the transmitter the lighting will remain active for about 25 seconds The entry lighting system uses the light sensor it must be dark outside in order for the lamps to turn on The lamps turn off about 25 seconds after the last door is closed They will dim to off if the ignition is on or immediately deactivate if the power locks are activated Parade Dimming This feature prohibits dimming of the instrument panel displays and backlighting during daylight hours when the key is in the ignition and the headlamps are on This feature operates with the light sensor and is fully automatic When the light sensor reads d
148. The ignition mode will change to OFF if a front door is opened See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 2 25 for more information If the shifter is not in PARK P the ignition mode will change to ACC See Shifting Into Park P on page 2 36 When the engine is off press this button to place the vehicle in accessory mode ACCESSORY ACTIVE will display on the Driver Information Center DIC This mode allows you to use things like the radio and the windshield wipers while the engine is off Use accessory mode if you must have your vehicle in motion while the engine is off for example if your vehicle is being towed If the door is open while in accessory mode the key in reminder chime will sound continuously If the push button start is not working your vehicle may be near a strong radio antenna signal causing interference to the keyless access system See D C Warnings and Messages on page 3 79 for more information After being in ACC for about 20 minutes the vehicle will automatically enter RAP or will turn off depending on if the doors are opened or closed Retained Accessory Power RAP The following accessories on your vehicle may be used for up to 20 minutes after the engine is turned off e Radio e Power Windows e Audio Steering Wheel Controls Power to these accessories stops after 20 minutes or if one of the front doors is opened If you want power for another 20 minutes close all the doors and press the OFF
149. This requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state local and rental vehicle provider requirements Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements insurance coverage credit card etc You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes levies usage fees excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair Generally it is not possible to provide a like vehicle as a courtesy rental Additional Program Information Courtesy Transportation is available during the Bumper to Bumper warranty coverage period but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating dealers and all program options such as shuttle service may not be available at every dealer 7 8 Please contact your dealer for specific information about availability All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel Canadian Vehicles For warranty repairs during the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty alternative transportation may be available under the Courtesy Transportation Program Please consult your dealer for details General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally m
150. When the CD is inserted CD will appear on the display As each new track starts to play the track number will appear on the display The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch 8 cm single CDs with an adapter ring Full size CDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner If playing a CD R the sound quality may be reduced due to CD R quality the method of recording the quality of the music that has been recorded and the way the CD R has been handled There may be an increase in skipping difficulty in finding tracks and or difficulty in loading and ejecting If these problems occur check the bottom surface of the CD If the surface of the CD is damaged such as cracked broken or scratched the CD will not play properly If the surface of the CD is soiled see Care of Your CDs later in this section If there is no apparent damage try a known good CD Do not add any label to a CD it could get caught in the CD player If a CD is recorded on a personal computer and a description label is needed try labeling the top of the recorded CD with a soft marker instead Notice If you add any label to a CD insert more than one CD into the slot at a time or attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs you could damage the CD player When using the CD player use only CDs in good condition without any label load one CD ata time and keep the CD player and the loading slot free of foreign materials liquids and debris If
151. Y and SERVICE RADAR CRUISE See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 79 Cleaning the System The radar can become blocked by snow ice or dirt If so you may need to turn off the engine and clean the lens See Cleaning the System under Adaptive Cruise Control on page 3 19 Flash to Pass This feature allows you to use the high beam headlamps to signal the driver in front of you that you want to pass Pull and hold the turn signal multifunction lever toward you to use this feature When you do the following will occur e Ifthe headlamps are off in low beam or in Daytime Running Lamps DRL mode the high beam headlamps will turn on They ll stay on as long as you hold the lever there Release the lever to turn them off e Ifthe headlamps are in high beam mode they will switch to low beam To return to high beam push the lever away from you Windshield Wipers The lever on the right side of the steering column operates the windshield wipers wv Mist Pull the lever down and release it for a single wiping cycle The lever will return to its original position For more cycles hold the lever down before releasing it O Off Put the lever in this position to turn off the wipers 7 Delay Put the lever in this position to set a delay between wipes Turn the delay adjustment band to set the length of the delay lt 8 Delay Adjustment Use this band to set the length of the delay between wipes w
152. abiliTrak System on page 4 11 What should you do if this ever happens Ease up on the accelerator pedal steer the vehicle the way you want it to go and slow down Since your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak the system may be active See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 79 and StabiliTrak System on page 4 11 Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed Of course the posted speeds are based on good weather and road conditions Under less favorable conditions you will want to go slower If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a curve do it before you enter the curve while your front wheels are straight ahead Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through the curve Maintain a reasonable steady speed Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve and then accelerate gently into the straightaway To help you steer in the direction you want to go during certain sharp or sudden cornering maneuvers gear selection is controlled This will maximize the available drive wheel torque and minimize the transmission response time and shift activity During this kind of maneuver the transmission shifts automatically as vehicle speed changes Adding non GM accessories can affect your vehicle s performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking For example you come over a
153. ach time the vehicle is started Cleaning the Mirror When cleaning the mirror use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing 2 44 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar and Compass Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview mirror with a compass display The mirror also contains OnStar controls For more information see OnStar System on page 2 45 The mirror includes an eight point compass display in the upper right corner of the mirror face When on the compass automatically calibrates as the vehicle is driven Mirror Operation bd On Off Press and hold the button located on the lower left side of the mirror face for about three seconds to turn the automatic dimming feature on or off The indicator light will illuminate when this feature is active The automatic dimming feature is active each time the vehicle is started Compass Operation Press the on off button once to turn the compass on or off When the ignition and the compass feature are on the compass will show two character boxes for about two seconds After two seconds the mirror will display the compass heading 2 42 Compass Calibration If after two seconds the display does not show a compass heading for example N for North there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the com
154. aches the FULL COLD FROID line on the side of the coolant surge tank 5 Then replace the pressure cap Be sure the pressure cap is hand tight and fully seated Start the engine and allow it to warm up If the CHECK COOLANT LEVEL message does not appear on the Driver Information Center DIC the coolant is at the proper fill level If the CHECK COOLANT LEVEL message does appear repeat Steps 1 to 3 then reinstall the pressure cap or see your GM dealer 5 37 How to Add Coolant to the Intercooler System Fill Neck 4 4L V8 STS V Engine Only If you have not found a problem yet turn the engine off and allow it to cool down then check to see if coolant is visible within the horizontal tube section of the fill neck If coolant is not visible add a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant to the fill neck Be sure the Intercooler System including the Intercooler System pressure cap is cool before doing so See Engine Coolant on page 5 27 for more information A CAUTION Turning the Intercooler System pressure cap when the engine and intercooler are hot can allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly Never turn the Intercooler System pressure cap even a little when the engine and intercooler are hot 5 38 A CAUTION Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid such as alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixtu
155. actly some or all of these things can hurt you Notice Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that would not be covered by your warranty Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it will not work and it could damage your vehicle 1 Check the other vehicle It must have a 12 volt battery with a negative ground system Notice If the other vehicle s system is not a 12 volt system with a negative ground both vehicles can be damaged Only use vehicles with 12 volt systems with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle 2 Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach but be sure the vehicles are not touching each other If they are it could cause a ground connection you do not want You would not be able to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure Put an automatic transmission in PARK P or a manual transmission in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake Notice If you leave your radio or other accessories on during the jump starting procedure they could be damaged The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always turn off your radio and other accessories when jump starting your vehicle 3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
156. ad will cause the lamps to go on and off or in some cases to remain off If this happens have the headlamp wiring checked right away Windshield Wiper Fuses The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal circuit breaker If the wiper motor overheats due to heavy snow the wipers will stop until the motor cools and will then restart Power Windows and Other Power Options Circuit breakers protect the power windows and power seats When the current load is too heavy the circuit breaker opens and closes protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away Fuses and Circuit Breakers The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses circuit breakers and fusible thermal links This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems Look at the silver colored band inside the fuse If the band is broken or melted replace the fuse Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating If a fuse should blow see your dealer for service immediately If you ever have a problem on the road and don t have a spare fuse you can borrow one that has the same amperage Just pick some feature of your vehicle that you can get along without like the radio or cigarette lighter and use its fuse if it is the correct amperage Replace it as soon as you can The fuses are located in three fuse blocks One is located in the engine
157. age areas and accessory power outlet s on the rear of the console Convenience Net If your vehicle has a convenience net the convenience net attaches to the floor or back wall of the rear of the vehicle using six anchor points The net can be used like a hammock across the rear of the vehicle or hooked on the floor Put small loads like grocery bags behind the net It can help keep them from falling over during sharp turns or quick starts and stops The net is not for larger heavier loads Store them in the rear of the vehicle as far forward as you can 2 51 Sunroof The vehicle may have a power sunroof The switches that operate the sunroof are located on the overhead console To open or close the sunroof the ignition must be ON or Retained Accessory Power RAP must be active See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 2 25 Express Open The express open feature will operate from the closed or partially open position To express open the power sunroof fully press the driver s side switch rearward once To stop the sunroof glass ina desired position other than to the express open position press the switch again in either direction to stop the movement If the sunshade is in the closed position it will open with the sunroof or it can be opened manually 2 52 Vent Open To open the power sunroof to the vent position from the closed position press and hold the passenger s side sunroof switch forward The
158. ailer STS Only eeeeeeeeeeee ees 4 40 Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle Defensive Driving The best advice anyone can give about driving is Drive defensively Please start with a very important safety device in your vehicle Buckle up See Safety Belts They Are for Everyone on page 1 8 A CAUTION Defensive driving really means Be ready for anything On city streets rural roads or expressways it means Always expect the unexpected Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued mistakes Anticipate what they might do and be ready Rear end collisions are about the most preventable of accidents Yet they are common Allow enough following distance Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on the driving task Anything that distracts from the driving task makes proper defensive driving more difficult and can even cause a Collision with resulting injury Ask a passenger to help do these things or pull off the road in a safe place to do them These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life Drunken Driving Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a national tragedy It is the number one contributor to the highway death toll claiming thousands of victims every year Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle e Judgment e Muscular Coordinati
159. al factory setting by using the controls on the inside rearview mirror AUTO D Intellibeam On Off To disable the system press this button on the inside rearview mirror The Intellibeam indicator will turn off and the will not come back on until the Intellibeam button is pressed again When Intellibeam has turned on the high beams pull or push the high beam stalk This will disable Intellibeam The Intellibeam indicator on the mirror will turn off To re enable Intellibeam press the Intellibeam button on the mirror 3 34 A different sensitivity setting is available for dealer diagnostics This is done by pushing and holding this button for 20 seconds until the light flashes three times If you accidentally activate this the vehicle s setting will automatically be reset each time the ignition is turned off and then on again otherwise refer to the text above for resetting the system Cleaning the Intellibeam Light Sensor The light sensor is located on the inside of the vehicle a in front of the inside rearview mirror Clean the light sensor window periodically using glass cleaner on a soft cloth Gently wipe the sensor window Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the surface of the sensor window Wiper Activated Headlamps This feature activates the headlamps and parking lamps after the windshield wipers have been in use for about six seconds For this feature to work automatic li
160. allout that can take their toll over a period of years To help keep the paint finish looking new keep the vehicle in a garage or covered whenever possible Windshield and Wiper Blades If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if the wiper blade chatters when running wax sap or other material may be on the blade or windshield Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass cleaning liquid or powder and water solution The windshield is clean if beads do not form when it is rinsed with water Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades and affect their performance Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full strength windshield washer solvent Then rinse the blade with water Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary replace blades that look worn Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels The vehicle may be equipped with either aluminum or chrome plated wheels Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water Rinse with clean water After rinsing thoroughly dry with a soft clean towel A wax may then be applied Notice f you use strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes cleaners brushes or cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or chrome plated wheels you could damage the surface of the wheel s The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Use only GM approved cleaners on aluminum or chrome plated wheels The surface
161. alue will display If the tire pressure is low LOW will appear on the display with the value If the tire pressure is high HIGH will appear on the display with the value Press the information button to scroll through the following displays LF TIRE This display shows the air pressure in the driver s side front tire RF TIRE This display shows the air pressure in the passenger s side front tire LR TIRE This display shows the air pressure in the driver s side rear tire RR TIRE This display shows the air pressure in the passenger s side rear tire If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of a value there may be a problem with your vehicle If this consistently occurs see your GM dealer for service 3 77 ENGINE OIL LIFE If your vehicle has this display it shows the estimated oil life remaining If you see 99 ENGINE OIL LIFE on the display that means that 99 of the current oil life remains When the oil life is depleted the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display You should change your oil as soon as possible In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life additional maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this manual See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 and Engine Oil on page 5 18 After an oil change reset the ENGINE OIL LIFE display To reset see Engine Oil Life System on page 5 24 The display will show 100 ENGINE OIL LIFE after it has be
162. amming is complete and your device should activate when the Universal Home Remote button is pressed and released To program the remaining two Universal Home Remote buttons begin with Step 2 under Programming Universal Home Remote Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the programmed channels If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the programming of a rolling code equipped device most commonly a garage door opener Locate in the garage the garage door opener receiver motor head unit Locate the Learn or Smart button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor head unit 7 Firmly press and release the Learn or Smart button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8 8 Return to the vehicle Firmly press and hold the programmed Universal Home Remote button for two seconds then release Repeat the press hold release sequence a second time and depending on the brand of the garage door opener or other rolling code device repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming The Universal Home Remote should now activate your rolling code equipped device To program the remaining two Universal Home Remote buttons begin with Step 2 of Programming Universal Home Remote
163. an Petroleum Institute API You should look for this information on the oil container and use only those oils that are identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol on the front of the oil container Notice Use only engine oil identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty GM Goodwrench oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle If you are in an area of extreme cold where the temperature falls below 20 F 29 C it is recommended that you use either an SAE 5W 30 synthetic oil or an SAE OW 30 oil Both will provide easier cold starting and better protection for your engine at extremely low temperatures 5 21 For V8 Engine Vehicles Only RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS HOT WEATHER FIT c LOOK FOR THIS SYMBOL AND GM STANDARD GM4718M DO NOT USE SAE 10W 40 SAE 20W 50 OR ANY OTHER VISCOSITY GRADE COLD WEATHER OIL NOT RECOMMENDED 5 22 Look for two things GM4718M Your vehicle s engine requires a special oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M Oils meeting this standard may be identified as synthetic However not all synthetic oils will meet this GM standard You should look for and use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M Notice lf you use oils that do not have t
164. an automatic transmission shift lock control system You must fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK P when the ignition is on If you cannot shift out of PARK P ease pressure on the shift lever Push the shift lever all the way into PARK P while pressing the button on the shift lever as you maintain brake application Then move the shift lever into the gear you wish See Shifting Out of Park P on page 2 38 Notice Shifting to REVERSE R while your vehicle is moving forward could damage the transmission The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Shift to REVERSE R only after your vehicle is stopped REVERSE R Use this gear to back up At low vehicle speeds you can also use REVERSE R to rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow ice or sand without damaging your transmission See f Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 4 31 for additional information NEUTRAL N In this position the engine does not connect with the wheels To restart when you are already moving use NEUTRAL N only You can also use NEUTRAL N when your vehicle is being towed A CAUTION Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is running at high speed is dangerous Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal your vehicle could move very rapidly You could lose control and hit people or objects Do not shift into a drive gear while your engine is running at high speed
165. an error appears on the display see CD Messages later in this section When a CD is inserted the CD functions will appear on the display above the pushbuttons in place of the preset stations if programmed F1 lt Reverse Press this pushbutton to go to the previous track Press and hold this pushbutton to reverse quickly within a track Release the pushbutton to play the passage The elapsed time of the track will appear on the display F2 gt Forward Press this pushbutton to go to the next track Press and hold this pushbutton to advance quickly within a track Release the pushbutton to play the passage The elapsed time of the track will appear on the display 3 105 F3 RDM Random Press this pushbutton to listen to the tracks in random rather than sequential order RANDOM will appear on the display Press RDM again to turn off random play RANDOM will disappear from the display F4 RPT Repeat Press this pushbutton to hear a track over again REPEAT will appear on the display Press RPT again to turn off repeat play REPEAT will disappear from the display F6 DISP Display Press this pushbutton to display the time of the track Press this pushbutton again to remove the time of the track from the display kX l Seek Press the left single arrow button to go to the previous or press the right single arrow button to go to the next track on the CD K Scan Press the double arrow button to lis
166. anadian Government cceeeeeeeeeeeees 7 13 Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government ceceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 7 13 Roadside Service cceceeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeeeenes 7 5 Service Publications Ordering Information 7 14 Daytime Running Lamps eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 3 35 Defensive Driving eceeeceeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 2 Diversity Antenna System c ceeeeeeeeeneee renee 3 122 Doing Your Own Service Work 6 ceeeeeeeee ees 5 4 Door LOCKS sorreran an candace E EA 2 12 Power Door LOCKS 0 eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 12 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 13 Rear Door Security LOCKS 0 ceeeeeeeeee ees 2 13 Driver Position Safety Belt cc cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee es 1 13 Driver Information Center DIC eeeeee 3 73 DIC Controls and Displays seeeeeeeeeeee 3 74 DIC Warnings and Messages 0 eeeeeeee 3 79 Other Messages ecceeeeeeeeeneee eee eeeeeneeeeenes 3 93 Driving AtdINIOM aso EE E T 4 18 E A E E TE a E 4 22 Detensie sianie eo E E NES 4 2 BIRONI N D E T A niente alets 4 3 FreBWaY sicisniranocisnin ensinaron iEn E 4 23 Hill and Mountain Roads 4 25 In Rain and on Wet Roads cece eee 4 20 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out 4 32 WINTER esi siisi danosa innn a 4 27 Dual Climate Control System eeeeeeeeeee 3 4
167. and are not capable of being personalized The number of programmable features varies depending upon which vehicle options are purchased On all vehicles features such as climate control settings radio and XM preset settings exterior lighting at unlock and remote lock unlock confirmation and language have already been programmed for your convenience Your vehicle also has an automatic door locking feature that is always on You cannot turn the automatic door locking feature off See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2 13 Some vehicles have additional features that can be programmed including the seat steering column and outside rearview mirror position If your vehicle has the base audio system the following information explains the vehicle personalization on your vehicle If your vehicle has the Navigation system see Personalization in the Index of the Navigation System manual for information on vehicle personalization If your vehicle has the ability to program additional personalization features the driver s preferences are recalled by pressing any button on the keyless access transmitter 1 or 2 by selecting Driver 1 or 2 on the radio display or when a valid keyless access transmitter is detected upon opening the driver s door If more than one valid keyless access transmitter is detected upon opening the driver s door the driver preferences for the lowest driver number will be recalled Certain
168. angerous If the vehicle slips off the jack you could be badly injured or killed Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack A CAUTION Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage be sure to place the jack in the proper location before raising the vehicle If you ever use a jack to lift your vehicle follow the instructions that came with the jack and be sure to use the correct lifting points to avoid damaging your vehicle 5 79 Notice Lifting your vehicle improperly can damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by your warranty To lift your vehicle properly follow the advice in this part To help prevent vehicle damage Be sure the jack you are using meets the weight standards for your vehicle and is in good working order Be sure to place a block or pad between the jack and the vehicle Make sure the jack you are using only contacts the jacking location lift points and is not leaning on any other vehicle components such as the rocker panels the floor pan or the stone guard moldings Lift only in the areas shown in the following pictures 5 80 Lifting From the Front The front lifting points can be accessed from either side of your vehicle behind the front tires 1 Locate the front lifting points using the diagram above The front lifting locati
169. ar Axle Your limited slip rear axle can give you additional traction on snow mud ice sand or gravel It works like a standard axle most of the time but when one of the rear wheels has no traction and the other does this feature will allow the wheel with traction to move the vehicle StabiliTrak System Your vehicle is equipped with a vehicle stability enhancement system called StabiliTrak It is an advanced computer controlled system that assists you with directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions StabiliTrak activates when the computer senses a discrepancy between your intended path and the direction the vehicle is actually traveling StabiliTrak selectively applies braking pressure at any one of the vehicle s brakes to help steer the vehicle in the direction which you are steering When the system activates a STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message will be displayed on the Driver Information Center See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 79 You may also hear a noise or feel vibration in the brake pedal This is normal Continue to steer the vehicle in the direction you want it to go If there is a problem detected with StabiliTrak a SERVICE STABILITY SYS message will be displayed on the Driver Information Center See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 79 When this message is displayed the system is not operational Driving should be adjusted accordingly StabiliTrak comes on automatically w
170. arkness outside and the parking lamps are active the instrument panel displays can be adjusted by turning the instrument panel brightness knob See nstrument Panel Brightness on page 3 39 for additional information 3 39 Reading Lamps The reading lamps are located on the overhead console These lamps come on automatically when any door is opened For manual operation press the button next to each lamp to turn it on Press it again to turn the lamp off If the reading lamps are left on they automatically shut off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off Battery Load Management The battery load management feature is designed to monitor the vehicle s electrical load and determine when the battery is in a heavy discharge condition During times of high electrical loading the engine may idle ata higher revolutions per minute rpm setting than normal to make sure the battery charges High electrical loads may occur when several of the following are on headlamps high beams fog lamps rear window defogger the climate control fan at high speeds heated seats and engine cooling fans If the battery continues to discharge even with the engine idling at a higher rpm setting some electrical loads will automatically be reduced When this occurs the rear window defogger may take slightly longer to clear the glass and the fan may cut back to a lower speed For more battery saving information see Battery Saver Active
171. as a guide for storing the compact spare tire and tools in the trunk A Compact Spare Tire E Compact Spare Tire Cover F Foam Insert B Plastic Wing Nut G Bolt C Retainer H Wheel Wrench D Jack Container with I Jack Wheel Wrench and Jack J Jack Container 1 Open the trunk See Trunk on page 2 14 6 Ensure the foam insert F is in place in the trunk area Reinstall the compact spare tire E with the valve stem up and line up the wheel nut hole with the bolt G or wheel center and place on the compartment floor Insert the jack container J with wheel wrench H and jack I into the center of the compact spare tire making sure to line up the wheel nut hole with the bolt G on the compartment floor Secure the tire and wheel with the retainer C and wing nut B Reinstall the compact spare tire cover A Compact Spare Tire STS Only Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when the vehicle was new it can lose air after a time Check the inflation pressure regularly It should be 60 psi 420 kPa 5 93 After installing the compact spare on the vehicle you should stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare tire is correctly inflated The compact spare is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph 105 km h for distances up to 3 000 miles 5 000 km so you can finish your trip and have the full size tire repaired or replaced where you want You must calibrate the tire infl
172. assengers who are not safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts Lap Shoulder Belt All rear seat positions have lap shoulder belts Here is how to wear one properly 1 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Do not let it get twisted The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly If this happens let the belt go back slightly to unlock it Then pull the belt across you more slowly 1 21 2 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way it will lock If it does let it go back all the way and start again If the belt is not long enough see Safety Belt Extender on page 1 26 Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 3 To make the lap part tight pull up on the shoulder part 1 22 PS S f ZN lt gt Be j or 4 3 or Se Kase ESA N PANSA Y ARAZ a rd ASS PEN E J The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones And you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force at
173. ate with Cadillac by dialing 1 800 833 CMCC 2622 TTY users in Canada can dial 1 800 263 3830 Customer Assistance Offices Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll free number for assistance If a U S customer wishes to write to Cadillac the letter should be addressed to Cadillac s Customer Assistance Center United States Customer Assistance Cadillac Customer Assistance Center Cadillac Motor Car Division P O Box 33169 Detroit MI 48232 5169 1 800 458 8006 1 800 833 2622 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 882 1112 Fax Number 313 381 0022 From Puerto Rico 1 800 496 9992 English 1 800 496 9993 Spanish Fax Number 313 381 0022 From U S Virgin Islands 1 800 496 9994 Fax Number 313 381 0022 Canada Customer Assistance General Motors of Canada Limited Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 1 888 446 2000 1 800 263 3830 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 882 1112 Overseas Customer Assistance Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit Mexico Central America and Caribbean Islands Countries Except Puerto Rico and U S Virgin Islands Customer Assistance General Motors de Mexico S de R L de C V Customer Assistance Center Paseo de la Reforma 2740 Col Lomas de Bezares C P 11910 Mexico D F 01 800 508 0000 Long Distance 01
174. ation has been used to improve vehicle crash performance and may be used to improve crash performance of future vehicles and driving safety Unlike the data recorders on many airplanes these on board systems do not record sounds such as conversation of vehicle occupants To read this information special equipment is needed and access to the vehicle or the device that stores the data is required GM will not access information about a crash event or share it with others other than e with the consent of the vehicle owner or if the vehicle is leased with the consent of the lessee e in response to an official request of police or similar government office e as part of GM s defense of litigation through the discovery process or e as required by law In addition once GM collects or receives data GM may e use the data for GM research needs e make it available for research where appropriate confidentiality is to be maintained and need is shown or e share summary data which is not tied to a specific vehicle with non GM organizations for research purposes Others such as law enforcement may have access to the special equipment that can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the device that stores the data If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar please check the OnStar subscription service agreement or manual for information on its operations and data collection Collision Damage Repair I
175. ation monitor system after installing or removing the compact spare See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5 67 The system may not work correctly when the compact spare is installed on the vehicle Of course it s best to replace the spare with a full size tire as soon as you can The spare will last longer and be in good shape in case you need it again Notice When the compact spare is installed do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with guide rails The compact spare can get caught on the rails That can damage the tire and wheel and maybe other parts of your vehicle Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with other wheels or tires They will not fit Keep the spare tire and its wheel together Notice Tire chains will not fit your compact spare Using them can damage your vehicle and can damage the chains too Do not use tire chains on your compact spare 5 94 Appearance Care Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle Your vehicle s interior will continue to look its best if it is cleaned often Although not always visible dust and dirt can accumulate on your upholstery Dirt can damage carpet fabric leather and plastic surfaces Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from your upholstery It is important to keep your upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled Soils should be removed as quickly as possible Your vehicl
176. automatic climate control system will not work properly 3 52 Defogging and Defrosting Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity moisture condensing on the cool window glass This can be minimized if the climate control system is used properly There are two modes to clear fog from your windshield Use the defog mode to clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers Use the defrost mode to remove fog or frost from the windshield more quickly AAV Mode Press this button until defog appears on the display 5 Defog This mode directs the air between the windshield and floor outlets with some air supplied to the outboard panel outlets and side window defogging outlets When you select this mode the system turns off recirculation and runs the air conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing The recirculation mode is cancelled when you enter defog mode If you select recirculation while in defog mode it will be cancelled after 10 minutes If you have fogging on the side windows remain in defog or defrost mode until they clear W Defrost Pressing the defrost button directs most of the air to the windshield with some air directed to the side windows and outboard panel outlets In this mode the system will automatically turn off recirculation and run the air conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing Recirculation cannot
177. bag the side of the seatback closest to the door for the seat mounted side impact airbags and the area along the ceiling of your vehicle near the side windows may be hot for a short time The parts of the bag that come into contact with you may be warm but not too hot to touch There will be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer the vehicle nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle A CAUTION When an airbag inflates there is dust in the air This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble To avoid this everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so If you have breathing problems but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates then get fresh air by opening a window or a door If you experience breathing problems following an airbag deployment you should seek medical attention Your vehicle has a feature that will automatically unlock the doors turn the interior lamps on turn the hazard warning flashers on and turn off the climate control system when the airbags inflate if battery power is available You can lock the doors turn the interior lamps off turn the hazard warning flashers off and turn the climate control system on by using the controls for those features 1 57 In many crashe
178. be selected while in the defrost mode This mode may also cause the fan speed and air temperature to increase Rear Window Defogger The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog or frost from the rear window The rear window defogger will only work when the ignition is in ON or during remote start if programmed See Personal Settings Menu under Vehicle Personalization on page 2 53 for additional information Ka Rear Window Defogger Press this button to turn the rear window defogger on or off Be sure to clear as much snow from the rear window as possible The rear window defogger will turn off about 10 minutes after the button is pressed or if the vehicle s speed is above 30 mph 48 km h the rear defogger will stay on continuously If turned on again the defogger will only run for about five minutes before turning off The defogger can also be turned off by pressing the button again or by turning off the engine The heated outside rearview mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror when the rear window defogger button is on Notice Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to clear the inside rear window Do not adhere anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass These actions may damage the rear defogger Repairs would not be covered by your warranty 3 53 Outlet Adjustment Use the lever located in the center of each outlet to change the direction o
179. ble XM offers over 100 coast to coast channels including music news sports talk and children s programming XM provides digital quality audio and text information including song title and artist name A service fee is required in order to receive the XM service For more information contact XM at www xmradio com or call 1 800 852 XMXM 9696 i Information Press this button while in XM mode to retrieve three different categories of information related to the current song or channel Artist Song Title Category or PTY To view this information perform the following 1 Press the tune select knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until INFO appears on the display 3 Press the tune select knob to select INFO The display will change to show the additional XM information 4 Press the BACK F6 button to exit the display To return to the original display repeatedly press the BACK F6 button or wait for the display to time out Playing the Radio D Power Press this knob to turn the system on and off lt 1 Volume Turn this knob to increase or to decrease the volume SRCE Source Press this button to select a source either radio or CD The CD must be loaded to select the source and to play CD will appear on the display if a CD is loaded If a CD is not loaded the display will not change from the radio source Finding a Station BAND Press this button to select FM1 FM
180. bration See Compass Calibration listed previously Cleaning the Mirror When cleaning the mirror use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing Outside Power Heated Mirrors The power mirror control is on the driver s door armrest and controls the drivers side and passenger s side mirrors TOE Move the selector switch left or right to choose the driver s side or passenger s side mirror Use the arrows located on the control pad to adjust the position of each mirror Adjust each mirror so you can see the side of your vehicle and the area behind your vehicle 2 43 Return the selector switch to the center position when finished adjusting This will prevent unwanted mirror movement in case the control pad is accidentally bumped while driving The preferred mirror positions can be stored with the memory option See Memory Seat Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 2 70 The mirrors can be manually folded inward to prevent damage when going through car washes or confined spaces To fold push the mirror toward the vehicle To return the mirror to its original position push outward Be sure to return both mirrors to their original unfolded position before driving When the rear window defogger is turned on both outside rear view mirrors are heated to help clear them of ice snow or con
181. can indicate a serious problem If you get an engine overheat warning with no CHECK COOLANT LEVEL message but see or hear no steam the problem may not be too serious Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you e Climb a long hill on a hot day e Stop after high speed driving e Idle for long periods in traffic e Tow a trailer If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam try this for a minute or so 1 In heavy traffic let the engine idle in NEUTRAL N while stopped If it is safe to do so pull off the road shift to PARK P or NEUTRAL N and let the engine idle 2 Set the climate controls to the highest heat setting and fan speed and open the windows as necessary If you no longer have the overheat warning you can drive Just to be safe drive slower for about 10 minutes If the warning does not come back on you can drive normally If the warning continues and you have not stopped pull over stop and park your vehicle right away 5 32 If there is still no sign of steam you can idle the engine for three minutes while you are parked If you still have the warning turn off the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down Also see Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode later in this section You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode This operating mode allows your vehicle to be driv
182. ccept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes and modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment 2 47 Universal Home Remote System Operation Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any garage door opener that does not have the stop and reverse feature This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1 1982 If you have a newer garage door opener with rolling codes please be sure to follow Steps 6 through 8 to complete the programming of your Universal Home Remote Transmitter Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the Universal Home Remote Because of the steps involved it may be helpful to have another person available to assist you in the programming steps Keep the original hand held transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future Universal Home Remote programming It is also recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle the programmed Universal Home Remote buttons should be erased for security purposes See Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons later in this section or for assistance see Customer Assistance Offices on page 7 4 Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or gate operator you are programming When programming a garage door it is advised to park outside of the garage It is recommended
183. ce warning signs and otherwise be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water Some Other Rainy Weather Tips e Besides slowing down allow some extra following distance And be especially careful when you pass another vehicle Allow yourself more clear room ahead and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray e Have good tires with proper tread depth See Tires on page 5 57 4 21 City Driving Se x a LE a T ie 4 e T a M NPH Bie PN iE Be 10 One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them You will want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic signals 4 22 Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving Know the best way to get to where you are going Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross country trip Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities You will save time and energy See Freeway Driving on page 4 23 Treat a green light as a warning signal A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it When a light turns green and just before you start to move check bo
184. ce the last service or if the message has not come on at all for one year Scheduled Maintenance Change engine oil and filter See Engine Oil on page 5 18 Reset oil life system See Engine Oil Life System on page 5 24 An Emission Control Service Visually check for any leaks or damage See footnote k ooo en o e O Inspect engine air cleaner filter If necessary replace filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 25 See footnote m Check tires for inflation pressures and wear See Tires on page 5 57 If tire rotation is recommended for your vehicle rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 70 and Tire Wear Inspection in At Least Once a Month on page 6 9 Inspect brake system See footnote a ooo o l Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels If you have the 4 4L V8 supercharged engine check intercooler fluid level Add fluid as needed Perform any needed additional services See Additional Required Services in this section inspect suspension and steering components See foomo 0 inspect engine cooling system See footnote M T Finspect wiper blades See footnote SSS inspect restaint system components See oroe 3 T F Lubricate body components Seefoomnole D J Check transmission hidlevel and add uid as needed J F Replace passenger compartment after See footnote o Additional Required Services The following services should be performe
185. cle s capacity weight and the original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure See Tire and Loading Information Label under Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 32 5 63 Run Flat Tires STS V If your vehicle has run flat tires there is no spare tire and no tire changing equipment Your vehicle also has a Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS which will alert you if there is a loss of tire pressure in any of the tires See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5 67 A CAUTION When the low tire warning light is displayed on the instrument panel cluster your vehicle s handling capabilities will be reduced during severe maneuvers If you drive too fast you could lose control of your vehicle You or others could be injured Do not drive over 55 mph 90 km h when the low tire warning light is displayed Drive cautiously and check your tire pressures as soon as you can 5 64 If a tire goes flat you will not need to stop on the side of the road to change the tire You can just keep on driving The vehicle s run flat tires can operate effectively with no air pressure for up to 50 miles 80 km at speeds up to 55 mph 90 km h The shorter the distance you drive and the slower the speed the greater the chance that the tire will not have to be replaced When a tire is filled with air it provides a cushion between the road and the wheel Because you will not have this cushion when driving on a deflated run fla
186. cle may be near a strong radio antenna signal causing the keyless access system to be jammed The vehicle will remain in ACC until OFF or START has been pressed or 10 minutes has expired If you turn the ignition off and you cannot find the keyless access transmitter you will not be able to restart the vehicle The keyless access transmitter needs to be inside of the vehicle in order for the vehicle to start See Starting the Engine on page 2 25 for more information OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE Notice f you drive your vehicle while the engine oil pressure is low severe engine damage may occur If a low oil pressure warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible Do not drive the vehicle until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected See Engine Oil on page 5 18 for more information A multiple chime will sound when this message is displayed See Engine Oil on page 5 18 for more information PASSENGER DOOR AJAR This symbol appears with the PASSENGER DOOR AJAR message When this message displays it means that the passenger s side front door was not closed completely You should make sure that the door is closed completely PRESS START AND BRAKE TO START ENGINE When this message displays it means that you need to press down on the brake pedal while pressing the start button on the electronic keyless ignition when trying to start your vehicle See Starting the Engine
187. cle is dangerous but it is even more dangerous if the keyless access transmitter is also left in the vehicle A child or others could be badly injured or even killed They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move Do not leave the keyless access transmitter in a vehicle with children There is one key for the driver s door glove box and rear seat pass through door See Rear Seat Pass Through Door under Trunk on page 2 14 for more information Your vehicle has a Keyless Access System with pushbutton start See gnition Positions on page 2 24 for information on starting the vehicle Notice If you ever lose your transmitter s and or key it could be difficult to get into your vehicle You may even have to damage your vehicle to get in Be sure you have a spare transmitter and or key In an emergency contact Cadillac Roadside Assistance See Roadside Service on page 7 5 If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar system OnStar may be able to send a command to unlock your vehicle if needed If the vehicle battery is dead OnStar will be unable to unlock the vehicle See OnStar System on page 2 45 for more information 2 4 Keyless Access System Your vehicle has a Keyless Access System that operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operati
188. cle properly Using the Maintenance Schedule We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition But we do not know exactly how you will drive it You may drive very short distances only a few times a week Or you may drive long distances all the time in very hot dusty weather You may use your vehicle in making deliveries Or you may drive it to work to do errands or in many other ways Because of all the different ways people use their vehicles maintenance needs vary You may need more frequent checks and replacements So please read the following and note how you drive If you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition see your GM Goodwrench dealer This schedule is for vehicles that e carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits You will find these limits on the tire and loading information label See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 32 e are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits e use the recommended fuel See Gasoline Octane on page 5 5 The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 should be performed when indicated See Additional Required Services on page 6 6 and Maintenance Footnotes on page 6 7 for further information A CAUTION Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous In trying to do some jobs you can be seriously injured Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know how and
189. collisions even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle The airbag supplements the protection provided by safety belts Airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant s upper body stopping the occupant more gradually But the frontal airbags would not help you in many types of collisions including rollovers rear impacts and many side impacts primarily because an occupant s motion is not toward the airbag Side impact airbags would not help you in many types of collisions including many frontal or near frontal collisions and rear impacts primarily because an occupant s motion is not toward those airbags Airbags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts and then only in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions for the driver s and right front passenger s frontal airbags and only in moderate to severe side collisions for side impact airbags What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates After the frontal and seat mounted side impact airbags inflate they quickly deflate so quickly that some people may not even realize the airbags inflated Roof mounted side impact airbags are designed to deflate more slowly and may still be at least partially inflated minutes after the vehicle comes to rest Some components of the airbag module the steering wheel hub for the driver s airbag the instrument panel for the right front passenger s
190. compartment on the passenger s side of the vehicle and the other two are located under the rear seat on both the driver s and passenger s side of the vehicle 5 105 Underhood Fuse Block 5 106 Oo g 7 HDLP WASH b S GENN RELAY JUMPER el la STARTER gt z OPT 3 18 RELAY ca N a fe MINI 3 oa eS Q z 2 Es i O gt z 3 3 5 amp 5 2 A SPARE AOD Kz a E o FOG LAMP CMP CLU a RELAY RELAY b 3 STARTER ABS z MICRO MICRO 9 is E BLOWER ERAe AX ES 8 RELAY POWERTRAIN al a Z 9 z MINI RELAY s lal la 13 MICRO 8 Ol J Ee g o 3 n X ii a x zZ m gt o E E T 9 al 8 o lal JS lal fel El a q lt ES a z lt a o o G T el lt E a a a Cig a 3 x InN N NE HIGH FAN LOW FAN z 12 aj 2 Je J 8 a z z E Je z JEL JL jel JE LOW SPEED ACCESSORY T EYES EV ELE e FAN RELAY RELAY MINI HIGH BEAM RELAY LOW BEAM MICRO RELAY HID HIGH SPEED S P FAN MINI OPT FAN RELAY RELAY MINI The underhood fuse block is located in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger s side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview on EVEN COILS Even Ignition Coils Even Fuel page 5 12 for more information on location and removal Injectors Hema for the front compartment underhood sights L REAR Driver e Side Rear Fuse Block To access the fuses push in the tabs located on each WPR MOD __ Wiper Module side of the fuse bl
191. ction 2 Features and Controls KRGY Si onarena R 2 3 Keyless Access System ccceeeeeeeeeneee een eeee es 2 4 Keyless Access System Operation 055 2 5 Doors and Locks cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 12 DOOR LOCKS maire E S aeanaees 2 12 Power Door LOCKS ececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 12 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 13 Rear Door Security Locks e eeeeeeeeeee ees 2 13 Lockout Protection 0 ts 2cibecceec cones weca essen scenes 2 14 TUNK tices Hoya diadie daneckineetad a e EEE EEES 2 14 WINdOWS 06 ccec ec ee cece eee eee e ee ee ee eee ee eaeaes 2 17 Power WIndOWS i ses 2isches ien on E EEEa 2 18 DUM VISOS wcca22 0tacsatactanadtatnuagtersautonssetesoncteet 2 20 Theft Deterrent Systems cceeeeeeeee ees 2 20 Theft Deterrent System ceeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 2 21 Valet Lockout Switch ccceceeeeeeeeeee eens 2 23 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle 2 24 New Vehicle Break In cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 24 IQnition POSIIONS 2 0 ectescaladyacediereesis hoes 2 24 Retained Accessory Power RAP 00 2 25 Starting the Engine ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 2 25 Engine Coolant Heater 0cceeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 2 27 Automatic Transmission Operation STS 2 28 Automatic Transmission Operation STS V 2 32 Parking Brake
192. cturer OEM parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts Read your lease carefully as you may be charged at the end of your lease for poor quality repairs If an Accident Occurs Here is what to do if you are involved in an accident e Try to relax and then check to make sure you are all right If you are uninjured make sure that no one else in your vehicle or the other vehicle is injured e If there has been an injury call 911 for help Do not leave the scene of an accident until all matters have been taken care of Move your vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or you are instructed to move it by a police officer e Give only the necessary and requested information to police and other parties involved in the accident Do not discuss your personal condition mental frame of mind or anything unrelated to the accident This will help guard against post accident legal action e Ifyou need roadside assistance call GM Roadside Assistance See Roadside Service on page 7 5 for more information e If your vehicle cannot be driven know where the towing service will be taking it Get a card from the tow truck operator or write down the driver s name the service s name and the phone number e Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is towed away Make sure this includes your insurance information and registration if you keep these items in your vehicle 7 11 e Gather the important information you w
193. cupant and Cargo Weight 700 Ibs 317 kg 4 34 Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 2 1 000 Ibs 453 kg 750 Ibs 340 kg Subtract Occupant Weight 150 Ibs Available Cargo Example 3 Item Description __ Tota Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 3 1 000 Ibs 453 kg Subtract Occupant Weight 200 Ibs 1 000 Ibs 453 kg 91 kg x5 250 Ibs 113 kg Available Cargo Refer to your vehicle s Tire and Loading Information label for specific information about your vehicle s capacity weight and seating positions The combined weight of the driver passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle s capacity weight Certification Label S MFD BY GENERAL MOTORS CORP m DATE GWR GAWRFRT THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL gip L Na OTOR VEHICLE SAFETY BUMPER NTION STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATAOF M WN ABOVE 2001 ASS CAR a A vehicle specific Certification label is attached to the rear edge of the driver s door and tells you the gross weight capacity of your vehicle called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle all occupants fuel cargo and tongue weight if pulling a trailer The Certification label also tells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles called the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles you need to go to a weigh
194. d restraint system can provide Always secure children properly in your vehicle To read how see Older Children on page 1 26 or Infants and Young Children on page 1 29 1 50 There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel which shows the airbag symbol The system checks the airbag electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 60 for more information Where Are the Airbags The driver s frontal airbag is in the middle of the steering wheel 1 51 The right front passenger s frontal airbag is in the instrument panel on the passenger s side 1 52 The seat mounted side impact airbag for the driver is in the side of the drivers seatback closest to the door The seat mounted side impact airbag for the right front The roof mounted side impact airbag for the driver and passenger is in the side of the passenger s seatback the person seated directly behind the driver is in the closest to the door ceiling above the side windows 1 53 A CAUTION If something is between an occupant and an airbag the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear Do not put anything between an occupant and an airbag and do not attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag cove
195. d affect your radio s ability to pick up stations clearly The repairs would not be covered by your warranty 3 122 If static is heard on the radio when the rear window defogger is turned on it could mean that a defogger grid line has been damaged If this is true the grid line must be repaired If adding an aftermarket cellular telephone to your vehicle and the antenna needs to be attached to the glass make sure that the grid lines for the AM FM antennas are not damaged Make sure the cellular telephone antenna does not touch a grid line XM Satellite Radio Antenna System The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of your vehicle Keep this antenna clear of snow and ice build up for clear radio reception If your vehicle has a sunroof the performance of the XM system may be affected if the sunroof is open Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere with the performance of the XM system Make sure the XM Satellite Radio antenna is not obstructed Section 4 Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle 4 2 Defensive Driving cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeee ee 4 2 Drunken Driving isinsin reine senna aaben iniaa 4 3 Control of a Vehicle eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneee een eeee 4 6 Braking eevee E EEEN 4 6 Anti Lock Brake System ABS o ae 4 7 Braking in Emergencies ccseeeeeeeeenee eee ees 4 9 Traction Control System TCS o ae 4 9 Competitive Drivi
196. d and requires sheet metal repair or replacement make sure the body repair shop applies anti corrosion material to parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty Finish Damage Any stone chips fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair expense Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch up materials available from your GM dealer Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your GM dealer s body and paint shop Underbody Maintenance Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody If these are not removed corrosion and rust can develop on the underbody parts such as fuel lines frame floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection At least every spring flush these materials from the underbody with plain water Clean any areas where mud and debris can collect Dirt packed in close areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do this for you Chemical Paint Spotting Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on the vehicle This damage can take two forms blotchy ring shaped
197. d at the first maintenance service I or II after the indicated miles kilometers shown for each item Additional Required Services i 25 000 50 000 75 000 100 000 125 000 150 000 Service and Miles Kilometers 41500 83000 125 000 166 000 207500 240 000 Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks Inspect exhaust system for loose or damaged components Replace engine air cleaner filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 25 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter normal service For all wheel drive vehicles used for trailer towing Change transfer case fluid Throttle body service An Emission Control Service See footnotes f and l Replace spark plugs An Emission Control Service Change automatic transmission fluid and filter severe service See footnote h Additional Required Services cont d ae 25 000 50 000 75 000 100 000 125 000 Service and Miles Kilometers 41500 83000 125 000 166 000 207 500 240 000 Engine cooling system service or every five years whichever occurs Inspect engine accessory drive belt An Emission Control Service See footnote n Maintenance Footnotes t The U S Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle s us
198. d damage the cover or the spare torque specification a P Do not try to put a wheel cover on your compact spare tire It will not fit Store the wheel cover in the trunk until you have the flat tire repaired or replaced Notice Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage To avoid expensive brake repairs evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification See Capacities and Specifications on page 5 116 for the wheel nut torque specification 5 91 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Full Size Tire and Tools Tools STS Only After you have put the compact spare tire on your vehicle you will need to do the following to store the flat tire in your trunk A CAUTION 1 Open the trunk See Trunk on page 2 14 2 Store the jack and wheel wrench in the jack container in the trunk Storing a jack a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could When storing the jack in the container it must be cause injury In a sudden stop or collision raised until the screw end is flush with the edge loose equipment could strike someone Store of the jack all these in the proper place 3 Store the flat tire as far forward in the trunk as possible The compact spare is for temporary use only Replace the compact spare tire with a full size tire as soon as you can 5 92 Compact Spare Tire and Tools Use the following diagram
199. d in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle When securing an add on child restraint refer to the instructions that come with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet or both and to this manual The child restraint instructions are important so if they are not available obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle even when no child is in it Securing the Child Within the Child Restraint There are several systems for securing the child within the child restraint One system the three point harness has straps that come down over each of the infant s shoulders and buckle together at the crotch The five point harness system has two shoulder straps two hip straps and a crotch strap A shield may take the place of hip straps A T shaped shield has shoulder straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the child s body A shelf or armrest type shield has straps that are attached to a wide shelf like shield that swings up or to the side A CAUTION A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child is not properly secured in the child restraint Make sure the child is properly secured following the instructions that came with that restra
200. d size of the traveler changes the need for acne to use safety restraints People shouid Never nod a Banyan their arms In fact the law in every state in the United States and while riding ina vehicle A baby does not in every Canadian province says children up to weigh much until a crash During a crash a some age must be restrained while in a vehicle baby will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it For example in a crash at only 25 mph 40 km h a 12 Ib 5 5 kg baby will suddenly become a 240 Ib 110 kg force on a person s arms A baby should be secured in an appropriate restraint Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles they should have the protection provided by appropriate restraints Young children should not use the vehicle s adult safety belts alone unless there is no other choice Instead they need to use a child restraint 1 29 1 30 A CAUTION Children who are up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Airbags plus lap shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide Q A What are the different types of add on child restraints Add on child restraints which are purchased by the v
201. d the service and the type of services performed in the boxes provided See Maintenance Requirements on page 6 2 Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6 8 can be added on the following record pages You should retain all maintenance receipts Maintenance Record Odometer Maintenance I or Maintenance Record cont d Odometer Maintenance I or Reading Serviced By Maintenance II Services Performed Maintenance Record cont d Odometer Maintenance I or z Reading Serviced By Maintenance II Services Performed Section 7 Customer Assistance and Information 7 2 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 00005 7 2 Online Owner Center cccceeceeee cece sence 7 3 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users ceceeeeeeeeeeeees 7 4 Customer Assistance Offices ccccceeeee ee 7 4 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program 7 5 Roadside Service ccccceceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 5 Courtesy Transportation ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 7 7 Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data Recorders cccec cee eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeteneees 7 8 Collision Damage Repair ceceeeeeeeeeeeeenes 7 10 Customer Assistance and Information Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government Reporting Safety Defects to General Motor
202. day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night But if you are driving do not wear sunglasses at night They may cut down on glare from headlamps but they also make a lot of things invisible You can be temporarily blinded by approaching headlamps It can take a second or two or even several seconds for your eyes to re adjust to the dark When you are faced with severe glare as from a driver who does not lower the high beams or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps slow down a little Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps Keep the windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean inside and out Glare at night is made much worse by dirt on the glass Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a roadway when you are in a turn or curve Keep your eyes moving that way it is easier to pick out dimly lighted objects Just as the headlamps should be checked regularly for proper aim so should your eyes be examined regularly Some drivers suffer from night blindness the inability to see in dim light and are not even aware of it Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble On a wet road you cannot stop accelerate
203. de e RPT TRCK Repeat Track Repeats the track over again RPT TRCK will appear on the display Press the MODE pushbutton again to turn off repeat play RPT TRCK will disappear from the display e RPT DISC Repeat CD Repeats the CD over again RPT DISC will appear on the display Press the MODE pushbutton again to turn off repeat play RPT DISC will disappear from the display e RDM TRCK Random Track Plays the tracks on the current CD in random rather than sequential order RDM TRCK will appear on the display Press the MODE pushbutton again to turn off random play RDM TRCK will disappear from the display e RDM ALL Random All CDs Plays all of the CDs loaded in random rather than sequential order RDM ALL will appear on the display Press the MODE pushbutton again to turn off random play RDM ALL will disappear from the display 3 108 F6 DISP Display Press this pushbutton to display the time of the track Press this pushbutton again to display CD PLAY MODE kX l Seek Press the left single arrow button to go to the previous or press the right single arrow button to go to the next track on the CD K l Scan Press this double arrow button to listen to each track for 10 seconds The CD will go to a track play for 10 seconds then go on to the next track Press this button again to stop scanning SRCE Source Press this button to select a source either radio or CD The CD must be loaded to select the s
204. deactivated when the window lockout button is pushed turn this feature on If this feature is left off the window lockout button located on the door will deactivate only the rear windows See Power Windows on page 2 18 for more information 2 67 Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory it was programmed to Mode 2 The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory To program the vehicle to a different mode use the following procedure 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until FRONT PASS WINDOW LOCK is highlighted 3 Press the tune select knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle 2 68 CHIME VOLUME HIGH This feature allows you to adjust the volume level of the vehicle s warning chimes The chime volume cannot be turned off only adjusted Programmable Modes Mode 1 NORMAL Mode 2 HIGH Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory it was programmed to Mode 1 The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed
205. densation See Rear Window Defogger under Dual Climate Control System on page 3 48 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror The drivers side mirror will adjust for the glare of headlamps behind you This feature is controlled by the on and off settings on the automatic dimming rearview mirror 2 44 Outside Convex Mirror A CAUTION A convex mirror can make things like other vehicles look farther away than they really are If you cut too sharply into the right lane you could hit a vehicle on your right Check your inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes The passenger s side mirror is convex A convex mirror s surface is curved so more can be seen from the driver s seat This mirror does not have a dimming feature Outside Parallel Park Assist Mirror This feature assists the driver by improving rear obstacle detection and is useful in viewing the curb when parallel parking Press the left or right mirror symbol on the selector control to choose the driver or passenger outside mirror When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE R the selected mirror will tilt to a factory programmed position If further mirror adjustment is needed press the arrows located on the outside mirror control pad If the outside mirror selector switch is in the middle position neither outside mirror will move When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE R anda five second delay has occurred the mirror will retur
206. depending on your vehicle s options Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel They include the following M Mute Press this button to silence the system Press this button again or any other radio button to turn the sound on SRCE Source Press this button to switch between FM1 FM2 AM or XM1 or XM2 if equipped radio or CD 3 119 OnStar Voice Recognition If your vehicle has the Radio with CD or Radio with Six Disc CD audio system press this button to interact with the OnStar system See the OnStar System on page 2 45 in this manual for more information If your vehicle has the navigation system press this button to initiate voice recognition See Voice Recognition in the Navigation System manual for more information You may be able to interact with the OnStar system using this button See the OnStar System on page 2 45 in this manual for more information 1 6 Preset Stations Press this button to play stations that are programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons The radio will only seek preset stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band When a CD is playing press this button to go to the next track When a CD is playing in the six disc CD changer press this button to go to the next available CD if multiple CDs are loaded Volume Press this button to increase or to decrease the volume 3 120 M gt Seek Press either arrow t
207. e this is against the law in some places Keep children away from the fuel pump never let l children pump fuel While refueling hang the tethered fuel cap from the hook on the fuel door To remove the fuel cap turn it slowly counterclockwise The fuel cap has a spring in it if the cap is released too soon it will spring back to the right A CAUTION If you spill fuel and then something ignites it you could be badly burned Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full and is more likely in hot weather Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop Then unscrew the cap all the way Be careful not to spill fuel Do not top off or overfill the tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished pumping before removing the nozzle Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible See Washing Your Vehicle on page 5 98 When replacing the fuel cap turn it clockwise until it clicks Make sure the cap is fully installed The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 67 The CHECK GAS CAP message will appear on the Driver Information Center DIC display if the fuel cap is not reinstalled properly See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 79 for more information A CAUTION If a f
208. e s interior may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains to set rapidly Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent cleaning Use care because newspapers and garments that transfer color to your home furnishings may also transfer color to your vehicle s interior When cleaning your vehicle s interior only use cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on surfaces for which they were not intended Use glass cleaner only on glass Remove any accidental over spray from other surfaces immediately To prevent over spray apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth Notice f you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle you could scratch the glass and or cause damage to the integrated radio antenna and the rear window defogger When cleaning the glass on your vehicle use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner Many cleaners contain solvents that may become concentrated in your vehicle s breathing space Before using cleaners read and adhere to all safety instructions on the label While cleaning your vehicle s interior maintain adequate ventilation by opening your vehicle s doors and windows Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs using a small brush with soft bristles Your GM dealer has a product for cleaning your vehicle s glass Should it become necessary you can also obtain a product from your
209. e Driver Exit Settings Submenu 2 74 3 From the DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS submenu turn the tune select knob to scroll to STORE EXIT SETTINGS and press in the knob Two beeps will sound to confirm that your new exit settings are saved Repeat the procedure for a second driver by programming the other driver number Section 3 Instrument Panel Overview eeeee 3 4 Hazard Warning Flashers eeeeeeeeeeeee ees 3 6 Other Warning Devices cceeeeeeeeeneeeeeneees 3 6 ROTH eeecthimcdotitel nnas del conte niamateentamcenotaewedietanacs 3 6 Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering Column cecceeeeee eee eee eee eeneea ees 3 6 Heated Steering Wheel cceeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 3 7 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever 0 0e 3 7 Turn and Lane Change Signals 0e 3 8 Headlamp High Low Beam Changer 4 3 8 Forward Collision Alert FCA System 3 9 Flash to Pass irois enine ties 3 12 Windshield Wipers cceeeeeeeeee eee ee eee eee es 3 13 Rainsense Wipers eceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 1 Windshield Washer eceeeeeeeeeeeee eee eee es 3 15 Headlamp Washer c eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 15 CrUISE Comto 2 vce widecstiundancanseccacwecdtanbescceness 3 16 Adaptive Cruise Control ceeeeeeeeeeneee ees 3 19 Headlamps siscrinrcsisateueedteveadessievriedineteantacads 3 31
210. e Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines transmission axle suspension brakes electrical steering body etc Transmission Transaxle Transfer Case Unit Repair Manual This manual provides information on unit repair service procedures adjustments and specifications for GM transmissions transaxles and transfer cases Service Bulletins Service Bulletins give technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle In Canada information pertaining to Product Service Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General Motors dealer or by calling 1 800 GM DRIVE 1 800 463 7483 Owner s Information Owner publications are written specifically for owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle The owner s manual will include the Maintenance Schedule for all models In Portfolio Includes a Portfolio Owner s Manual and Warranty Booklet RETAIL SELL PRICE 35 00 Without Portfolio Owner s Manual only RETAIL SELL PRICE 25 00 Current and Past Model Order Forms Service Publications are available for current and past model GM vehicles To request an order form please specify year and model name of the vehicle ORDER TOLL FREE 1 800 551 4123 Monday Friday 8 00 AM 6 00 PM Eastern Time For Credit Card Orders Only VISA Maste
211. e acceleration skid If your traction control system is off then an acceleration skid is also best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal If your vehicle starts to slide ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go If you start steering quickly enough your vehicle may straighten out Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs With StabiliTrak you may see the STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message on the Driver Information Center See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 79 Of course traction is reduced when water snow ice gravel or other material is on the road For safety you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited While driving on a surface with reduced traction try your best to avoid sudden steering acceleration or braking including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding Learn to recognize warning clues such as enough water ice or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface and slow down when you have any doubt Remember Any Anti Lock Brake System ABS helps avoid only the braking skid Competitive Driving See your warranty book before using your veh
212. e at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield e Dealership name and location e Vehicle delivery date and present mileage When contacting Cadillac please remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer s facility That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have a concern STEP THREE Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle However if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two you should file with the BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional rights you may have Canadian owners refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days If you do not agree with the decision given in your case you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the toll free telep
213. e code This TH code will help you identify your vehicle s engine Vehicle Identification Number VIN specifications and epldosmient parts i Service Parts Identification Label aw You will find this label on your spare tire cover It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts On this label you will find the following e VIN This is the legal identifier for your vehicle It appears on Model designation a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel on e Paint information the driver s side You can see it if you look through the windshield from outside your vehicle The VIN also e Production options and special equipment appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle labels and the certificates of title and registration SAMPLE4UX1M07267 5 103 Electrical System Add On Electrical Equipment Notice Don t add anything electrical to your vehicle unless you check with your dealer first Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and the damage wouldn t be covered by your warranty Some add on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should Your vehicle has an airbag system Before attempting to add anything electrical to your vehicle see Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 62 5 104 Headlamp Wiring The headlamp wiring has an individual fuse An electrical overlo
214. e date of manufacture E Tire Ply Material The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread F Uniform Tire Quality Grading UTQG Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors treadwear traction and temperature resistance For more information see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5 75 G Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load 5 59 5 OXXXXX GSg _ Es My ee EA Noyan gt G S 3 gt 2 a 8 z7 Compact Spare Tire Example A Temporary Use Only The compact spare tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately 3 000 miles 5 000 km and should not be driven at speeds over 65 mph 105 km h The compact spare tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat If your vehicle has a compact spare tire see Compact Spare Tire STS Only on page 5 93 and If a Tire Goes Flat on page 5 81 5 60 B Tire Ply Material The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread C Tire Identification Number TIN The letters and numbers following the DOT Department of Transportation code is the Tire Identification Number TIN The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code tire size and date the tire was manufactured The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire although only one
215. e dipstick you will need to add at least one quart liter of oil But you must use the right kind This section explains what kind of oil to use For engine oil crankcase EA TA capacity see Capacities and Specifications on DUIS page 5 116 AAAA Mobili SAE 5W 30 Notice Do not add too much oil If the engine has SAE 5W 30 so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross hatched area that shows the proper operating AR range the engine could be damaged V6 Engine V8 Engine See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for the location of the engine oil fill cap Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range Push the dipstick all the way back in when you are through What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Look for two things For V6 Engine Vehicles Only e GM6094M Your vehicle s engine requires oil meeting HOT WEATHER use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M FLAY C e SAE 5W 30 THE TEAL As shown in the viscosity chart SAE 5W 30 is best AND GM FOR for your vehicle STANDARD 3 These numbers on an oil container show its GM6094M viscosity or thickness Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W 50 DO NOT USE SAE 10W 40 SAE 20W 50 OR ANY OTHER VISCOSITY GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED COLD WEATHER 5 20 Oils meeting these requirements should also have the starburst symbol on the container This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the Americ
216. e even more trouble because it may offer the least 4 28 traction of all You can get wet ice when it is about freezing 32 F 0 C and freezing rain begins to fall Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there Whatever the condition smooth ice packed blowing or loose snow drive with caution Traction control improves your ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road Even though your vehicle has the Traction Control System TCS you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to the road conditions Under certain conditions you may want to turn the TCS off such as when driving through deep snow and loose gravel to help maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 9 StabiliTrak System on page 4 11 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4 32 and Winter Tires under Tires on page 5 57 Your Anti Lock Brake System ABS improves your vehicle s stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road Even though you have ABS you will want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement See Anti Lock Brake System ABS on page 4 7 e Allow greater following distance on any slippery road e Watch for slippery spots The road might be fine until you hit a spot that is covered with ice On an otherwise clear road ice patches may appear in shaded areas where the sun cannot reach such as around clumps of t
217. e fire And dirt can easily get into your engine which will damage it Always have the air cleaner filter in place when you are driving Automatic Transmission Fluid It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss If a leak occurs take your vehicle to the dealership service department and have it repaired as soon as possible Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in Additional Required Services on page 6 6 and be sure to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 Notice Use of the incorrect automatic transmission fluid may damage your vehicle and the damages may not be covered by your warranty Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 Engine Coolant The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with DEX COOL engine coolant This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km whichever occurs first if you add only DEX COOL extended life coolant The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low If you have a problem with engine overheating see Engine Overheating on page 5 31 5 27 A 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant will e Give freezing protection down to 34 F 37 C e Give boiling protection up to 265 F 129
218. e it After you have moved the shift lever into PARK P hold the regular brake pedal down Then see if you can move the shift lever away from PARK P without first pushing the button on the shift lever If you can it means that the shift lever was not fully locked into PARK P Torque Lock If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your transmission into PARK P properly the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK P This is called torque lock To prevent torque lock set the parking brake and then shift into PARK P properly before you leave the driver s seat To find out how see Shifting Into PARK P listed previously If torque lock does occur you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK P 2 37 Shifting Out of Park P Parking Over Things That Burn Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system You have to fully apply your regular brake before you can shift from PARK P when the vehicle is running See Automatic Transmission Operation STS on page 2 28 or Automatic Transmission Operation STS V on page 2 32 If you cannot shift out of PARK P ease pressure on the shift lever push the shift lever all the way into PA
219. e lumbar support press and hold the top of the control To lower the position of lumbar support press and hold the bottom of the control Let go of the control when the lower seatback reaches the desired level of support Your vehicle may have a memory function which allows seat settings to be saved and recalled See Memory Seat Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 2 70 for more information Heated Seats Your vehicle may have heated front seats The buttons are located on the climate control panel lt amp gt 4 Heated Seat and Seatback This button is for the heated seat and seatback Press the up arrow once to turn on the heated seat at the highest setting Press the down arrow once to turn on the heated seat at the lowest setting Pressing the up or down arrows a second time will raise or lower the setting To turn off the heated seat keep pressing the down arrow until the indicator for heated seat on the climate control display is off A light bar in the climate control display shows the setting high medium or low The longest bar shows the high range and the shortest bar shows the low range The heated seat will automatically shut off when the vehicle is turned off Heated and Ventilated Seats Your vehicle may have heated and ventilated front seats The buttons are located on the climate control panel ra Heated Seat and Seatback This part of the button is for the heated seat and seatback
220. e next higher gear if the engine rpm is too high If shifting is prevented for any reason the currently selected gear will flash multiple times in the DIC indicating that the transmission has not shifted gears The transmission will allow you to shift to the gear selected and will automatically downshift when the vehicle comes to a stop This will allow for more power during take off and passing When accelerating your vehicle from a stop in snowy and icy conditions you may want to shift into second gear A higher gear allows you to gain more traction on slippery surfaces 2 31 Automatic Transmission Operation STS V A CAUTION The shift lever is located on the center console between ihe front seats It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the There are several different parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll positions for the shift lever Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK P See Shifting Into Park P on page 2 36 If you are pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer STS Only on page 4 40 PARK P This position locks the rear wheels It is the best position to use when you
221. e or decrease the temperature for the front passenger Turning the passenger s side power button off will not shut off the climate control system for the passenger The system will be set to the same setting as the driver Ventilated Seat Press this button if equipped to turn on the ventilated seat for the driver s or passenger s side See Heated and Ventilated Seats on page 1 4 ot Heated Seat Press this button if equipped to turn on the heated seat and seatback for the driver s or passenger s side See Heated and Ventilated Seats on page 1 4 amp Air Conditioning Press this button to manually turn off the air conditioning compressor Press AUTO to return to automatic operation or press the A C OFF button again To limit fogging on the windshield the air conditioning compressor cannot be in off in defrost mode 3 51 Sensors There is a solar sensor located on the instrument panel near the windshield There is also an interior temperature sensor located next to the steering wheel on the instrument panel These sensors monitor the solar radiation and the air inside your vehicle then use the information to maintain the selected temperature by initiating needed adjustments to the temperature the fan speed and the air delivery system The system may also supply cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun The recirculation mode may also be activated as necessary Do not cover the sensors or the
222. e plug because the power outlets are designed for accessory power plugs only Ashtray s and Cigarette Lighter Your vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarette lighter Notice If you put papers pins or other flammable items in the ashtray hot cigarettes or other smoking materials could ignite them and possibly damage your vehicle Never put flammable items in the ashtray Ashtray The ashtray is located under the climate control panel on the center console Press on the door to release the ashtray The ashtray will automatically slide open for use To empty the ashtray with the ashtray in full open position locate the release button to the right of the ash receiver and slide it to the right in the direction of the arrow The ash reciever will unlock and lift slightly and can then be easily removed from the housing To replace the ash receiver place it into position in the ashtray housing and push down firmly until it locks into place There may also be ashtrays in the rear doors Cigarette Lighter Notice Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is heating will not allow the lighter to back away from the heating element when it is hot Damage from overheating may occur to the lighter or heating element or a fuse could be blown Do not hold a cigarette lighter in while it is heating The cigarette lighter is located next to the ashtray The vehicle does not have any cigarette lighters for the rear seat passengers To
223. e the engine stops or the system is not functioning you can steer but it will take much more effort Speed Variable Assist Steering Your vehicle has a steering system that continuously adjusts the effort you feel when steering at all vehicle speeds It provides ease when parking yet a firm solid feel at highway speeds Steering Tips It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed A lot of the driver lost control accidents mentioned on the news happen on curves Here is why Experienced driver or beginner each of us is subject to the same laws of physics when driving on curves The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn the front wheels If there is no traction inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction If you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice you will understand this The traction you can get in a curve depends on the condition of your tires and the road surface the angle at which the curve is banked and your speed While you are in a curve speed is the one factor you can control Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve Then you suddenly accelerate Both control systems steering and acceleration have to do their work where the tires meet the road Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those places You can lose control See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 9 and St
224. e tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim Bias Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Cold Inflation Pressure The amount of air pressure in a tire measured in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascals kPa before a tire has built up heat from driving See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 65 Curb Weight This means the weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel oil and coolant but without passengers and cargo DOT Markings A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation DOT motor vehicle safety standards The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number TIN an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the tire manufacturer production plant brand and date of production GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 32 5 62 GAWR FRT Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front axle see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 32 GAWR RR Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 32 Intended Outboard Sidewall The side of an asymmetrical tire that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle Kilopascal kPa The metric unit for air pressure Light Truck LT Metric Tire
225. ear Seat Cushion Notice If you touch the exposed wires with the metal on the seat cushion you could cause a short that could damage the battery and or wires Avoid contact between the rear seat and the fuse center whenever you remove or reinstall the rear seat Do not remove covers from any of the covered parts and do not store anything under the seats To remove the rear seat cushion do the following 1 Pull up on the front of the cushion to release the front hooks 2 Pull the cushion up and out toward the front of the vehicle 5 110 To reinstall the rear seat cushion do the following 3 With the seat cushion lowered push rearward and 3 then press down on the seat cushion until the A CAUTION spring locks on both ends engage 4 Check to make sure the safety belts are properly A safety belt that is not properly routed routed and that no portion of any safety belt is through the seat cushion or is twisted will not trapped under the seat Also make sure the seat provide the protection needed in a crash If the cushion is secured safety belt has not been routed through the seat cushion at all it will not be there to work for the Rear Underseat Fuse Block next passenger The person sitting in that position could be badly injured After reinstalling the seat cushion always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and are not twisted 1 Buckle the center passenger position safety belt then
226. eats clear of any objects so the air in your vehicle can circulate effectively Passenger Compartment Air Filter Your vehicle may be equipped with a passenger compartment air filter There are two types of filters available There is a standard dust filter that traps small particles including pollen There is also a dust odor filter available that traps dust and pollen and also uses a charcoal element to help reduce many offensive odors from entering your vehicle Like your vehicle s engine air cleaner filter it will need to be changed periodically For information on how often to change the passenger compartment air filter see Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 Notice Driving without a passenger compartment air filter in place can cause water and small particles like paper and leaves to be pulled into your climate control system which may cause damage to it Make sure you always replace the old filter with a new one 3 55 The access panel for the passenger compartment air filter is located under the hood near the windshield on the passenger s side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for more information on location See Doing Your Own Service Work on page 5 4 for information on doing your own service work To access the passenger compartment air filter do the following 1 Pull back the rubber hood seal from the edge of the leaf screen vent co
227. eats erona enai a iA 1 7 Heated Seats jeccsccceuercccsbsoneveecteterseccetesecencercant 1 7 Rear Seat Pass Through Door 0 e0eeeeeees 1 7 Safety Belts cc cece eect ee eee erreneren 1 8 Safety Belts They Are for Everyone 5 1 8 Questions and Answers About Safety Belts 1 12 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1 13 Driver IPOSIMOM sie fatcat othe actu atana EE 1 13 Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment 0 1 20 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 4 1 20 Right Front Passenger Position 00 1 21 Rear Seat Passengers ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 1 21 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides 1 23 Safety Belt Pretensioners c eceeeeeeeees 1 25 Safety Belt Extender ccceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaes 1 26 Child Restraints Older Children Infants and Young Children Child Restraint Systems ceeeeeeeeeeee nena Where to Put the Restraint cee Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position Airbag System Where Are the Airbags cceeeeeeeeeeeeeees When Should an Airbag Inflate What Makes an Airbag Inflate e How Does an Airbag Restrain a se What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates Passenger Sensing System Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Veh
228. ed tires The resulting accident when no wiper blade is installed could damage could cause serious injury Check all tires the windshield Any damage that occurs would not frequently to maintain the recommended be covered by your warranty Do not allow the pressure Tire pressure should be checked wiper blade arm to touch the windshield when your tires are cold Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut punctured or broken by a sudden r impact such as when you hit a pothole Tires Keep tires at the recommended pressure Worn old tires can cause accidents If 4 Repeat the steps for the other wiper ee vehicle Fear o K tires made by your tread is badly worn or if your tires a leading tire manufacturer If you ever have questions have been damaged replace them about your tire warranty and where to obtain service see your GM Warranty booklet for details For additional See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 65 information refer to the tire manufacturer s booklet for inflation pressure adjustment for high included with your vehicle s Owner s Manual speed driving 5 57 Low Profile Performance Tires If your vehicle has P255 45R18 99Y size tires on the front wheels and P275 40R19 100Y size tires on the rear wheels they are classified as low profile performance tires These tires are designed for very responsive driving on wet or dry pavement You may also notice more road noise with low profile performance tires and t
229. eds service Have the traction control system inspected as soon as possible See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 9 and StabiliTrak System on page 4 11 for more information Also see Competitive Driving Mode STS V on page 4 10 for more information 3 66 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light The engine coolant temperature warning light will come on when the engine is very hot awn Pr This light will also come on briefly when the vehicle is started If the light does not go out or comes on and stays on while driving there may be a problem with the cooling system Driving with engine coolant temperature light on could cause your vehicle to overheat see Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5 32 See Engine Overheating on page 5 31 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 79 for more information Engine Coolant Temperature Gage This gage shows the engine coolant temperature It can be used to see when your engine has warmed up and to make sure your cooling system is operating properly If the gage pointer moves into the shaded area the engine coolant is too hot and the engine coolant temperature warning light will come on See Engine Overheating on page 5 31 for more information Malfunction Indicator Lamp Check Engine Light Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which monitors operation of the fuel ignition and emission control systems This system is called OBD II On B
230. ee your dealer or trailering professional for additional advice and equipment recommendations e Is your vehicle ready to be towed Just as you would prepare your vehicle for a long trip you will want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be towed See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on page 4 24 Dinghy Towing Notice If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground the drivetrain components could be damaged The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Do not tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four wheels on the ground If your vehicle must be towed you should use a dolly See Dolly Towing later in this section for more information Dolly Towing Rear Wheel Drive Vehicles STS Only Notice Dolly towing or dinghy towing your vehicle may cause damage because of reduced ground clearance Always tow your vehicle using the dolly towing or dinghy towing procedure listed in this section or put your vehicle on a flatbed truck If your vehicle is a rear wheel drive it can be towed using a dolly To tow your vehicle using a dolly follow these steps 1 Put the rear wheels on the dolly 2 Put the vehicle in PARK P 3 Set the parking brake and then remove the key 4 Clamp the steering wheel in a straight ahead position with a clamping device designed for towing 5 Release the parking brake Dolly Towing STS V Notice
231. ee the signal Replace burned out bulbs to help avoid possible accidents Check the fuse and for burned out bulbs if the arrow fails to work when signaling a turn See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5 105 for more information Turn Signal On Chime If the turn signal is left on for about 1 mile 1 6 km a warning chime will sound and the Turn Signal On message will appear on the Driver Information Center DIC display See Turn Signal On under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 79 for more information Headlamp High Low Beam Changer Push forward on the turn signal multifunction lever to change the headlamps from low to high beam Pull the lever back and then release it to change from high to low beam If you turn the vehicle off with the high beams on the next time you start your vehicle the low beams will be on To re activate high beams pull lever toward you and then push it forward again This light on the instrument panel cluster will be on indicating high beam usage Forward Collision Alert FCA System If your vehicle has this feature be sure to read this entire section before using it The system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 This device must accept any interf
232. eeee eee eeeee eens Replacement Windshield eeceeeeeeeeee ee Reporting Safety Defects Canadian Government seceeeneeeeeeeeeenes General Motors 0 ccecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees United States Government eeeeeeeee ees Restraint System Check Checking the Restraint Systems Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash Retained Accessory Power RAP encerc 2 25 Right Front Passenger Position Safety Belts 1 21 Roadside DEVICE reee naseasraanoiues a E E 7 5 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out 4 32 Routing Engine Drive Belt a nn 6 15 ROMER AL TIOS rensie ene E TEE 5 64 Running the Engine While Parked 2 40 S Safety Belt Passenger Reminder Light aacncneaseerann 3 60 PreteMSIONGNS keisreid A En 1 25 Reminder Light sracsnisineisienii irirna 3 59 Safety Belts GAG Of sae ea a E E 5 97 Driver POSIIOM 5 2305 sebstcsnsanbe gesiedig eA taes andean 1 13 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1 13 Questions and Answers About Safety Belts 1 12 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides 1 23 Rear Seat Passengers ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 1 21 Right Front Passenger Position 0 1 21 Safety Belt Extender cc eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 1 26 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 1 20 Safety Belts Are for Everyone eceeeeeeeees 1 8 Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
233. eeeee eee ceses 2 36 11 Shifting Out of Park P ceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeenes 2 38 Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster 0 eeeeee 1 20 Signals Turn and Lane Change 0e0eee 3 8 Spare Tire GCOMPACE rheini a eE RE EAER 5 93 Installing ee ae E EEA 5 86 REMOVING i cerienann o 5 85 SIONN reeniri livid a a e A E EA 5 92 Specifications Capacities cceeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 116 Speedometer oa ccs ccsseceseisece scene sin ras iiaae 3 59 StabiliTrak System irenste aniei 4 11 Starting Your Engine cecceeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeenes 2 25 SELLO OaE E E E 4 12 Steering Wheel Controls Audio 066 3 119 Steering Wheel Controls Memory 0 0608 2 70 Steering Wheel Heated ccceceeeeeeeeeeeees 3 7 Steering Wheel Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering Column 0eeeeeeeee ee 3 6 Storage Areas Center Console Storage Area ceeeeee 2 51 Convenience Net ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 2 51 Cupholder S ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneees 2 51 Glove BOX soten iae e ea E ES 2 51 Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow 0085 4 31 SUM MISOMS scsccnsadecssswagteaantges neei eeni OEE ace 2 20 SUMMOOP sretses eeeteeitatietac ses E REE AEE PUSERE TER 2 52 12 Tachometer acelin n E nated A OEE 3 59 TCS Warning Light saei esesonorasan iinde i aea ie 3 66 Telescopic Steering Column Power Tilt Wheel 3
234. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 7 10 Comfort Guides Rear Safety Belt 1 23 Compact Spare Tire cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeaes 5 93 Competitive Driving cceceeeeeeeneeeeeeeee een eeaes 4 18 Competitive Driving Mode eee 4 10 Control of a Vehicle cc eceeececeeeeeeeeeee eee een eens 4 6 Convenience Net cceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeee eee eeaeeaes 2 51 Coolant Engine Temperature Gage ccecce 3 67 Engine Temperature Warning Light 3 66 Coolant cont Heater ENGine ccesnntinereceslaskooninematentenrensss 2 27 Surge Tank Pressure Cap ceeceeeeeeeeeeeees 5 31 Cooling SYSTEM s23e nncctiecsnsastceact iiare ietanscaane 5 33 Cruise Control ci onera aa eaaa EREE 3 16 Cruise Control Adaptive cceeeeeeeeeeeneee tenes 3 19 Cruise Control Forward Collision Alert FAC System cceececeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaees 3 9 Cruise Control Light semis ercisisinaiss miro isn 3 72 Cupholder S cisairirsen asenniniiiii isuna 2 51 Customer Assistance Information Courtesy Transportation ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee es 7 7 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users 0cceeeeeeeeeeees 7 4 Customer Assistance Offices 0 ceeeee 7 4 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 56 7 2 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program 7 5 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors 7 14 Reporting Safety Defects to the C
235. een Washer Solvent Mele ele see Engine Oil on Chassis bubreant page ote __ GM Part No U S 12377985 in The engine requires a special engine Parking Brake Ganada 88901242 or lubricant oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M Cable Guides meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Oils meeting this standard may be Category LB or GC LB identified as synthetic and should also be identified with the American ao ee ae ones 1984 j Petroleum Institute API Certified for ates K da 89001 186 1 Gasoline Engines starburst symbol ystem anada Engine Oil H rome owever not all synthetic API oils with Automatic V8 Engine the starburst symbol will meet this GM Transmission T i standard You should look for and use 6 Speed only oil that meets GM Standard Automatic DEXRON III Automatic Transmission GM4718M GM Goodwrench oil Transmission Fluid Look for Approved for the 5 Speed meets all the requirements for your vehicle For the proper viscosity see Engine Oil on page 5 18 H Specification on the label Usage Fluid Lubricant Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube GM Part No U S 12346241 in Canada 10953474 Key Lock Cylinders SAE 75W 90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant GM Part No U S 12378261 in Rear Axle Canada 10953455 meeting GM Specification 9986115 SAE 75W 90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant GM Part No U S 12378261 in Canada 10953455 meeting GM Specification 9986115 Transfer Case D
236. eful life We however urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded a Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition Inspect other brake parts including calipers parking brake etc 150 000 first An Emission Control Service See footnote j b Visually inspect front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged loose or missing parts or signs of wear Inspect power steering lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc c Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they are cracked swollen or deteriorated Inspect all pipes fittings and clamps replace with genuine GM parts as needed To help ensure proper operation a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is recommended at least once a year d Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking Replace wiper blades that appear worn or damaged or that streak or miss areas of the windshield e Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from d
237. ehicle s regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones as it should Instead it may settle up around the child s abdomen In a crash the belt would apply force on a body area that is unprotected by any bony structure This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries Young children always should be secured in appropriate child restraints 1 31 Child Restraint Systems An infant car bed A a special bed made for use ina motor vehicle is an infant restraint system designed to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface Make sure that the infant s head rests toward the center of the vehicle 1 32 A rear facing infant seat B provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant The harness system holds the infant in place and in a crash acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint A forward facing child seat C E provides restraint for A booster seat F G is a child restraint designed to the child s body with the harness and also sometimes improve the fit of the vehicle s safety belt system with surfaces such as T shaped or shelf like shields Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner and some high back booster seats have a five point harness A booster seat can also help a child to see out the window How Should I Use a Child Restraint rO A child restraint system is any device designed for use in a motor vehicle to restrain seat
238. ehicle s owner are available in four basic types Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child s weight height and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used For most basic types of child restraints there are many different models available When purchasing a child restraint be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle If it is the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards The restraint manufacturer s instructions that come with the restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular child restraint In addition there are many kinds of restraints available for children with special needs A CAUTION Newborn infants need complete support including support for the head and neck This is necessary because a newborn infant s neck is weak and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body In a crash an infant in a rear facing seat settles into the restraint so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of an infant s body the back and shoulders Infants always should be secured in appropriate infant restraints A CAUTION The body structure of a young child is quite unlike that of an adult or older child for whom the safety belts are designed A young child s hip bones are still so small that the v
239. ehicle there or have it towed there Specify to the facility that any required replacement collision parts be original equipment parts either new Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts Remember recycled parts will not be covered by your GM vehicle warranty Insurance pays the bill for the repair but you must live with the repair Depending on your policy limits your insurance company may initially value the repair using aftermarket parts Discuss this with your repair professional and insist on Genuine GM parts Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts even if your insurance coverage does not pay the full cost If another party s insurance company is paying for the repairs you are not obligated to accept a repair valuation based on that insurance company s collision policy repair limits as you have no contractual limits with that company In such cases you can have control of the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within reasonable limits Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying General Motors If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds
240. eieenciiseeeseices 3 121 Navigation Radio System see Navigation Manual c eeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 3 115 Radio Personalization i 3 115 Radio With CD siciscieielics ciaaheddeacdiaseaectiedeanes 3 96 Setting the TMe riscia seers 3 95 Thet Deterrent cis s esc cccenaeceeepun iana 3 119 Understanding Reception cece 3 120 Rainsense Wipers cceeeeeeneeeeeee eee e ees 3 14 Reading Lamps 2 0 csdamecnupenstcaatnastineneentioenntacts 3 40 Rear Axle enrenar a E a 5 52 Limited Slip cceceeeeeeeeeee eects a eeneeeeeneee es 4 11 Rear Climate Control System eeeeeeeeeees 3 54 10 Rear Door Security LOCKS seeeeeeeeeeee eee Rear Heated Seats ccccccccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeees Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides Rear Seat Passengers Safety Belts Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming with OnStar Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming with OnStar and Compass ccccesssseeeeeeeeeees Rearview Mirror with Compass and temperature aiaee EE Reclining Seatback Power scceeeeeeeeeees Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Recreational Vehicle Towing Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire sca csackeld soerse ceciveeeadeceh las NERS Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 4 Replacement Bulbs cceeeeee
241. elect knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle 2 62 TWILIGHT DELAY This feature allows you to set the amount of time you want the exterior lamps to remain on after you exit the vehicle Programmable Modes Mode 1 0 00 seconds off Mode 2 0 05 seconds Mode 3 0 15 seconds Mode 4 0 30 seconds Mode 5 1 30 minutes Mode 6 2 00 minutes Mode 7 3 00 minutes Mode 8 4 00 minutes Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory it was programmed to Mode 2 The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since the vehicle left the factory To determine the mode to which the vehicle is programmed or to program the vehicle to a different mode use the following procedure 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until TWILIGHT DELAY is highlighted 3 Press the tune select knob to scroll through the available delay settings and set your selection If you choose Mode 1 the exterior lamps will not illuminate when you exit the vehicle Only one mode can be selected at a time The mode you selected is now set You can ei
242. em is working properly No Information No Text Informational No text or informational messages are available at this time message available on this channel The system is working properly XM Lock Theft lock active The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously been in another vehicle For security purposes XM receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles If this message is received after having your vehicle serviced check with your GM dealer XM Radio ID Radio ID label If tuned to channel 0 this message will alternate with the channel 0 XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label This label is needed to activate the service Unknown Radio ID not known If this message is received when tuned to channel 0 there should only be if may be a receiver fault Consult with your GM dealer hardware failure Check XM Receiver Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time the receiver may have a fault Consult with your GM dealer 3 104 Using the Single CD Player Insert a CD partway into the slot label side up The player will pull it in If the ignition and the radio are on the CD will begin playing A CD may be loaded with the radio off but it will not start playing until the radio is on If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the player it will stay in the player When the ignition or radio is turned on the CD will start to play where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source
243. em on page 1 58 General Motors recommends that rear facing child restraints be secured in a rear seat even if the airbag is off If your child restraint is forward facing move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the child restraint in this seat See Power Seats on page 1 2 When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger s frontal airbag the off indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator should light and stay lit when the vehicle is running See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3 61 1 46 w 4 Put the child restraint on the seat Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how Buckle the belt Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 5 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock To tighten the belt push down on the child restraint pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor If you are using a forward facing child restraint you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt You should not be able to pull more of the belt from the retractor once the lock has been
244. emcndeimeyeentecasmceinutnetbeaweyenctta 4 32 SYMON R iv Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data Recorders creerii a a 7 8 Vehicle Identification Number VIN ssctcscsieieies nics aapna 5 103 Service Parts Identification Label 5 103 Vehicle Personalization ceeeeeeeeeeeees 2 53 Memory Seat Mirrors and Steering Wheel 2 70 Ventilated Seats 2 00 ceceeeeeee eee tanii nania 1 4 Ventilation Adjustment ceeeeeeeeeeeenee eee eees 3 54 VISIS ota e6 22 teach E S anne 2 20 13 W Warning Lights Gages and Indicators 3 57 Warnings DIC Warnings and Messages 0 e1eeeeee 3 79 Hazard Warning Flashers ocene 3 6 Other Warning Devices ceeeeeeeeeee teen ees 3 6 Safety and Symbols uiraa nieas inansa iii Vehicle Damage ccisteicscncscoscancscipeciduaspagetadchsteds iv Wheels Alignment and Tire Balance e 5 76 Different Size 0 cceeeee cece cece eee ee nese een eea ees 5 74 Replacement wiccocieviuerecseccoetenteeeetaentencsicaeetest 5 76 Where to Put the Restraint eee eee 1 36 MWVINGOWS aetan anere a e E 2 17 POWE etan ee E A 2 18 Windshield Wiper Blades Cleaning cseeeeeneee tenes 5 99 14 Windshield Replacement e eeeeeeeeeee eee es 5 56 Windshield Washer eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeerees 3 15 FIWIG EE loss ten Aes see Gee eee 5 41 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacem
245. emember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use Anytime your oil is changed reset the system so it can calculate when the next oil change is required If a situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message in the DIC being turned on reset the system After the oil has been changed the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message must be reset To reset the message use the following procedure 1 Press the up or down arrow to scroll the DIC to show OIL LIFE 2 Once the XXX ENGINE OIL LIFE menu item is highlighted press and hold the RESET button until the percentage shows 100 If the percentage does not return to 100 or if the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes back on when you start your vehicle the engine oil life system has not reset Repeat the procedure What to Do with Used Oil Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long Clean your skin and nails with soap and water or a good hand cleaner Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil See the manufacturer s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products Used oil can be a threat to the environment If you change your own oil be sure to drain all
246. en reset Also clear the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message from the display ENGLISH DISPLAY UNITS METRIC DISPLAY UNITS This display allows you to select between English and metric units of measurement if your vehicle has the uplevel DIC Press the reset button to switch between English and metric units Blank Line This display shows no information 3 78 ENGINE BOOST STS V Only This display shows a graphic that indicates the amount of boost the engine is receiving in either pounds per square inch psi or kilopascals kPa ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE STS V Only This display shows the engine oil temperature in either degrees Fahrenheit F or degrees Celsius C OIL PRESSURE STS V Only This display shows the oil pressure in either pounds per square inch psi or kilopascals kPa TRANS Transmission FLUID TEMP Temperature STS V Only This display shows the transmission fluid temperature in either degrees Fahrenheit F or degrees Celsius C Trip Information Display Menu Items The following display menu items can be displayed by pressing the trip Information button Odometer Press the trip information button until the odometer appears on the DIC display The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven in either miles mi or kilometers km Trip Odometer Press the trip information button until trip odometer A or B appears on the DIC display The trip odometer shows the cur
247. en to a safe place in an emergency Should an overheated engine condition exist an overheat protection mode which alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage In this mode you will notice a loss in power and engine performance A low coolant and or engine overheat warning will indicate that an overheat condition exists Driving extended miles km and or towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode should be avoided Notice After driving in the overheated engine protection operating mode to avoid engine damage allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair The engine oil will be severely degraded Repair the cause of coolant loss and change the oil See Engine Oil on page 5 18 Cooling System When you decide it is safe to lift the hood here is what AN CAUTION you will see An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling do not do anything else until it cools down The vehicle should be parked on a level surface 3 6L V6 Engine shown 4 6L V8 and 4 4L V8 STS V Engines similar A Electric Engine Cooling Fans B Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap Some vehicles may be equipped with an engine driven fan as well as the electric pusher fans A which are located behind the vehicle s grille 5
248. ennan 5 97 Windshield and Wiper Blades n 5 99 Wood Panels sehet eer A ens 5 97 AShtray S oein rn e EA 3 47 Audio SyStem S cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeaeeeeeneeeees 3 94 Audio Steering Wheel Controls 0 3 119 Care of Your CD Player eceeeeeeeneeeeenes 3 122 Care of Your CDS cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 3 121 Diversity Antenna System ceeeeeeeeeees 3 122 Navigation Radio System see Navigation Manual cceeeeeeeeee eee ees 3 115 Audio Systems Radio Personalization ceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 115 Audio System s Radio with GD siictsctciiiviern hieeesitisbocsivae ia 3 96 Setting the Time ccececeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeaeeaeees 3 95 Theft Deterrent Feature seeeeeeeee ees 3 119 Understanding Radio Reception 3 120 XM Satellite Radio Antenna System 3 122 Automatic Transmission PUIG EE E e E E E A 5 27 Operaio ocisti eaa 2 28 2 32 BattEry spoorman ea a 5 45 Exterior Lighting Battery Saver 005 3 38 Inadvertent Power Saver cceceeeeeeeeeeeee ees 3 40 Load Management eeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeees 3 40 Before Leaving on a Long Trip eeeeeeeee 4 24 Brake Anti Lock Brake System ABS a e 4 7 Emergencies sa2isiiiciiineiiediivendivine eer 4 9 Panic ASSIS xcs itiwads stare enaa a aaea 4 12 PAG x cicctesscendeahewncoyeawcmeneas secaetbewvenraaaae 2 35 Sys
249. ent ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 56 FUSOS pocorn raa E neater atte ses cheese 5 104 Rainsense I Wipers eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 3 14 Windshield Wipers cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 3 13 Winter DiiVing sccsseolasscinecnas bonni munaan 4 27 Wiper Activated Headlamps ee 3 35 XM Satellite Radio Antenna System 3 122 Your Vehicle and the Environment 0 0 6 2
250. ent Size Tires and Wheels 0066 5 74 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care Uniform Tire Quality Grading eeeeeeeeeees 5 75 Washing Your Vehicle ceeeeeeeenee eee eees 5 98 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance 5 76 Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses 0 00 5 98 Wheel Replacement eeeeeeeeeeeeererees 5 76 Finish Calendis saccade svete iach satan EEES 5 98 Tire Chassenon ea E a S 5 78 Windshield and Wiper Blades 0008 5 99 Lifting Your Vehicle STS V c eeeeeeeeee eres 5 79 Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels 5 99 If a Tire Goes Flat cc eeceeeeeeeseee teeter eee ees 5 81 ES cap Seatats peewee E E 5 100 Changing a Flat Tire STS Only 5 5 83 Sheet Metal Damage ecceeeeeeeeeeees 5 100 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools Finish DAMAGE sccicaeieccidinstinaassed eaae aaie 5 101 STSCOMIY sshsccsansaatenansigesteasaeatthasamerentes ence 5 85 Underbody Maintenance eeeeeeeeee eee 5 101 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing Chemical Paint Spotting ceeeeeeeeeeeees 5 101 the Spare Tire STS Only eeeeeeeee ees 5 86 Vehicle Care Appearance Materials 5 102 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Vehicle Identification cccccccceeeeeeeees 5 103 Tools STS Only E EEEE EET 5 92 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 00 00
251. er details Intercooler Coolant Level Check 4 4L Supercharged Engine Check the coolant level and add DEX COOL coolant mixture if necessary See Engine Coolant on page 5 27 for further details Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if necessary At Least Once a Month Tire Inflation Check Visually inspect your vehicle s tires and make sure they are inflated to the correct pressures Do not forget to check the spare tire See Tires on page 5 57 for further details Check to make sure the spare tire is stored securely See Changing a Flat Tire STS Only on page 5 83 Tire Wear Inspection Tire rotation is recommended if your vehicle has the same size tires at all four wheel positions and may be required for high mileage highway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service notification Check the tires for wear and if necessary rotate the tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 70 At Least Once a Year Starter Switch Check A CAUTION When you are doing this inspection the vehicle could move suddenly If the vehicle moves you or others could be injured 1 Before you start be sure you have enough room around the vehicle 2 Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular brake See Parking Brake on page 2 35 Do not use the accelerator pedal and be ready to turn off the engine
252. erence received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment The Forward Collision Alert FCA system provides an audible and visual warning if you approach a vehicle too rapidly FCA also provides a visual warning with no audible warning if you are following another vehicle much too closely FCA uses the Adaptive Cruise Control radar to detect a vehicle directly ahead in your path within a distance of 328 ft 100 m and operates at speeds above 20 mph 32 km h A CAUTION FCA is only a warning system and does not apply the brakes When you are approaching a vehicle or object too rapidly or when you are following a vehicle too closely that is ahead of you FCA may not provide you with enough time to avoid a collision FCA is not designed to warn the driver of pedestrians or animals Your complete attention is always required while driving and you should be ready to take action and apply the brakes For more information see Defensive Driving on page 4 2 The Forward Collision Alert
253. es and the turn signal lamps will flash three times Press and hold the button for three seconds to sound the panic alarm The horn will chirp and the turn signal lamps will flash for 30 seconds Press and release the button again to cancel the panic alarm Matching Transmitter s to Your Vehicle Each Keyless Access System is coded to allow only transmitters programmed to your vehicle to work If a transmitter is lost or stolen a replacement can be purchased and programmed through your GM dealer Your GM dealer can reprogram your vehicle so lost or stolen transmitters no longer work with your vehicle Each vehicle can have a maximum of four transmitters matched to it To match a new transmitter to your vehicle when you have a recognized transmitter do the following Two recognized transmitters are required for Canadian owners 1 The vehicle must be off 2 Have the recognized transmitter and the new unrecognized transmitter s with you 3 Insert the vehicle key into the key lock cylinder located on the outside of the driver s door 4 Turn the key to the unlock position five times within five seconds 5 The Driver Information Center DIC will display READY FOR FOB X where X can be 2 3 or 4 6 Place the new unrecognized transmitter into the transmitter pocket with the transmitter buttons facing the front of the vehicle The transmitter pocket is inside the center console storage area located between the d
254. es not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness your GM dealer can prepare the vehicle for inspection 3 70 Oil Pressure Light A CAUTION Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low If you do your engine can become so hot that it catches fire You or others could be burned Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced Notice Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may damage the engine The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always follow the maintenance schedule in this manual for changing engine oil If equipped this light tells you if there could be a problem with your engine oil pressure This light will come on briefly when you start your engine That is a check to be sure the light works If it does not come on be sure to have it fixed so it will be there to warn you if something goes wrong When the light comes on and stays on it means that oil is not flowing through your engine properly You could be low on oil and you might have some other system problem Security Light For information regarding this light see Theft Deterrent System on page 2 21 f Fog Lamp Light 0 The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off See Fog Lamps on page 3 37 for more information The fog lamps light will come on when the fog lamps are in use Lights On Reminder This light comes on whenever the parking lamps are on See Headlamps on
255. ess this pushbutton to go to the first track in the next folder Press and hold this pushbutton to advance quickly within a track Release this pushbutton to play the passage FWD and the elapsed time of the track will appear on the display Pressing this button while in folder random mode will take you to the next folder and random the tracks in that folder F3 RDM Random To play the tracks on the CD in random rather than sequential order press and release this pushbutton until RDM TRCK appears on the display Once all of the tracks in the current folder or playlist have been played the system will move on to the next folder or playlist and play all of the tracks in random order 3 112 To play the tracks in the current folder in random rather than sequential order press and release this pushbutton until RDM FLDR appears on the display This feature will not work with playlists When in random pressing and releasing either single seek arrow will take you to the next or previous random track Press and release this pushbutton until NORMAL appears on the display to turn random play off F4 RPT Repeat To repeat the current track press and release this pushbutton until RPT TRCK appears on the display To repeat the tracks in the current folder press and release this pushbutton until RPT FLDR appears on the display Press and release this pushbutton until NORMAL appears on the display to turn repeated play off
256. ether with the driver information center You can set a Trip A and a Trip B odometer See Trip Information under DIC Controls and Displays on page 3 74 for more information If your vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed the new one will be set to the correct mileage total of the old odometer Tachometer This gage indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute rpm pay we 6 7 of 4 8 RPM x 1000 Safety Belt Reminder Light When the ignition button is pressed to START a chime will be provided for several seconds to remind people to buckle their safety belts The driver safety belt light will also be provided and stay on for several seconds then it will flash for several more You should buckle your seat belt This chime and light will be repeated if the driver remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion LZ If the driver s belt is buckled neither the chime nor the light will be provided 3 59 Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light Several seconds after the ignition button is pressed to START a chime will sound for several seconds to remind the front passenger to buckle their safety belt This would only occur if the passenger airbag is enabled See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 58 for more information The passenger safety belt light will also come on and stay on for several seconds then it will flash for several more This chime and light will be repeated if
257. f a second a vehicle moving at 60 mph 100 km h travels 66 feet 20 m That could be a lot of distance in an emergency so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important And of course actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road whether it is pavement or gravel the condition of the road whether it is wet dry or icy tire tread the condition of your brakes the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied Avoid needless heavy braking Some people drive in spurts heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking rather than keeping pace with traffic This is a mistake Your brakes may not have time to cool between hard stops Your brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following distances you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking That means better braking and longer brake life If your engine ever stops while you are driving brake normally but do not pump your brakes If you do the pedal may get harder to push down If your engine stops you will still have some power brake assist But you will use it when you brake Once the power assist is used up it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push Adding non GM accessories can affect your vehicle s performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 Anti Lock Brake System ABS Y
258. f something goes wrong your rig could start to move People can be injured and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill here is how to do it 1 Apply your regular brakes but do not shift into PARK P When parking uphill turn the wheels away from the curb When parking downhill turn the wheels into the curb 2 Have someone place chocks behind the trailer wheels 3 When the wheel chocks are in place release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load 4 Reapply the regular brakes Then shift into PARK P firmly and apply your parking brake 5 Release the regular brakes 4 45 When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking on a Hill 1 Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while you e start your engine e shift into a gear and e release the parking brake 2 Let up on the brake pedal 3 Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks 4 Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks 4 46 Maintenance When Trailer Towing Your vehicle will need service more often when you are pulling a trailer See the Maintenance Schedule for more on this Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid do not overfill engine oil drive belt cooling system and brake system Each of these is covered in this manual and the Index will help you find them quickly If you are trailering
259. f the HUD image see Heaad Up Display HUD on page 3 40 For information on adjusting the instrument panel brightness see Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3 39 1 Reset Press this button to reset certain DIC features and to acknowledge DIC warning messages and clear them from the DIC display 7S Trip Information Press this button to scroll through the odometer trip odometer A and trip odometer B To reset each trip odometer either press the reset button or press and hold the trip information button until the trip odometer displayed returns to zero 3 75 Information Display Menu Items The following display menu items can be displayed by pressing the information button MPH km h If your vehicle has this display it shows the vehicle s speed digitally in either miles per hour mph or kilometers per hour km h MILES RANGE km RANGE This display shows the approximate number of remaining miles mi or kilometers km you can drive without refilling your fuel tank This estimate is based on the current driving conditions and will change if the driving conditions change For example if you are driving in traffic making frequent stops the display may read one number but if you enter the freeway the number may change even though you still have the same amount of fuel in the fuel tank This is because different driving conditions produce different fuel economies Generally freeway driving produces better
260. f the airflow either side to side or up and down Use the thumbwheels to open or close the outlets to adjust the airflow Turn the thumbwheel to the right to open the outlets completely and allow the maximum amount of air to enter your vehicle Turn the thumbwheel to the left to close the outlets and minimize the amount of air entering the vehicle Operation Tips e Clear away any ice snow or leaves from the air inlets at the base of the windshield that may block the flow of air into your vehicle e Use of non GM approved hood deflectors may adversely affect the performance of the system e Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more effectively e If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is at the highest setting the passenger compartment air filter may need to be replaced For more information see Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 3 55 3 54 Rear Climate Control System Your vehicle has a rear climate control system The base model includes air outlets in the rear of the center console for cooling and under seat air outlets for heating The temperature quantity and air delivery location is controlled automatically by the front climate control system Some vehicles are equipped with an optional climate control panel for the rear passenger located on the back of the center console The left knob controls the temperature of the air to the rea
261. f your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using the proper equipment and quality replacement parts Poorly performed collision repairs will diminish your vehicle s resale value and safety performance can be compromised in subsequent collisions Collision Parts Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the same materials and construction methods as the parts with which your vehicle was originally built Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice to assure that your vehicle s designed appearance durability and safety are preserved The use of Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for repair These parts are typically removed from vehicles that were total losses in prior accidents In most cases the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the vehicle A recycled original equipment GM part may be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle s originally designed appearance and safety performance however the history of these parts is not known Such parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty and any related failures are not covered by that warranty Aftermarket collision parts are also available These are made by companies other than GM and may not have been tested for your vehicle As a result these parts may fit poorly exhibit pre
262. facing child restraints have a top tether and that the tether be attached In the United States some child restraints also have a top tether Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint If the child restraint does not have a top tether one can be obtained in kit form for many child restraints Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit is available Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor Locations Lower Anchor Seating positions with two lower anchors at Top Tether Anchor Seating positions with top tether anchors Rear Seat To assist you in locating the lower anchors each seating position with lower anchors has two labels near the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion showing where the anchors are located 1 39 To assist you in locating the top tether anchors the top tether anchor symbol is located on the trim cover The top tether anchors are located under the trim covers on the rear seatback filler panel Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed 1 40 Do not secure a child restraint in the right front passenger s position if a national or local law requires that the top tether be attached or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be attached There is no place to attach the top tether in this p
263. fe trouble free trip Is the tread good enough for long distance driving Are the tires all inflated to the recommended pressure e Weather Forecasts What is the weather outlook along your route Should you delay your trip a short time to avoid a major storm system e Maps Do you have up to date maps Highway Hypnosis Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel Call it highway hypnosis lack of awareness or whatever There is something about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery along with the hum of the tires on the road the drone of the engine and the rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy Do not let it happen to you If it does your vehicle can leave the road in less than a second and you could crash and be injured What can you do about highway hypnosis First be aware that it can happen Then here are some tips e Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated with a comfortably cool interior e Keep your eyes moving Scan the road ahead and to the sides Check your rearview mirrors and your instruments frequently e If you get sleepy pull off the road into a rest service or parking area and take a nap get some exercise or both For safety treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency Hill and Mountain Roads Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from driving in flat or rolling terrain 4 2
264. ffects are worse at night All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0 05 percent Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of 0 05 percent or above A driver with a BAC level of 0 06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a collision At a BAC level of 0 10 percent the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater at a level of 0 15 percent the chance is 25 times greater The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in one drink No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that up I will be careful is not the right answer What if there is an emergency a need to take sudden action as when a child darts into the street A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision There is something else about drinking and driving that many people do not know Medical research shows that alcohol in a person s system can make crash injuries worse especially injuries to the brain spinal cord or heart This means that when anyone who has been drinking driver or passenger is in a crash that person s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking A CAUTION Drinking and then driving is very dangerous Your reflexes perceptions attentiveness and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You ca
265. fogging your windows which may occur by activating recirculation mode Also the air quality sensor system will not remain in recirculation mode for extended periods of time that could cause stuffy or very dry conditions in the vehicle Following a poorly running vehicle for an extended period of time may not keep recirculation active indefinitely The air quality sensor will not activate due to organic odors like skunk and may not activate on many chemical related odors If you wish to limit these types of odors you may choose to manually select recirculation Your vehicle may also be equipped with a charcoal filter that can limit many odors from being pulled into your vehicle This filter like your engines air cleaner filter will need to be changed periodically See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 The air quality sensor system does not protect against carbon monoxide CO which you cannot see or smell See Engine Exhaust on page 2 39 Q Power Driver s Temperature Press the power button located on the driver s side of the climate control panel to turn the entire climate control system on or off Turn the knob to increase or decrease the temperature inside your vehicle D Power Passenger s Temperature Press the power button located on the passenger s side of the climate control panel to turn the passenger s climate control system on if they wish to have a different setting than the driver Turn the knob to increas
266. formation CAT Category This menu item allows you to select radio stations based on preset categories See Activating Program Type PTY Stations under Radio with CD on page 3 96 for more information TA Traffic Announcement This menu item allows you to turn the TA feature on and off See TA Traffic Announcement under Radio with CD on page 3 96 for more information RECALL RDS MESSAGE This menu item allows you to view an RDS radio station message broadcast by a radio station See MSG Message under Radio with CD on page 3 96 for more information AF Alternate Frequency This menu item allows you to turn the AF feature on and off See Activating Program Type PTY Stations RDS and XM under Radio with CD on page 3 96 for more information SEEK LOCAL DISTANT This feature instructs the audio system to seek only local radio stations with the strongest signal or to seek all radio stations with a strong signal in a large area Use LOCAL when you are in urban areas where there are several strong radio station signals and you want to limit the number of stations to those with the strongest signals only Use DISTANT when you are in rural areas where there are fewer radio station signals available See Local Distant Selection under Radio with CD on page 3 96 for more information SET CLOCK Use this menu item to set the time See Setting the Time on page 3 95 for more information 31 SET
267. formation CLEAN RADAR When this message displays it means that the Adaptive Cruise Control system is disabled because the radar is blocked and cannot detect vehicles in your path It may also activate during heavy rain or due to road spray To clean the system see Cleaning the System under Adaptive Cruise Control on page 3 19 COMPETITIVE DRIVING STS V Only When this message displays it means that the competitive driving mode is turned on with the traction control button The TC traction control light will be on when the competitive driving mode is on The traction control system will not operate while in competitive driving mode You should adjust your driving accordingly See Competitive Driving Mode STS V on page 4 10 for more information DRIVER DOOR AJAR This symbol appears with the DRIVER DOOR AJAR message When this message displays it means that the driver s door was not closed completely You should make sure that the driver s door is closed completely ENGINE COOLANT HOT IDLE ENGINE Notice lf you drive your vehicle while the engine is overheating severe engine damage may occur If an overheat warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible Do not increase the engine speed above normal idling speed See Engine Overheating on page 5 31 for more information warn This message will display when the engine coolant temperature is too hot St
268. frontal impact For moderate frontal impacts these airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment For more severe frontal impacts full deployment occurs If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall that does not move or deform the threshold level for the reduced deployment is about 12 to 16 mph 19 to 26 km h and the threshold level for a full deployment is about 18 to 24 mph 28 5 to 38 5 km h The threshold level can vary however with specific vehicle design so that it can be somewhat above or below this range Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds For example e If the vehicle hits a stationary object the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a moving object e If the vehicle hits an object that deforms the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform e If the vehicle hits a narrow object like a pole the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object like a wall e If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle goes straight into the object The frontal airbags driver and right front passenger are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers rear impacts or in many side impacts 1 55 The side impact airbags are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side
269. g is off See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3 61 If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit turn the vehicle off Remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint following the child restraint manufacturer s directions and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position on page 1 45 1 60 If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle the on indicator is still lit check to make sure that the vehicle s seatback is not pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion If this happens slightly recline the vehicle s seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint If this happens adjust the head restraint If the on indicator is still lit secure the child in the child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and check with your dealer The passenger sensing system is designed to enable may inflate the right front passenger s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the right front passenger s seat When the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag to be enabled the on indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active For some children who have outgrown child restraints and for very small adults the passenger sensing system may or may not t
270. g is selected off for that preset station AUTOSTORE PRESETS To set the preset stations automatically perform the following steps 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press BAND to select FM1 FM2 or AM 3 Press the tune select knob to enter the main menu 4 Turn the tune select knob until AUTOSTORE PRESETS appears on the display 5 Press the tune select knob to select AUTOSTORE will appear on the display The radio will automatically search the band and select and store the six radio stations with the strongest signal The stations will be stored by signal strength not sequential order The set preset station number will appear on the display above the pushbutton that it is set to Whenever that numbered pushbutton is pressed for less than two seconds the station that was set will return 6 Press the BACK F6 button to exit the display To return to the original display repeatedly press the BACK F6 button or wait for the display to time out When battery power is removed and later applied you will not have to reset your radio presets PRESETS HOME AWAY This feature gives you the ability to store two different kinds of station presets HOME can be used for stations available where you live and AWAY can be for stations available outside of your local broadcasting area To set preset stations for home and away perform the following steps 1 Press the tune select knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn the tune select knob u
271. get too close to the vehicle you want to pass while you are awaiting an opportunity For one thing following too closely reduces your area of vision especially if you are following a larger vehicle Also you will not have adequate space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops Keep back a reasonable distance When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and do not get too close Time your move so you will be increasing speed as the time comes to move into the other lane If the way is clear to pass you will have a running start that more than makes up for the distance you would lose by dropping back And if something happens to cause you to cancel your pass you need only slow down and drop back again and wait for another opportunity If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle wait your turn But take care that someone is not trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle Remember to glance over your shoulder and check the blind spot Check your mirrors glance over your shoulder and start your left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass When you are far enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your inside mirror activate your right lane change signal and move back into the right lane Remember that your passenger side outside mirror is convex The vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away from you than i
272. ght if you need more light Be sure the battery has enough water You do 5 Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or not need to add water to the battery installed missing insulation If they do you could get a in your new vehicle But if a battery has filler shock The vehicles could be damaged too caps be sure the right amount of fluid is there Before you connect the cables here are some If it is low add water to take care of that first basic things you should know Positive will go to If you do not explosive gas could be present positive or to a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Negative will go to a heavy unpainted metal engine part or to a remote Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you Do not get it on you If you accidentally get it negative terminal if the vehicle has one in your eyes or on your skin flush the place with water and get medical help immediately Do not connect positive to negative or you will get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too And do not connect the negative cable to the negative terminal on the dead battery because this can cause sparks 5 49 y fedan e imina d the orca odiy Usa dh remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one wm Do not let the other end
273. ghting must be enabled See Headlamps on page 3 31 for additional information When the ignition is turned off the wiper activated headlamps will immediately turn off They will also turn off if the windshield wiper control is turned off Headlamps on Reminder A warning chime will sound if the exterior lamp control is left on in either the headlamp or parking lamp position and the driver s door is opened with the ignition off See Lights On Reminder on page 3 71 for additional information Daytime Running Lamps DRL Daytime Running Lamps DRL can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada The DRL system will make the turn signal lamps come on when the following conditions are met e Itis still daylight and the ignition is on e the automatic lights are enabled and e the transmission is not in PARK P When DRL are on only your front turn signal lamps will be on No other exterior lamps will be on when the DRL are being used Your instrument panel will not be lit 3 35 When the automatic lights are enabled and it is dark enough outside the DRL will turn off and the low beam headlamps will turn on When it is bright enough outside the low beam headlamps wil
274. hat kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 5 52 Rear Axle When to Check Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss could indicate a problem Have it inspected and repaired How to Check Lubricant To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole located on the rear axle you ll need to add some lubricant Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 Front Axle When to Check and Change Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check the front axle fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss could indicate a problem Have it inspected and repaired How to Check Lubricant A Drain Plug B Filler Plug To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be ona level surface If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole located on the front axle you may need to add some lubricant What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 5 53 Bulb Replacement Halogen Bulbs For the
275. hat delay your instrument panel cluster may not be as bright as usual Make sure your instrument panel brightness control is in full bright position See Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3 39 for more information You can idle the vehicle with the lamps off even when it is dark outside First set the parking brake while the ignition is in OFF ACC Then start the vehicle The lamps will stay off until you release the parking brake 3 38 Twilight Sentinel also provides exterior illumination as you leave the vehicle If Twilight Sentinel has turned on the lamps when you turn off the ignition your lamps will remain on until e The exterior lamp switch is moved from off to the parking lamp position or e a delay time that you select has elapsed See Vehicle Personalization on page 2 53 to select the delay time that you want You can also select no delay time If you turn off the ignition with the exterior lamp switch in the parking lamp or headlamp position the Twilight Sentinel delay will not occur The lamps will turn off as soon as the switch is turned off As with any vehicle you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it Exterior Lighting Battery Saver If the parking lamps or headlamps have been left on the exterior lamps will turn off about 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off This protects against draining the battery in case you have accidentally left the headlamps or parking lamps on
276. hat they tend to wear faster These performance tires are not rated as all season tires Winter tires are recommended for snow or ice covered roads Notice If your vehicle has low profile tires they are more susceptible to damage from road hazards or curb impact than standard profile tires Tire and or wheel assembly damage can occur when coming into contact with road hazards like potholes or sharp edged objects or when sliding into a curb Your GM warranty does not cover this type of damage Keep tires set to the correct inflation pressure and when possible avoid contact with curbs potholes and other road hazards 5 58 Winter Tires If you expect to drive on snow or ice covered roads often you may want to get winter tires for your vehicle All season tires provide good overall performance on most surfaces but they may not offer the traction you would like or the same level of performance as winter tires on snow or ice covered roads See your dealer for details regarding winter tire availability and proper tire selection Also see Buying New Tires on page 5 72 If you choose to use winter tires e Use tires of the same brand and tread type on all four wheel positions e Use only radial ply tires of the same size load range and speed rating as the original equipment tires Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original equipment tires may not be available for H V W Y and ZR speed rated tires If you c
277. he GM4718M Standard designation you can cause engine damage not covered by your warranty SAE 5W 30 As shown in the viscosity chart SAE 5W 30 is best for your vehicle These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity or thickness Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W 50 Oils meeting these requirements should also have the starburst symbol on the container This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API You should look for this on the oil container and use only those oils that are identified as meeting GM Standard GM4718M and have the starburst symbol on the front of the oil container Your vehicle s engine is filled at the factory with a Mobil 1 synthetic oil which meets all requirements for your vehicle Substitute Engine Oil When adding oil to maintain engine oil level oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M may not be available You can add substitute oil designated SAE 5W 30 with the starburst symbol at all temperatures Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard GM4718M should not be used for an oil change Engine Oil Additives Do not add anything to your oil The recommended oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM standards are all you will need for good performance and engine protection 5 23 Engine Oil Life System When to Change Engine Oil Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know when to change the engine oil and filter Th
278. he factory it was programmed to Mode 1 The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory To program the vehicle to a different mode use the following procedure 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until EXT LIGHTS AT UNLOCK is highlighted 3 Press the tune select knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle 2 61 HORN CHIRPS AT LOCK This feature sounds the horn once when the keyless access transmitter is used to lock the vehicle All doors must be closed for this feature to work Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory it was programmed to Mode 2 The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory To program the vehicle to a different mode use the following procedure 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until HORN CHIRPS AT LOCK is highlighted 3 Press the tune s
279. he radio display See Configurable Radio Display Keys under Radio with CD on page 3 96 for more information on configuring the keys 3 95 Radio with CD 2 21 JAN 2004 12 10 m 103 5 98 5 97 7 102 9 104 4 99 1 oa Radio with CD shown Radio with Six Disc CD similar Radio Data System RDS The audio system has a Radio Data System RDS RDS features are available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information With RDS the radio can do the following e Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of programming e Receive announcements concerning local and national emergencies e Display messages from radio stations e Seek to stations with traffic announcements 3 96 This system relies upon receiving specific information from these stations and will only work when the information is available In rare cases a radio station may broadcast incorrect information that will cause the radio features to work improperly If this happens contact the radio station While the radio is tuned to an RDS station the station name or call letters will appear on the display instead of the frequency RDS stations may also provide the time of day a program type PTY for current programming and the name of the program being broadcast XM Satellite Radio Service XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48 contiguous United States and in Canada if availa
280. heel position and five minutes overall to match all four tire wheel positions If it takes longer than one minute to match the first tire and wheel or more than five minutes to match all four tire wheel positions the matching process stops and you will need to start over The TPM matching process is outlined below 1 Set the parking brake 2 Press the push button ignition switch to OFF ACC 3 Using the Keyless Access transmitter lock and unlock the vehicle s doors 4 Press the lock and unlock buttons at the same time on the Keyless Access transmitter A single horn chirp will sound indicating that the TPMS system is ready and the sensor matching process can begin 5 Start with the driver s side front tire 6 Remove the valve cap from the valve stem Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or decreasing the tire s air pressure for five seconds or until a horn chirp sounds The horn chirp which may take up to 30 seconds to sound confirms that the sensor identification code has been matched to this tire position To decrease the tire s air pressure use the pointed end of the valve cap a pencil style air pressure gauge or a key 7 Proceed to the passenger s side front tire and repeat the procedure in Step 6 8 Proceed to the passenger s side rear tire and repeat the procedure in Step 6 9 Proceed to the driver s side rear tire and repeat the procedure in Step 6 10 After hearing the conf
281. hen a station that broadcasts traffic announcements is found the radio will stop seeking and TA will appear on the display If no station is found that broadcasts traffic announcements No Traffic will appear on the display The radio will play traffic announcements if the volume is low The radio will interrupt the play of a CD if the last tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements To turn TA on or off perform the following steps 1 Press the tune select knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until TRAFFIC ANNOUNCE appears on the display 3 Press the tune select knob to select ON or OFF An X will appear in the box when TA is selected on 4 Press the BACK F6 button to exit the display To return to the original display repeatedly press the BACK F6 button or wait for the display to time out 3 101 Activating Program Type PTY Stations RDS and XM PTY allows you to search for stations with specific types of music The selectable PTYs are POP EASY TALK CNTRY Country CLASS Classical and JAZZ To activate program types perform the following steps 1 Press the tune select knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until PROGRAM TYPE MODE appears on the display 3 Press the tune select knob to select ON or OFF An X will appear in the box when PTY is selected on 4 Press the BACK F6 button to exit the display To return to the original display repeatedly
282. hen using the delay feature The closer you move the band toward mist the longer the delay The windshield wiper lever must be in delay for this feature to work GED Low Speed Put the lever in this position for slow steady wiping cycles B High Speed Put the lever in this position for rapid wiping cycles If the windshield wipers are in use for about six seconds while you are driving the exterior lamps will come on automatically if the exterior lamp control is in AUTO See Wiper Activated Headlamps on page 3 35 for more information Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them If they re frozen to the windshield gently loosen or thaw them If the blades do become damaged install new blades For more information see Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on page 5 56 Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload Your vehicle STS V only is equipped with a feature that disables the wiper system when the hood is open and your vehicle is stopped Opening the hood will automatically park the wipers if they are not parked This prevents the wipers from interfering with hood operation Be sure the hood is not opened when you require the vehicle s wipers out of the park position such as when changing the wiper blades 3 13 Rainsense IlI Wipers If your vehicle has this feature the moi
283. henever you start your vehicle To help assist you with directional control of the vehicle you should always leave the system on You can turn StabiliTrak off if you ever need to through the TC traction control on off button See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 9 If your vehicle is in cruise control when the StabiliTrak activates the cruise control will automatically disengage When road conditions allow you to safely use it again you may reengage the cruise control See Cruise Control on page 3 16 or Adaptive Cruise Control on page 3 19 for more information Panic Brake Assist Your vehicle has a panic brake assist system that monitors the intention of the driver while braking If the system senses that the driver has applied hard fast pressure to the brake pedal the system will generate additional pressure making it easier for the driver to maintain brake application When this happens the brake pedal will feel easier to push Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let the system work for you You may feel the brakes vibrate or you may notice some noise but this is normal The brakes will return to normal operation after the brake pedal has been released All Wheel Drive AWD System If your vehicle is equipped with this feature engine power is sent to all four wheels all the time This is like four wheel drive but it is fully automatic Steering Power Steering If you lose power steering assist becaus
284. hese are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle LATCH BOTH LAP AND Baal SHOULDER BELTS TO E tol ENGINE iiae l INJURY PROTECT OCCUPANT SWITCH 7 COOLANT PRESSURE DO NOT TWIST SAFETY i TEMP BELT WHEN ATTACHING PROTECT TURN FUSE 2 TO EYES BY FASTEN e SIGNALS BATTERY EH e SHIELDING SEAT AIRBAG TK CHARGING PARKING LAMPS y fia MOVE SEAT e DO NOT INSTALL ENGINE ACID COULD ruy Yey _AREAR FACING COOLANT REARWARD 4m y5 CHILD RESTRAINT CS FAN BELTS SYSTEM CAUSE HAZARD SECURE IN THIS SEATING PURNS CHILD SEAT POSITION WARNING FLASHER COOLANT FUEL AVOID PULL BELT SPARKS OR OUT e DO NOT INSTALL A FORWARD FACING FLAMES COMPLETELY DAYTIME THEN SECURE y P ORILD RESTRAINT Ko RUNNING ENGINE OIL GT OWNER S CHILD SEAT IN THIS SEATING LAMPS PRESSURE MANUAL SPARK OR POSITION FLAME COULD POWER M t DOOR LOCK ANTI LOCK SERVICE EXPLODE UNLOCK BEAS MANUAL BATTERY wnNnboowf P 4 NOTES vi Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems Front Seats ecann eeaeeaeea een eeaeeas 1 2 Power Seats 20 2 cccdscseesctdcimenaesactiodaedise ek eeaciwe 1 2 Power Lumbar 2 2 ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 2 Heated Seat cccececeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeaeeaeeaeeaees 1 3 Heated and Ventilated Seats ceeeeeeeeeees 1 4 Power Reclining Seatback eceeeeeeeneeeeeees 1 5 Head Restraints 2 cceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 6 Rear S
285. hone number or write them at the following address BBB Auto Line Program Council of Better Business Bureaus Inc 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington VA 22203 1838 Telephone 1 800 955 5100 This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia Eligibility is limited by vehicle age mileage and other factors General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and or discontinue its participation in this program Online Owner Center The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership needs Specific vehicle information can be found in one place The Online Owner Center allows you to e Get e mail service reminders e Access information about your specific vehicle including tips and videos and an electronic version of this owner s manual United States only e Keep track of your vehicle s service history and maintenance schedule e Find GM dealers for service nationwide e Receive special promotions and privileges only available to members United States only Refer to the web for updated information To register your vehicle visit www MyGMLink com United States or My GM Canada within www gmcanada com Canada Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users To assist customers who are deaf hard of hearing or speech impaired and who use Text Telephones TTYs Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center Any TTY user can communic
286. hoose winter tires with a lower speed rating never exceed the tire s maximum speed capability Tire Sidewall Labeling Useful information about a tire is molded into its sidewall The examples below show a typical passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire sidewall Z Lu oc Ag P Ni N ye 2 og ee g 8 y Bayo exme mo X 2 v Z Nouv ogee Passenger P Metric Tire Example A Tire Size The tire size is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire s width height aspect ratio construction type and service description See the Tire Size illustration later in this section for more detail B TPC Spec Tire Performance Criteria Specification Original equipment tires designed to GM s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall GM s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines C DOT Department of Transportation The Department of Transportation DOT code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards D Tire Identification Number TIN The letters and numbers following DOT Department of Transportation code is the Tire Identification Number TIN The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code tire size and date the tire was manufactured The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire although only one side may have th
287. icle Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle Restraint System Check 0 eeeeeeeeee ee Checking the Restraint Systems 606 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash 1 51 1 55 1 56 1 56 1 57 Front Seats Power Seats The power seat controls are located on the outboard sides of the front seat cushions Sas 1 2 Move the front of the horizontal control up or down to adjust the front portion of the cushion Move the rear of the horizontal control up or down to adjust the rear portion of the cushion Slide the horizontal control forward or rearward to move the entire seat forward or rearward Press the vertical control rearward to recline the seatback Press the vertical control forward to raise the seatback See Power Reclining Seatback on page 1 5 If your vehicle has the memory feature you can program and recall memory settings for seat positions See Memory Seat Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 2 70 Power Lumbar Your vehicle s seats may be equipped with power lumbar You can increase or decrease lumbar support in an area of the lower seatback with this control located on the outboard sides of the front seat s To increase support press and hold the front of the control To decrease support press and hold the rear of the control Let go of the control when the lower seatback reaches the desired level of support To raise the position of th
288. icle for competitive driving Notice f you use your vehicle for racing or other competitive driving the engine may use more oil than it would with normal use Low oil levels can damage the engine Be sure to check the oil level often during racing or other competitive driving and keep the level at or near the upper mark that shows the proper operating range on the engine oil dipstick For information on how to add oil see Engine Oil on page 5 18 Driving at Night Night driving is more dangerous than day driving One reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired by alcohol or drugs with night vision problems or by fatigue Here are some tips on night driving Drive defensively e Do not drink and drive e Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare from headlamps behind you e Since you cannot see as well you may need to slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles e Slow down especially on higher speed roads Your vehicle s headlamps can light up only so much road ahead e In remote areas watch for animals e If you are tired pull off the road in a safe place and rest No one can see as well at night as in the daytime But as we get older these differences increase A 50 year old driver may require at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20 year old What you do in the daytime can also affect your night vision For example if you spend the
289. ill appear on the display and you will hear a beep 3 Load the CD when INSERT appears on the display insert a CD partway into the slot label side up The player will pull the CD in Do not load a CD until INSERT appears on the display The CD player will take up to six CDs Do not try to load more than six If you want to load less than six CDs load the desired amount The CD player will time out when it does not receive any more CDs and the last CD loaded will begin to play If the radio is on the last CD loaded will begin to play automatically F1 DISC Down Press this pushbutton to go to the previous CD F2 DISCT Up Press this pushbutton to go to the next CD F3 CD REV lt Reverse Press this pushbutton to go to the previous track Press and hold this pushbutton to reverse quickly within the track Release this pushbutton to play the passage The elapsed time of the track will appear on the display F4 CD FWD gt Forward Press this pushbutton to go to the next track Press and hold this pushbutton to advance quickly within the track Release this pushbutton to play the passage The elapsed time of the track will appear on the display 3 107 F5 MODE Press this pushbutton to select from NORMAL RPT TRCK Repeat Track RPT DISC Repeat CD RDM TRCK Random Track and RDM ALL Random All CDs e NORMAL Sets the system for normal play of the CD s NORMAL will not appear on the display when in this mo
290. ill need from the other driver Things like name address phone number driver s license number vehicle license plate vehicle make model and model year Vehicle Identification Number VIN insurance company and policy number and a general description of the damage to the other vehicle e If possible call your insurance company from the scene of the accident They will walk you through the information they will need If they ask for a police report phone or go to the police department headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of the report for a nominal fee In some states with no fault insurance laws a report may not be necessary This is especially true if there are no injuries and both vehicles are driveable e Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your vehicle Whether you select a GM dealer or a private collision repair facility to fix the damage make sure you are comfortable with them Remember you will have to feel comfortable with their work for a long time e Once you have an estimate read it carefully and make sure you understand what work will be performed on your vehicle If you have a question ask for an explanation Reputable shops welcome this opportunity 7 12 Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair Process In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair If you have a pre determined repair facility of choice take your v
291. illed for this message to turn off For information on the correct washer fluid mixture to use see Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5 41 and Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 Headlamp Washer Your vehicle may have headlamp washers The headlamp washers clear debris from the headlamp lenses The headlamp washers are located to the inside of the headlamps To wash the headlamps press the washer button located at the end of the windshield wiper lever Headlamps will be washed when the washer button is pressed if two minutes have elapsed since the last washer button press If two minutes have not elapsed the headlamps will be washed every fourth washer button press 3 15 The headlamps must be on to be washed If the headlamps are off only the windshield will be washed when the washer button is pressed If the washer fluid is low the headlamp washers will not work See Windshield Washer on page 3 15 for additional information Cruise Control These controls are located on the end of the multifunction lever Q Off This position turns the system off On This position activates the system Resume Accelerate Push the lever to this symbol to make the vehicle resume to a previously set speed or to accelerate when cruise is already active K Set Decrease Press this button to set the speed or to decrease the speed when cruise is already active 3 16 With cruise control you can maintain
292. immediately if it starts 3 Try to start the engine in each gear The vehicle should start only in PARK P or NEUTRAL N If the vehicle starts in any other position contact your GM Goodwrench dealer for service Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System Check A CAUTION When you are doing this inspection the vehicle could move suddenly If the vehicle moves you or others could be injured 1 Before you start be sure you have enough room around the vehicle It should be parked on a level surface 2 Firmly apply the parking brake See Parking Brake on page 2 35 Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move 3 With the engine off and without applying the regular brake try to move the shift lever out of PARK P with normal effort If the shift lever moves out of PARK P contact your GM Goodwrench dealer for service Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission Park P Mechanism Check A CAUTION When you are doing this check your vehicle could begin to move You or others could be injured and property could be damaged Make sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case it begins to roll Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move Park on a fairly steep hill with the vehicle facing downhill Keeping your foot on the regular brake set the parking brake e To check the parking brake s holding ability With the engine
293. in rollover or in rear crashes Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there is an airbag for that person Frontal airbags for the driver and right front passenger are designed to deploy in moderate to severe frontal and near frontal crashes They are not designed to inflate in rollover rear crashes or in many side crashes And for some unrestrained occupants frontal airbags may provide less protection in frontal crashes than more forceful airbags have provided in the past CAUTION Continued 1 49 A CAUTION Both frontal and side impact airbags inflate with great force faster than the blink of an eye If you are too close to an inflating airbag as you would be if you were leaning forward it could seriously injure you Safety belts help keep you in position for airbag inflation before and during a crash Always wear your safety belt even with frontal airbags The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door A CAUTION Anyone who is up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Airbags plus lap shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a chil
294. ing accordingly See StabiliTrak System on page 4 11 for more information STABILITY SYS System READY The STABILITY SYS READY message will display any time you turn back on StabiliTrak using the TC traction control on off button See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 9 for more information When this message has been displayed StabiliTrak is ready to assist you with directional control of the vehicle if needed See StabiliTrak System on page 4 11 for more information STARTING DISABLED THEFT PROBLEM This message will display when incorrect conditions exist within the theft deterrent system See your GM dealer for service STARTING DISABLED THROTTLE PROBLEM This message will display when your vehicle s throttle system is not functioning properly Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer THEFT ATTEMPTED f This message will display if the theft deterrent system has detected a break in attempt while you were away from your vehicle This symbol appears with the THEFT ATTEMPTED message TRACTION ACTIVE This message will display when the traction control system is actively limiting wheel spin Slippery road conditions may exist if this message is displayed so adjust your driving accordingly The message will stay on for a few seconds after the traction control system stops limiting wheel spin See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 9 for more information TRANS Transmission HOT IDLE
295. ing means changes in handling durability and fuel economy Successful safe trailering takes correct equipment and it has to be used properly 4 40 That is the reason for this part In it are many time tested important trailering tips and safety rules Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer Load pulling components such as the engine transmission wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder against the drag of the added weight The engine is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under greater loads generating extra heat What is more the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance increasing the pulling requirements If You Do Decide To Pull a Trailer If you do here are some important points e There are many different laws including speed limit restrictions having to do with trailering Make sure your rig will be legal not only where you live but also where you will be driving A good source for this information can be state or provincial police e Consider using a sway control You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls e Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km your new vehicle is driven Your engine axle or other parts could be damaged e Then during the first 500 miles 800 km that you tow a trailer do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts a
296. int Because there are different systems it is important to refer to the instructions that come with the restraint A child can be endangered in a crash if the child is not properly secured in the child restraint 1 35 Where to Put the Restraint Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat General Motors recommends that child restraints be secured in a rear seat including an infant riding in a rear facing infant seat a child riding in a forward facing child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a rear facing child restraint A label on your sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys 1 36 A CAUTION A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag Even though the passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the passenger s frontal airbag if the system detects a rear facing child restraint no system is fail safe and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off General Motors recommends that rear facing child restraints be sec
297. ional Required Services 0eeeeeeeee 6 6 At Each Fuel Fill cccccc cece eeeeeeeeeeenees 6 9 At Least Once a Month c cccceeeeneeeeees 6 9 At Least Once a Year ccc cece ececeenee ease eeenes 6 10 IFTFOGUCTION vaisiai saan suds a e aa 6 2 Maintenance Footnotes cccccceeeeeeaeeeeeees 6 7 Maintenance Record cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 6 16 Maintenance Requirements l c 6 2 Maintenance Schedule cont Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts 6 14 Owner Checks and Services eeeeeeeeeees 6 8 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 6 12 Scheduled Maintenance c eeeeeeeeee eee ees 6 4 USING lt 2 vtecctcnduteeiies E S E SS 6 2 Your Vehicle and the Environment 6 2 Malfunction Indicator Light ceecee 3 67 Memory Mirrors 2 0cceeeeneeeeeeeneceeeeeeeeeneees 2 70 Memory S at iii cccc teeccecchccenteeseiinodluccniethienes 2 70 Memory Steering Wheel Controls 08 2 70 Message DIC Warnings and Messages 0 eeeeeeee 3 79 Mirrors Automatic Dimming Rearview ee 2 41 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with Intellibeam and OnStar o oo 2 41 Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar 2 41 Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar and COMPASS nioran saciedecanctvoutianed 2 42 Manual Rearview Mirror with Compass and Temperature seater iaaa 1 7 MEMO isis oxic nee cc s
298. ions may exist when this message is displayed so adjust your driving accordingly This message may stay on for a few seconds after StabiliTrak stops assisting you with directional control of the vehicle See StabiliTrak System on page 4 11 for more information 3 90 STABILITY SYS System NOT READY The STABILITY SYS NOT READY message will display if StabiliTrak is not ready Two conditions may cause this message to display The first condition may be that the vehicle needs to be driven in a straight line until the sensors are centered Once the sensors are centered the StabiliTrak system will be ready and the STABILITY SYS READY message will display The second condition that may cause this message to display is when you first start your vehicle and drive away during cold winter weather This is normal The system needs to warm up You can acknowledge this message by pressing the reset button The StabiliTrak performance is affected until the STABILITY SYS READY message is displayed in the DIC See StabiliTrak System on page 4 11 for more information STABILITY SYS System OFF The STABILITY SYS OFF message will display any time you turn off StabiliTrak using the TC traction control on off button See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 9 for more information When this message has been displayed StabiliTrak is no longer available to assist you with directional control of the vehicle Adjust your driv
299. iously under Entering the Driver Selection Submenu From the DRIVER SELECTION submenu turn the tune select knob to scroll to STORE DRIVER SETTINGS and press in the knob Two beeps will sound to confirm that your driver settings are saved Set the HUD position if your vehicle has this feature the climate control temperature fan speed and mode settings the radio presets tone volume playback mode AM FM XM or CD and compact disc position Your memory settings are now programmed Any changes that are made to the HUD audio system and climate controls while driving will be automatically stored when the ignition is turned off Repeat the procedure for a second driver by programming the other driver number Entering the Driver Exit Settings Submenu To enter the memory programming mode for your exit settings use the following procedure 1 Be sure the ignition is either on in ACC position or in RAP and place the transmission in PARK P or the vehicle speed is less than 6 mph 9 km h Press any button on the appropriate keyless access transmitter to identify yourself as Driver 1 or Driver 2 Turn on the radio by pressing the power volume knob Press the CNFG radio button to enter the main menu of the radio Turn the tune select knob and scroll to SETUP Press the tune select knob to enter the SETUP menu Turn the tune select knob and scroll to DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS Press the tune
300. ire starts while you are refueling do not remove the nozzle Shut off the flow of fuel by shutting off the pump or by notifying the station attendant Leave the area immediately Notice If you need a new fuel cap be sure to get the right type Your dealer can get one for you If you get the wrong type it may not fit properly This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions system See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 67 Filling a Portable Fuel Container Checking Things Under the Hood A CAUTION A CAUTION Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in your vehicle Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the gasoline vapor You can be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this occurs To help avoid injury to you and others e Dispense gasoline only into approved containers Do not fill a container while it is inside a a vehicle in a vehicle s trunk pickup bed or A CAUTION on any surface other than the ground Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the Things that burn can get on hot engine parts inside of the fill opening before operating and start a fire These include liquids like fuel the nozzle Contact should be maintained oil coolant brake fluid windshield washer and until the filling is complete other fluids and plastic or rubber You or e Do not smoke while pumping gasoline others could be burned Be careful not to dr
301. irected to the outboard outlets and a little air directed to the windshield and side windows The mode switch can also be used to select the defog mode Information on defogging and defrosting can be found later in this section A V Fan Press this switch to increase or decrease the fan speed Pressing this switch cancels automatic operation and allows the operator to manually select the amount of airflow Press AUTO to return to automatic operation If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is at the highest setting the passenger compartment air filter may need to be replaced For more information see Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 3 55 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 lt gt Recirculation This button controls the air source for the climate control system If you are in AUTO mode pressing this button once will choose recirculation This mode keeps outside air from coming in the vehicle and recirculates the air in the vehicle It can be used to prevent outside air and odors from entering your vehicle or to help cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly 3 49 Recirculation is not available in the defrost mode and will shut off when defog mode is selected Both of these features are designed to limit fogging in your vehicle If recirculation is selected during defog mode it will automatically turn off after 10 minutes to limit problems with fogging In some conditions using recirculation for l
302. irectly on the HUD lens because the cleaner could leak inside the unit and cause damage If the ignition is on and you cannot see the HUD image check to see if e Something is covering the HUD unit e The brightness is adjusted properly e The HUD image is adjusted to the proper height e Ambient light in the direction your vehicle is facing is low e A fuse is blown See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5 105 Keep in mind that your windshield is part of the HUD system See Windshield Replacement on page 5 56 The following Adaptive Cruise Control message may appear in the HUD PEDAL APPLIED ACC OVERRIDE This message indicates that you are pressing your foot on the accelerator pedal and overriding Adaptive Cruise Control While you are doing this the system will not automatically apply the brakes Once you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Adaptive Cruise Control will return to normal operation and be able to apply the brakes if needed You may also see an Adaptive Cruise Control active symbol alert symbol or vehicle ahead symbol See Adaptive Cruise Control on page 3 19 for more information 3 43 Ultrasonic Rear Parking The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA system is So unless you check carefully behind you designed to help you park while the vehicle is in before and when you back up you could strike feces pone less children pedestrians bicyclists or pets behind easier and help yo
303. irming single horn chirp for the driver s side rear tire a double horn chirp will sound to signal the tire matching mode is no longer active Press the push button ignition switch to OFF ACC 11 Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure level as indicated on the tire and loading information label 12 Put the valve caps back on the valve stems The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor If you replace one of the road tires with the spare the SERVICE TIRE MONITOR message will be displayed on the DIC screen This message should go off once you re install the road tire containing the TPM sensor The SERVICE TIRE MONITOR message is also displayed when the TPMS system is malfunctioning One or more missing or inoperable TPMS sensors will cause the SERVICE TIRE MONITOR message to be displayed See your GM dealer for service 5 69 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than
304. is is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature and not on mileage Based on driving conditions the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can vary considerably For the oil life system to work properly you must reset the system every time the oil is changed Notice lf your vehicle is an STS V model the engine uses a special oil filter The use of any other engine oil filter could lead to filter failure and result in severe engine damage Damage caused by use of the wrong engine oil filter would not be covered by your new vehicle warranty When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished it will indicate that an oil change is necessary A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message in the DIC will come on See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 79 Change your oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles 1 000 km It is possible that 5 24 if you are driving under the best conditions the oil life system may not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year However your engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset Your dealer has GM trained service people who will perform this work using genuine GM parts and reset the system It is also important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the proper level If the system is ever reset accidentally you must change your oil at 3 000 miles 5 000 km since your last oil change R
305. is parked e Familiarize yourself with all of its controls e Familiarize yourself with its operation e Set up your audio system by presetting your favorite radio stations setting the tone and adjusting the speakers Then when driving conditions permit you can tune to your favorite radio stations using the presets and steering wheel controls if equipped Notice Before adding any sound equipment to your vehicle such as an audio system CD player CB radio mobile telephone or two way radio make sure that it can be added by checking with your dealer Also check federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone units If sound equipment can be added it is very important to do it properly Added sound equipment may interfere with the operation of your vehicle s engine radio or other systems and even damage them Your vehicle s systems may interfere with the operation of sound equipment that has been added Notice The chime signals related to seat belts parking brake and other functions of your vehicle operate through the GM radio entertainment system If that equipment is replaced or additional equipment is added to your vehicle the chimes may not work Make sure that replacement or additional equipment is compatible with your vehicle before installing it See Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 Figure out which audio system is in your vehicle find out what your audio system can do and how to operate all of it
306. isplay HUD on page 3 40 for additional information Once you pass the vehicle and remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Adaptive Cruise Control will return to normal operation and be able to apply the brakes if needed A CAUTION If you rest your foot on the accelerator pedal the system will not automatically apply the brakes You could crash into a vehicle ahead of you Do not rest your foot on the accelerator pedal when using Adaptive Cruise Control 3 27 Curves in the Road A CAUTION Due to Adaptive Cruise Conirol limitations in curves it may respond to a vehicle in another lane or may not have time to react to a vehicle in your lane You could crash into a vehicle ahead of you or lose control of your vehicle Give extra attention in curves and be ready to use the brakes if necessary Select an appropriate speed while driving in curves Adaptive Cruise Control may operate differently in a sharp curve It may reduce your speed if the curve is too sharp 3 28 When following a vehicle and entering a curve Adaptive Cruise Control could lose track of the vehicle in your lane and accelerate your vehicle When this happens the vehicle ahead symbol will not appear on the HUD Highway Exit Ramps A CAUTION Adaptive Cruise Control may lose track of the vehicle ahead and accelerate up to your set speed while entering or on highway exit ramps You could be startled by this acceleration and
307. it allows you to choose the features you would like to have activated when you engage the remote start on your vehicle These features include the climate control system the rear defogger and the seat temperature if your vehicle has this feature Activating these features helps provide a more comfortable vehicle upon entry See Remote Vehicle Start under Keyless Access System Operation on page 2 5 for more information Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory it was programmed to Mode 1 The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory To program the vehicle to a different mode use the following procedure 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until REMOTE START is highlighted 3 Press the tune select knob to switch back and forth between on and off When REMOTE START is on a check mark will appear next to the feature name You can then choose to activate any or all of the following features by turning the tune select knob to highlight the feature then pressing the knob to turn it on CLIMATE CONTROL The climate control system will engage when the vehicle is started using the remote start feature It will be at the same climate control setting that was last used by the driver using that keyless entry transmitte
308. it is a good idea to review this information before you start your trip Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during severe operating conditions See Engine Overheating on page 5 31 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care SEVICE ianea a a e E ii 5 3 Accessories and Modifications eccccece 5 3 California Proposition 65 Warning 006 5 3 Doing Your Own Service Work 28 5 4 Adding Equipment to the Outside of YOUR VENICE 2tcicomeneaut pnp a aT 5 5 Fuel cerere ton erase S E a E A 5 5 Gasoline Octane ccceeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeneeeeeneeee 5 5 Gasoline Specifications ccceeceeeeeeneeeeen eee 5 6 California FUG irespeto eiii 5 6 AOGIIVES nsnenstctatnsoncevencedusneetacaaatinndtcammeeatiabsd 5 6 Fuels in Foreign Countries cceeeeeeee ees 5 7 Filling the TANK iisi eri 5 8 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 005 5 10 Checking Things Under the Hood 5 10 Hood Release nenoriai tae 5 11 Engine Compartment Overview 5 12 Engine Olas mieia nna e a EEE seemed 5 18 Engine Oil Life System cceeeeeeee eee eeee ees 5 24 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 0 c eee 5 25 Automatic Transmission Fluid i e 5 27 Engine Coolant os ct ieee inpia 5 27 Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap 0 5 31 Engine O
309. k Check your tires once a month or more Do not forget to check the compact spare tire it should be at 60 psi 420 kPa For additional information regarding the compact spare tire see Compact Spare Tire STS Only on page 5 93 5 66 How to Check Use a good quality pocket type gage to check tire pressure You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they re under inflated Check the tire s inflation pressure when the tires are cold Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile 1 6 km Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label no further adjustment is necessary If the inflation pressure is low add air until you reach the recommended amount If you overfill the tire release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve Re check the tire pressure with the tire gage Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture High Speed Operation A CAUTION Driving at high speeds 100 mph 160 km h or higher puts an additional strain on tires Sustained high speed driving causes excessive heat build up and can cause sudde
310. k Out of View See Checking Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 5 18 Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir See Brake Fluid under Brakes on page 5 42 Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap See Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 5 31 and Cooling System on page 5 33 Engine Air Cleaner Filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 25 5 16 K JA D an e T x cia i SKK im fi E T A VAS ara be ss mu H i 4 Ge g KG Ke AY Ae y O X A 4 4L V8 STS V Engine After you have removed the sight shields if equipped on the 4 4L V8 STS V engine here is what you will see A B C Battery See Battery on page 5 45 Underhood Fuse Block See Underhood Fuse Block on page 5 106 Passenger Compartment Air Filter See Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 3 55 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir See Adding Washer Fluid under Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5 41 Intercooler System Pressure Cap See Engine Coolant on page 5 27 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir See Power Steering Fluid on page 5 40 Engine Oil Fill Cap See When to Add Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 5 18 Engine Oil Dipstick Out of View See Checking Engine Oil under Engine Oil on
311. k the engine radiator heater core and other parts If you have to add coolant more than once or twice a year have your dealer check your cooling system Notice If you use extra inhibitors and or additives in your vehicle s cooling system you could damage your vehicle Use only the proper mixture of the engine coolant listed in this manual for the cooling system See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 for more information Checking Coolant The coolant surge tank and pressure cap are located on the driver s side of the vehicle toward the rear of the engine compartment See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for more information on location A CAUTION Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly Never turn the surge tank pressure cap even a little when the engine and radiator are hot The vehicle must be on a level surface When your engine is cold the coolant level should be at the FULL COLD FROID line on the side of the surge tank Follow the arrow from the top of the tank down the side to the horizontal mark If the CHECK COOLANT LEVEL message in the Driver Information Center DIC comes on and stays on it means you are low on engine coolant See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 79 for more information 5 29 Checking Intercooler System Coolant Adding Coolant 4 4L V8 STS V
312. l there may be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing system See your dealer for service Se ia eae briefly to show that the 5 generator and battery A CAUTION charging systems are working properly If the off indicator and the airbag readiness light ever come on together it means that something may be wrong with the airbag If this light stays on your vehicle needs service You system If this ever happens have the vehicle should take your vehicle to the dealer at once To save serviced promptly because an adult size your battery until you get there turn off all accessories person sitting in the right front passenger seat See DIC Controls and Displays on page 3 74 for may not have the protection of the frontal more information airbag See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 60 3 63 Brake System Warning Light Your vehicle s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts If one part isn t working the other part can still work and stop you For good braking though you need both parts working well If the warning light comes on there is a brake problem Have your brake system inspected right away Canada BRAKE United States This light should come on briefly when you turn the engine on If it does not come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem 3 64 When the ignition is on the brake system warning light will also come on when you set
313. l Life System on page 5 24 CHECK BRAKE FLUID This message will display if the ignition is on to inform the driver that the brake fluid level is low Have the brake system serviced by your GM dealer as soon as possible See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 64 for more information CHECK COOLANT LEVEL This message will display when there is a low level of engine coolant Have the cooling system serviced by your GM dealer as soon as possible See Engine Coolant on page 5 27 for more information CHECK GAS CAP When this message displays the gas cap has not been fully tightened You should recheck the gas cap to ensure that it is on and tightened properly CHECK OIL LEVEL This message will display when the oil level is low See Engine Oil on page 5 18 for more information on checking your engine oil 3 81 CHECK TIRE PRESSURE This symbol appears with the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message gt If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor TPM system this message will display when one or more of the vehicle s tires are low or high See DIC Controls and Displays on page 3 74 for information on checking your vehicle s tire pressures 3 82 CHECK WASHER FLUID This symbol appears with the CHECK WASHER FLUID message When this message displays it means that your vehicle is low on windshield washer fluid You should refill the tank as soon as possible See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5 41 for more in
314. l go off and the DRL will turn back on If you start your vehicle in a dark garage the automatic headlamp system will come on immediately Once you leave the garage it will take about one minute for the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it is light outside During that delay your instrument panel cluster may not be as bright as usual Make sure your instrument panel brightness lever is in the full bright position See Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3 39 To operate your vehicle with the DRL off turn the exterior lamp control off and then do one of the following e Turn the exterior lamp control to the parking lamp position e Turn the exterior lamp control to the headlamp position e Turn the exterior lamp control from AUTO to off and back to AUTO An AUTOMATIC LIGHTS OFF message will appear on the DIC showing that automatic lighting has been disabled As with any vehicle you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it 3 36 Light Sensor The light sensor for the DRL is located on top of the instrument panel If you cover the sensor it will read dark and the exterior lamps may come on when you do not need them Fog Lamps Use the fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty conditions The fog lamp controls are located on the turn signal multifunction lever 0 Fog Lamps The band with this symbol is used to turn the front fog lamps on and off The parking lamps must
315. l information 2 23 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle New Vehicle Break In Notice Your vehicle does not need an elaborate break in But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines e Do not drive at any one constant speed fast or slow for the first 500 miles 805 km Do not make full throttle starts Avoid downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle e Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles 322 km or so During this time your new brake linings are not yet broken in Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement Follow this breaking in guideline every time you get new brake linings e Do not tow a trailer during break in See Towing a Trailer STS Only on page 4 40 for the trailer towing capabilities of your vehicle and more information Following break in engine speed and load can be gradually increased 2 24 Ignition Positions Your vehicle has an electronic keyless ignition with pushbutton start Q START Press this button while your foot is on the brake to start the engine The shifter must be in PARK P or NEUTRAL N to start the engine and the keyless access transmitter must be in the vehicle for the ignition to work acc OFF ACCESSORY When this button is pressed the engine will turn off even if the shifter is not in PARK P If the shifter is in PARK P the ignition mode will change to RAP if all doors are closed
316. lded onto the tire s sidewall If your vehicle has these tires and you need to replace them you can still get these TPC Spec rated tires by asking your GM dealer Your GM dealer can order these tires by part number This way your vehicle will continue to give the proper endurance handling traction and ride as the original tires Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original equipment tires may not be available for H V W Y and ZR speed rated tires If you choose snow tires with a lower speed rating never exceed the tire s maximum speed capability A CAUTION Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving If you mix tires of different sizes other than those originally installed on your vehicle brands or types radial and bias belted tires the vehicle may not handle properly and you could have a crash Using tires of different sizes other than those originally installed on your vehicle brands or types may also cause damage to your vehicle CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued Be sure to use the correct size brand and type of tires on all wheels It is all right to drive with your vehicle s compact spare temporarily it was developed for use on your vehicle See Compact Spare Tire STS Only on page 5 93 A CAUTION If you use bias ply tires on your vehicle the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving A tire and or wheel could fail
317. lease read these cautions If you do not you or others could be hurt You will also find a circle with a slash through it in this book This safety symbol means Do Not Do Not do this or Do Not let this happen Vehicle Damage Warnings Also in this manual you will find these notices Notice These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle A notice tells about something that can damage the vehicle Many times this damage would not be covered by your vehicle s warranty and it could be costly But the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage When you read other manuals you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words There are also warning labels on the vehicle They use the same words CAUTION or NOTICE Vehicle Symbols The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols instead of text Symbols are shown along with the text describing the operation or information relating to a specific component control message gage or indicator If you need help figuring out a specific name of a component gage or indicator reference the following topics e Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1 e Features and Controls in Section 2 e Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3 e Climate Controls in Section 3 e Warning Lights Gages and Indicators in Section 3 e Audio System s in Section 3 e Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5 T
318. leather may permanently change the appearance and feel of your leather and are not recommended Do not use silicone or wax based products or those containing organic solvents to clean your vehicle s interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non uniform manner Never use shoe polish on your leather Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic Surfaces A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove dust If a more thorough cleaning is necessary a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used to gently remove dust and dirt Never use spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the appearance and feel of your interior and are not recommended Do not use silicone or wax based products or those containing organic solvents to clean your vehicle s interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non uniform manner Some commercial products may increase gloss on your instrument panel The increase in gloss may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions Wood Panels Use a clean cloth moistened in warm soapy water use mild dish washing soap Dry the wood immediately with a clean cloth Speaker Covers Vacuum around a speaker cover gently so tha
319. lert symbol may indicate that you are driving in conditions where Adaptive Cruise Control should not be used See Alerting the Driver in this section CAUTION Continued The Adaptive Cruise controls are located on the end of the multifunction lever CAUTION Continued e On slippery roads fast changes in tire traction can cause needless wheel spinning and you could lose control Do not use cruise control on slippery roads When weather limits visibility such as when in fog rain or snow conditions Adaptive Cruise Control performance is limited There may not be enough distance to adapt to the changing traffic conditions Do not use cruise control when visibility O Off This position turns the system off is low On This position turns the system on Resume increase Push the switch to this symbol to make the vehicle resume to a previously set speed or to increase the set speed when Adaptive Cruise Control is already active w Set Decrease Press this button to set the speed or to decrease the set speed when Adaptive Cruise Control is already active 3 21 Engaging Adaptive Cruise Control With the Set Button A CAUTION If you leave your Adaptive Cruise Control switch on when you are not using cruise you might hit a button and go into cruise when you do not want to You could be startled and even lose control Keep the Adaptive Cruise Control switch off until you want to use cruise
320. les first sold in Canada substitute the name General Motors of Canada Limited for Cadillac Motor Car Division whenever it appears in this manual Keep this manual in the vehicle so it will be there if it is needed while you are on the road If the vehicle is sold leave this manual in the vehicle Litho in U S A Part No O6STS A First Printing Canadian Owners A French language copy of this manual can be obtained from your dealer or from Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 How to Use This Manual Many people read the owner manual from beginning to end when they first receive their new vehicle If this is done it can help you learn about the features and controls for the vehicle Pictures and words work together in the owner manual to explain things Index A good place to quickly locate information about the vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the page number where it can be found 2005 General Motors Corporation All Rights Reserved Safety Warnings and Symbols There are a number of safety cautions in this book We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning A CAUTION These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people In the caution area we tell you what the hazard is Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard P
321. limit wheel spin especially in slippery road conditions you should always leave the system on But you can turn the traction control system off if you ever need to Notice Do not repeatedly brake or accelerate heavily when the TCS is off You could damage your vehicle s driveline When the TCS is switched off on AWD and STS V vehicles you may still feel the system working This is normal and necessary with the AWD hardware on your vehicle You should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand mud or snow and rocking the vehicle is required See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4 32 and lf Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 4 31 for more information See also Winter Driving on page 4 27 for information on using TCS when driving in snowy or icy conditions TC If you press the TC button once the traction control system will turn off and the traction control system warning light will come on Press the TC button again to turn the system back on If you press and hold the TC button for five seconds the StabiliTrak system and the traction control system will turn off Press the TC button again to turn StabiliTrak back on For more information see StabiliTrak System on page 4 11 To turn the system off press the TC traction control button located near the shift lever Adding non GM accessories can affect your vehicle s performance See Accessories and Modifications
322. lowing will occur Description English _ Metric Amber light Amber amber lights Amber amber red lights amp Amber amber red lights flashing amp continuous chime A chime will sound the first time an object is detected between 20 inches 0 5 m and 5 feet 1 5 m away URPA cannot detect objects that are above trunk level In order for the rear sensors to recognize an object it must be within detection range behind the vehicle When the System Does Not Seem to Work Properly The light may flash red when the vehicle is in REVERSE R if the ultrasonic sensors are not kept clean So be sure to keep your rear bumper free of mud dirt snow ice and slush Other conditions that may affect system performance include things like the vibrations from a jackhammer or the compression of air brakes on a very large truck If after cleaning the rear bumper and then driving forward at least 15 mph 25 km h the display continues to flash red see your dealer If a trailer was attached to your vehicle or a bicycle or an object was hanging out of your trunk during your last drive cycle the light may also flash red The light will continue to flash whenever in REVERSE R until your vehicle is driven forward at least 15 mph 25 km h without any obstructions behind the vehicle For cleaning instructions see Washing Your Vehicle on page 5 98 3 45 Accessory Power Outlet s Your vehicle is equipped with accessory po
323. lts and other fasteners English and metric fasteners can be easily confused If you use the wrong fasteners parts can later break or fall off You could be hurt If you want to do some of your own service work you will want to use the proper service manual It tells you much more about how to service your vehicle than this manual can To order the proper service manual see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7 14 Your vehicle has an airbag system Before attempting to do your own service work see Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 62 You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform See Maintenance Record on page 6 16 Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can affect the airflow around it This may cause wind noise and affect windshield washer performance Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle Fuel The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number VIN shows the code letter or number that identifies your engine You will find the VIN at the top left of the instrument panel See Vehicle Identification Number VIN on page 5 103 Gasoline Octane If your vehicle has the 3 6L V6 engine VIN Code 7 use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 87 or higher For best performance or trailer towing you ma
324. mature durability corrosion problems and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty and any vehicle failure related to such parts are not covered by that warranty Repair Facility GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair facility that meets your needs before you ever need collision repairs Your GM dealer may have a collision repair center with GM trained technicians and state of the art equipment or be able to recommend a collision repair center that has GM trained technicians and comparable equipment Insuring Your Vehicle Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with comprehensive and collision insurance coverage There are significant differences in the quality of coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs by using aftermarket collision parts Some insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision parts When purchasing insurance we recommend that you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original equipment collision parts If such insurance coverage is not available from your current insurance carrier consider switching to another insurance carrier If your vehicle is leased the leasing company may require you to have insurance that assures repairs with Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufa
325. mergency Trunk Release Handle following Emergency Trunk Release Handle Notice Do not use the emergency trunk release handle as a tie down or anchor point when securing items in the trunk as it could damage the handle The emergency trunk release handle is only intended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk enabling them to open the trunk from the inside There is a glow in the dark trunk release handle located inside the trunk near the back of the rear seats This handle will glow following exposure to light Pull down the release handle to open the trunk from the inside of the vehicle Windows A CAUTION Leaving children helpless adults or pets in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous They can be overcome by the extreme heat and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Never leave a child a helpless adult or a pet alone in a vehicle especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather 2 17 Power Windows The power window switches are located on the armrest near each window Press the front of the switch to the first position to open the window to the desired level Lift up the front of the switch to the first position to close the window Your vehicle has Retained Accessory Power RAP that allows you to use the power windows once the engine has been turned off For more information see Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 2 25 Express Down Windo
326. mmed exit position for the steering column when the vehicle is off the shift lever is in PARK P and the driver s door is opened Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory it was programmed to Mode 2 The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory To program the vehicle to a different mode use the following procedure 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until AUTO EXIT COLUMN is highlighted 3 Press the tune select knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear in the box next to the feature name The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle 2 59 LIGHTS FLASH AT UNLOCK This feature allows the exterior lamps to flash when the keyless access transmitter is used to unlock the vehicle All doors must be closed for this feature to work and the lamps will not flash if the parking lamps or headlamps are on If LIGHTS FLASH AT UNLOCK is turned on and either KEYLESS FT DOOR UNLOCK or KEYLESS DOORS UNLOCK is turned on the exterior lamps will flash when the doors are passively unlocked See KEYLESS FT Front
327. mming the remaining configurable keys The configurable keys can be changed at any time Navigation Radio System Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system The navigation system has built in features intended to minimize driver distraction Technology alone no matter how advanced can never replace your own judgment See the navigation system manual for some tips to help you reduce distractions while driving Radio Personalization Accessing the Radio s Main Menu Base Audio System There are two different procedures for accessing the radio s main menu depending upon whether or not your vehicle has the Navigation system To access the main menu of the radio do one of the following e Using the Base audio system press the CNFG button located on the radio or press the tune select knob located on the right side of the radio Then turn the tune select knob clockwise or counterclockwise to scroll through the menu items e If your vehicle has the Navigation system see the Navigation System manual supplied with your vehicle for more information on accessing the main menu and for descriptions of the menu items for the Navigation system 3 115 The main menu for the Base audio system consists of the following menu items 2 BASS MID TREBLE BALANCE FADER a EQ EQUALIZER H A HOME AWAY PRESETS AUTOSTORE PRESETS CAT CATEGORY TA TRAFFIC ANNOUNCE RECALL RDS Radio Data System MESSAGE AF ALTERNATE FREQ
328. mple if the tire size aspect ratio is 60 as shown in item C of the illustration it would mean that the tire s sidewall is 60 percent as high as it is wide D Construction Code A letter code is used to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire The letter R means radial ply construction the letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction and the letter B means belted bias ply construction E Rim Diameter Diameter of the wheel in inches F Service Description These characters represent the load range and speed rating of the tire The load index represents the load carry capacity a tire is certified to carry The load index can range from 1 to 279 The speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load Speed ratings range from A to Z Tire Terminology and Definitions Air Pressure The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascal kPa Accessory Weight This means the combined weight of optional accessories Some examples of optional accessories are automatic transmission power steering power brakes power windows power seats and air conditioning Aspect Ratio The relationship of a tire s height to its width 5 61 Belt A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials Bead Th
329. mple remote start settings See Vehicle Personalization on page 2 53 2 70 For vehicles with the base audio system memory features are programmed and recalled through the radio from the DRIVER SELECTION and the DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS submenus See Entering the Driver Selection Submenu and Entering the Driver Exit Settings Submenu later in this section for more information on recalling and programming the memory settings using the base audio system For vehicles with the Navigation system memory features are programmed and recalled through the navigation display See Personalization in the Index of the Navigation System manual for more information on programming and recalling the memory settings using the Navigation system For vehicles with the Navigation system you can also recall the memory features by using voice recognition if your vehicle has this feature See Voice Recognition in the Index of the Navigation System manual for more information Entering the Driver Selection Submenu To enter the memory programming mode for your driver settings use the following procedure 1 Be sure the ignition is either on in ACC position or in RAP and place the transmission in PARK P or the vehicle speed is less than 6 mph 9 km h 2 Press any button on the appropriate keyless access transmitter to identify yourself as Driver 1 or Driver 2 3 Turn on the radio by pressing the power volume knob 4 Pre
330. n tire failure You could have a crash and you or others could be killed Some high speed rated tires require inflation pressure adjustment for high speed operation When speed limits and road conditions are such that a vehicle can be driven at high speeds make sure the tires are rated for high speed operation in excellent condition and set to the correct cold tire inflation pressure for the vehicle load If you will be driving at high speeds speeds of 100 mph 160 km h or higher where it is legal set the cold inflation pressure to the maximum inflation pressure shown on the tire sidewall or 38 psi 265 kPa whichever is lower See the example following When you end this high speed driving return the tires to the cold inflation pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 32 Example You will find the maximum load and inflation pressure molded on the tire s sidewall in small letters near the rim flange It will read something like this Maximum load 690 kg 1521 Ibs 300 kPa 44 psi Max Press For this example you would set the inflation pressure for high speed driving at 38 psi 265 kPa Tire Pressure Monitor System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses radio and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels If your vehicle has this feature sensors are mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly except the compact spare tire and wheel Tire pressure
331. n a problem with the panic brake assist system has been detected Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer SERVICE RADAR CRUISE When this message displays it means that the Adaptive Cruise Control system is disabled and needs service See your GM dealer SERVICE STABILITY SYS System Your vehicle may have a vehicle stability enhancement system called StabiliTrak See StabiliTrak System on page 4 11 The SERVICE STABILITY SYS message will display if there has been a problem detected with StabiliTrak If the SERVICE STABILITY SYS message comes on while you are driving pull off the road as soon as possible and stop carefully Try resetting the system by turning the ignition off then back on If the SERVICE STABILITY SYS message still stays on or comes back on again while you are driving your vehicle needs service Have the StabiliTrak System inspected by your GM dealer as soon as possible SERVICE STEERING SYS System Your vehicle may have a speed variable assist steering system See Steering on page 4 12 The SERVICE STEERING SYS message will display if a problem is detected with the speed variable assist steering system When this message is displayed you may notice that the effort required to steer the vehicle increases or feels heavier but you will still be able to steer the vehicle SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS System This message will display when the suspension system is not operating properly Ha
332. n have a serious or even fatal collision if you drive after drinking Please do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking Ride home ina cab or if you are with a group designate a driver who will not drink Control of a Vehicle You have three systems that make your vehicle go where you want it to go They are the brakes the steering and the accelerator All three systems have to do their work at the places where the tires meet the road Sometimes as when you are driving on snow or ice it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide That means you can lose control of your vehicle See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 9 and StabiliTrak System on page 4 11 Adding non GM accessories can affect your vehicle s performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 Braking See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 64 Braking action involves perception time and reaction time First you have to decide to push on the brake pedal That is perception time Then you have to bring up your foot and do it That is reaction time Average reaction time is about three fourths of a second But that is only an average It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another Age physical condition alertness coordination and eyesight all play a part So do alcohol drugs and frustration But even in three fourths o
333. n sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly Do no have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving Head Restraints The front and rear head restraints lock into place when raised To release the head restraint and lower it press the tab located at the base of the restraint The front head restraints also tilt forward and rearward Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top of your head This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash 1 6 Rear Seats Heated Seats Your vehicle may have this feature The buttons used to control the heated rear seats are located on the back of the center console The engine must be running for the heated seat feature to work 4 Heated Seat and Seatback Press this button to turn the heated seat feature on When you press the button the feature will turn on at the highest setting Each time you press the button the feature will go down one temperature setting A light next to the button will indicate the setting 3 is the highest 1 is the lowest To turn the feature off keep pressing the button until the indicator light goes off The heated rear seats will shut off automatically when the ignition is turned off Rear Seat Pass Through Door Your vehicle has a pass through door that provides access to the trunk from the rear seats See Rear Seat Pass Through Door under Trunk on page 2 14
334. n the placement of A CAUTION wheel blocks Changing a tire can be dangerous The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or other people You and they could be badly injured or even killed Find a level place to change your tire To help prevent the vehicle gt tromi moving S Set the parking brake firmly Put the shift lever in PARK P Turn off the engine and do not restart while the vehicle is raised Do not allow passengers to remain in the vehicle To be even more certain the vehicle will not The following information will tell you next how to use move you should put blocks at the front the jack and change a tire and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed That would be the tire on the other side at the opposite end of the vehicle 5 84 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools STS Only The equipment you will need is located in the trunk To gain access to the compact spare tire and jacking equipment do the following 1 Open the trunk See Trunk on page 2 14 for more information 2 Remove the compact spare tire cover 3 Turn the nut holding the jack counterclockwise and remove it Then remove the jack and wheel wrench 4 Remove the compact spare tire See Compact Spare Tire STS Only on page 5 93 for more information about the compact spare tire The tools you will be using include the jack A and the wheel wrench B
335. n though the passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the passenger s frontal airbag if the system detects a rear facing child restraint no system is fail safe and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off We recommend that rear facing child restraints be secured in the rear seat even if the airbag is off If you need to secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat position move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward facing child restraint See Power Seats on page 1 2 If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH system see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 37 1 45 There is no top tether anchor in the right front passenger s position Do not secure a child seat in this position if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be anchored See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 37 if your child restraint has a top tether You will be using the lap shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say 1 Your vehicle has a right front passenger s frontal airbag See Passenger Sensing Syst
336. n to its original position The delay prevents movement of the mirror if multiple gear transitions REVERSE R to AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE D to REVERSE R occur during a parallel parking maneuver OnStar System OnStar uses global positioning system GPS satellite technology wireless communications and live advisors to provide you with a wide range of safety security information and convenience services If your airbags deploy the system is designed to make an automatic call to OnStar Emergency where we can request emergency services be sent to your location If you lock your keys in the car call OnStar at 1 888 4 ONSTAR and they can send a signal to unlock your doors if you need roadside assistance press the OnStar button and they will get you the help you need A complete OnStar User s Guide and the Terms and Conditions of the OnStar Subscription Service Agreement are included in the vehicle s glove box literature For more information visit www onstar com or www onstar ca Contact OnStar at 1 888 4 ONSTAR 1 888 466 7827 or press the OnStar button to speak to an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day 7 days a week Terms and conditions of the Subscription Service Agreement can be found at www onstar com or www onstar ca OnStar Services The Directions and Connections Plan is included on new vehicles for the first year from the date of purchase You can extend this plan beyond the first year to mee
337. n to the original station when the announcement is finished ALERT will not be affected by tests of the emergency broadcast system This feature is not supported by all RDS stations MSG Message If the current RDS station has a message MSG will appear on the display The message may display the artist song title call in phone numbers etc If the entire message does not appear on the display parts of the message will appear every three seconds until the message is completed Once the completed message has been displayed MSG will disappear from the display until another new message is received To display the last message perform the following steps 1 Press the tune select knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until RECALL RDS MESSAGE appears on the display 3 Press the tune select knob The message will appear on the display Once the message has been displayed MSG will disappear from the display until another new message is received TP Traffic Program TP will appear on the display when the radio detects a signal from an RDS station that has traffic announcement broadcast capability TA Traffic Announcement If TA appears on the display the tuned radio station broadcasts traffic announcements and when a traffic announcement comes on the tuned station you will hear it If the station does not broadcast traffic announcements when TA is turned on it will seek to a station that does W
338. nben ii Panic Brake ASSIST erecciones 4 12 Parade DIMMING vicssccicchcces oridi manesr eigalo 3 39 Park AIG ceneni nna peonon e ieaie 3 44 Park P SMN seanma EEEE 2 36 Shifting QUT Of oiciss cishesceencauencemenieneateanceceyececta 2 38 Parking SSIS erori sete ce Biees Mages Pos anir atii dese 3 44 Brake seren T lacy A OA AEE 2 35 Over Things That Burn cceeeeeeeeeeeeee tenes 2 38 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 05 3 61 Passenger Compartment Air Filter 005 3 55 Passenger Sensing System ceeeeeeeeeneee ees 1 58 PASSING gestoei a A N 4 15 Power Accessory Outlet S ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee renee 3 46 Door LOCKS korcs enan oE TE 2 12 Electrical System cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee teens 5 105 Inadvertent Battery Saver ccceeeeeeeeneee ees 3 40 Lumbar Controls siiis nania eiia aia EEE 1 2 Reclining Seatback ccceeeeeeeeeeeee een eeeeenes 1 5 Retained Accessory RAP lcc 2 25 SOON E A T E T T 1 2 Steering Fluid ctv seectinsezedisedeseerreeie 5 40 Power cont Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering Column 3 6 WINGOWS cite ocdsetneesti cased hueeeten erste teeaeess 2 18 Pretensioners Safety Belt ceeseeeeeeeeeeee 1 25 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 13 Questions and Answers About Safety Belts 1 12 R dios ecien aai a E da S ie 3 94 Care of Your CD Player a se 3 122 Care of Your CDS a siciuivacusn
339. ndicators will not flash and the horn will not sound when pressing the lock button on the keyless access transmitter For more information see Lights Flash at Lock and Horn Chirps at Lock under Vehicle Personalization on page 2 53 Q Remote Start Pressing this button operates the remote start feature See Remote Vehicle Start at the end of this section for more detailed information m Unlock Press this button once to unlock the driver s door The turn signal indicators will flash twice Press the unlock button twice within five seconds to unlock all the doors If it is dark enough outside your interior lamps will come on You can program your vehicle so the turn signal indicators will not flash and the fog lamps and reverse lamps remain on steady for approximately 20 seconds when the keyless access transmitter is used to unlock the vehicle See Lights Flash at Lock and Ext Exterior Lights at Unlock under Vehicle Personalization on page 2 53 If your vehicle has the memory feature you can program and recall memory settings when you press the unlock button on the keyless access transmitter See Memory Seat Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 2 70 for more information a Trunk Press this button to open the trunk while the engine is turned off or the shift lever is in PARK P 2 Vehicle Locator Panic Alarm Press and release this button to locate your vehicle The horn will chirp three tim
340. ned The display will not show parts of words on the last page of text and the extension of the filename will not be displayed Preprogrammed Playlists You can access preprogrammed playlists which were created by WinAmp MusicMatch or Real Jukebox software however you will not have editing capability These playlists will be treated as special folders containing compressed audio song files Playing an MP3 Insert a CD partway into the slot label side up The player will pull it in and LOADING CD will appear on the display The CD should begin playing and the CD symbol will appear on the display If the ignition and the radio are on the CD will begin playing A CD may be loaded with the radio off but it will not start playing until the radio is on If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the player it will stay in the player When the ignition or radio is turned on the CD will start to play where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source As each new track starts to play the track number will appear on the display The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch 8 cm single CDs with an adapter ring Full size CDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner If playing a CD R the sound quality may be reduced due to CD R quality the method of recording the quality of the music that has been recorded and the way the CD R has been handled There may be an increase in skipping difficulty
341. nformation Application English Cooling System 3 6L V6 4 4L V8 V Series 4 6L V8 Intercooler System 4 4L Engine Engine Oil with Filter 3 6L V6 4 4L V8 V Series 4 6L V8 Fuel Tank Transmission 5 Speed Automatic 6 Speed Automatic V Series Wheel Nut Torque All capacities are approximate When adding be sure to fill to the approximate level as recommended in this manual Recheck the fluid level after filling 5 116 Engine Specifications OO Enge ViNCode Spark Plug Gap 3 6L HFV6 0 044 inches 1 1 mm ZAL DOHC Ve V Series 0 Auomais 0 040 inches 1 0 mm 4 6L DOHC V8 0 040 inches 1 0 mm STS V Engine Data Engine Horsepower Torque Displacement Compression Ratio 440 hp 328 kW 430 lb ft 583 Nm 4 4L V8 LC3 5406 fork 3600 rpm 4 4L 9 0 1 5 117 4 NOTES 5 118 Section 6 Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Schedule 0 ceeeeeeeeneees 6 2 Owner Checks and Services 6 8 IMMOCUCHION Seo s05 ica oeewpnereeteddacmdhael sibdeues dan sek deacons 6 2 At Each Fuel Pill cncc cccccteadessag etedioe cdietestieaders 6 9 Maintenance Requirements seeeeeeeee ee 6 2 At Least Once a Month ceeeeeeeeeeeeeee trees 6 9 Your Vehicle and the Environment 6 2 At Least Once a Year aseeseen 6 10 Using the Maintenance Schedule 0 6 2 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 6 12 Scheduled Maintenance
342. ng on page 5 31 and Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5 32 A chime will also sound when this message is displayed ENGINE POWER REDUCED This message informs you that the engine power is being reduced to protect the engine from damage There could be several malfunctions that might cause this message Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer as soon as possible FUEL LEVEL LOW This symbol appears with the FUEL LEVEL LOW message When this message displays it means that your vehicle is low on fuel You should refill the tank as soon as possible A single chime will sound when this message is displayed HOOD AJAR This symbol appears with the HOOD AJAR message When this message displays it means that the hood was not closed completely You should make sure that the hood is completely closed ICE POSSIBLE This message will display when the outside temperature is cold enough to create icy road conditions KEY FOB BATTERY LOW When this message displays it means that the battery in your keyless access transmitter is low Replace the battery in the transmitter See Battery Replacement under Keyless Access System Operation on page 2 5 LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR This symbol appears with the LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR message When this message displays it means that the driver s side rear door was not closed completely You should make sure that the door is closed completely 3 85 NO FOB
343. ng Mode STS V 00 4 10 Magnetic Ride Control c eceeeeeeeeeeeee eres 4 11 Limited Slip Rear Axle seeen 4 11 StabiliTrak System sissien is eriarsti 4 11 Panic Brake ASSISt 1 c ccesiseseeceestceeseeeneecees 4 12 All Wheel Drive AWD System n 4 12 SEGNO oigeir acs Land sheds seen sees vie EEEE 4 12 Off Road Recovery ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eee tenes 4 15 Passing rnani vekdendar ctdvnedt abate 4 15 Loss Of Control astina annuns nn aa nna 4 17 Driving Your Vehicle Competitive Driving ccceeeeeeeeneee teeter tenes 4 18 Driving at Night cocci csel acs deucencs bee bencteedien se 4 18 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads 4 20 City Driving cicdncds iceatinedtcasuentawtadentsmecesnand atcied 4 22 Freeway Driving eiieeii eects eesti Aa eee 4 23 Before Leaving on a Long Trip 0e 4 24 Highway Hypnosis ccceeeeeeeeeeeee tent eeeees 4 25 Hill and Mountain Roads seeeeeeeeee eee 4 25 Winter Diving spomenico iira eenia 4 27 If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud IGG OF SNOW oe ese cack acaencimanehateeAstetrabinnaene 4 31 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out 4 32 Loading Your Vehicle eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 4 32 TOWING coiis nnttecdiecdise ei deeacsdse edhe E enters 4 37 Towing Your Vehicle c eceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 37 Recreational Vehicle Towing eeeeeeeeee 4 38 Towing a Tr
344. ng or Speech Impaired Roadside Service is prepared to assist owners who have hearing difficulties or are speech impaired Cadillac has installed special telecommunication devices called Text Telephone TTY in the Roadside Service Center Any customer who has access to a TTY ora conventional teletypewriter can communicate with Cadillac by dialing from the United States or Canada 1 888 889 2438 daily 24 hours Courtesy Transportation To enhance your ownership experience we and our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation a customer support program for new vehicles The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to customers in conjunction with the Bumper to Bumper coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Several transportation options are available when warranty repairs are required This will reduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs Scheduling Service Appointments When your vehicle requires warranty service you should contact your dealer and request an appointment By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service unless of course the problem is safety related If it is please call your dealership let them know this and ask for instruc
345. nsvesnecienlsancntndscecenaeeeenneend 3 59 Safety Belt Reminder Light eeeeeee 3 59 3 1 Section 3 Instrument Panel Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light 3 60 Driver Information Center DIC 3 73 Airbag Readiness Light cceeeeeeeeeeeeee es 3 60 DIC Controls and Displays eeeeeeeeee eee 3 74 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 3 61 DIC Warnings and Messages 0eseeeeeeeees 3 79 Charging System Light eeeeeeeeeeeee eee 3 63 Other Messages ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeaes 3 93 Brake System Warning Light eeee 3 64 i 5 Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light ee a Low Tire Pressure Warning Light 3 65 Radio with CD catelacctelacctesacscmectnssceiaeses 3 96 Traction Control System TCS Navigation Radio System e sesseserserrererne 3 115 Warning Light _ 1 cee ee esas 3 66 Radio Personalization 0 0 0 0 ee 3 115 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light 3 66 Theft Deterrent Feature cceeeeeeeeee 3 119 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage 3 67 Audio Steering Wheel Controls 00c0c0e 3 119 Malfunction Indicator Lamp s eee 3 67 Radio Reception scsveisssaccdncecsiaeiceciarensentesues 3 120 Qil PreSSUre Hight cs3ciciicelse st waneue ce nnataciuitdeuanetings 3 70 Care of Your CDS cocccccccccccccecccccceecccccseeecceees 3 121
346. ntil PRESETS HOME AWAY appears on the display 3 Press the tune select knob to select HOME or AWAY will appear on the display 4 Press the BACK F6 button to exit the display To return to the original display repeatedly press the BACK F6 button or wait for the display to time out Follow the manual or automatic steps previously listed for setting the preset pushbuttons for both home and away Setting the Tone Bass Treble To adjust the bass midrange and treble perform the following steps 1 Press the tune select knob to enter the main menu 2 Press the tune select knob to scroll through the settings 3 Turn the tune select knob to increase or to decrease the bass midrange or treble If a station is weak or noisy decrease the treble 4 Press the tune select knob to set the adjustment 5 Press the BACK F6 button to exit the display To return to the original display repeatedly press the BACK F6 button or wait for the display to time out 3 99 AUDIO EQUALIZER This feature allows you to select customized equalization settings To choose an equalization setting EQO through EQ5 perform the following steps 1 Press the tune select knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until EQUALIZER appears on the display 3 Press the tune select knob to set the equalization setting The equalization setting will appear on the display 4 Press the BACK F6 button to exit the display To
347. o change then press the tune select knob to turn the feature on or off 2 54 Personal Settings Menu Items The PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU must be selected with a check mark to program the personalization features If it is not selected press the tune select knob until the check mark appears If it is selected the entire list of features will be available to program DRIVER GREETING This feature allows you to type in a customized name or greeting that will appear on the display whenever the corresponding keyless access transmitter 1 or 2 is used or Driver 1 or Driver 2 is selected on the radio display If a customized name or greeting is not programmed the system will show Driver 1 or Driver 2 to correspond with the numbers on the back of the keyless access transmitters In this case the customized driver greeting feature is factory shipped as off To turn the driver greeting feature on and to program a customized name or greeting use the following procedure 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until DRIVER GREETING is highlighted Press the tune select knob to turn on the DRIVER GREETING feature You will see a cursor on the screen Turn the tune select knob until you reach the first letter you want the letter will be highlighted There is a complete alphabet with both upper and lower ca
348. o go to the next or the previous radio station and stay there The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band When a CD is playing press the minus sign to go to the start of the current track if more than 10 seconds have played Press the plus sign to go to the next track If either the minus or the plus button are pressed more than once the player will continue moving backward or forward through the CD Press and hold the SEEK plus or minus button until you hear a beep The CD will fast forward or fast reverse through the CD Press either button again to play the passage If you have the navigation system some of the audio steering wheel controls work when a DVD is playing in the navigation radio See the Navigation System manual for more information Radio Reception You may experience frequency interference and static during normal radio reception if items such as cellphone chargers vehicle convenience accessories and external electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power outlet If there is interference or static unplug the item from the accessory power outlet AM The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM especially at night The longer range can cause station frequencies to interfere with each other For better radio reception most AM radio stations will boost the power levels during the day and then reduce these levels during the night Static can al
349. o lock the driver s door e The drivers door is locked using the power door lock switch after the doors are closed If the vehicle is locked using the keyless access transmitter and the trunk lid hood or a door is open or not closed completely the security light will flash for 60 seconds and then turn off At this time the theft deterrent system is armed but the alarm will not sound if the trunk lid hood or door that was not closed completely is tampered with or opened The alarm will sound for the trunk lid hood or a door that was completely closed at the time the vehicle was locked using the keyless access transmitter 2 22 The vehicle can be programmed to automatically unlock the doors and disarm the theft deterrent system when you approach the vehicle and the keyless access transmitter is with you See Vehicle Personalization on page 2 53 Pressing the unlock button on the keyless access transmitter or using the key to unlock the driver s door disarms the theft deterrent system Unlocking a door any other way while the system is armed will activate the alarm Testing the Alarm 1 From inside the vehicle roll down the window then get out of the vehicle keeping the door open 2 From outside of the vehicle with the door open lock the vehicle using the power door lock switch or the keyless access transmitter and close the door Wait approximately 30 seconds until the security light goes off 3 Reach in and open
350. o not go over the GVW limit for your vehicle including the weight of the trailer tongue Hitches It is important to have the correct hitch equipment Crosswinds large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why you will need the right hitch Here are some rules to follow The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended for hitches Do not attach rental hitches or other bumper type hitches to it Use only a frame mounted hitch that does not attach to the bumper e Will you have to make any holes in the body of your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch If you do then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the hitch If you do not seal them deadly carbon monoxide CO from your exhaust can get into your vehicle See Engine Exhaust on page 2 39 Dirt and water can too Trailer Brakes Because you have anti lock brakes do not try to tap into your vehicle s hydraulic brake system If you do both brake systems will not work well or at all Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you will be able to maintain them properly Driving with a Trailer Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience Before setting out for the open road you will want to get to know your rig Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
351. oard Diagnostics Second Generation and is intended to assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle helping to produce a cleaner environment The Check Engine light comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service is required Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent This may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction Notice f you keep driving your vehicle with this light on after awhile your emission controls may not work as well your fuel economy may not be as good and your engine may not run as smoothly This could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered by your warranty 3 67 Notice Modifications made to the engine transmission exhaust intake or fuel system of your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria TPC can affect your vehicle s emission controls and may cause this light to come on Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by your warranty This may also result in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection Maintenance test See Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 This light should come on briefly as a check to show you it is working as you start the engine If the light does not come on have it repaired Thi
352. ob to select either LOCAL or DISTANT 4 Press the BACK F6 button to exit the display To return to the original display repeatedly press the BACK F6 button or wait for the display to time out To search for stations press the single arrow buttons If the system is set to LOCAL SEEK will appear on the display and seek to stations with strong signals only If the system is set to DISTANT D SEEK will appear on the display and seek to stations with weak and strong signals Setting Preset Stations Up to 30 stations six FM1 six FM2 and six AM six XM1 and six XM2 if equipped can be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons by performing the following steps 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press BAND to select FM1 FM2 or AM or XM1 or XM2 3 98 3 Tune in the desired station 4 Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons for two seconds until you hear a beep The set preset station number will appear on the display above the pushbutton that it is set to Whenever that numbered pushbutton is pressed for less than two seconds the station that was set will return 5 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton To set the preset stations with an equalization setting DSP setting or a PTY setting see each of these features later in this section When a preset station is selected once one of these additional settings is selected the preset station will remember each setting and it will remain active until the settin
353. ock cover Then lift the cover off POST 02 Oxygen Sensor Fuses Usage COMP CLTCH Air Conditioner Compressor Clutch BLOWER Blower Motor STARTER Starter Solenoid R REAR Passenger s Side Rear Fuse Block Anti lock Brake Pump I P OUTLET Front Accessory Power Outlet L REAR Driver s Side Rear Fuse Block BODY W H Body Wiring Harness Rain Sensor Headlamp Washer RAIN SSR Tire Pressure Monitor Climate Control SMT BM OPT Intellibeam Relay Option Low Beam Relay High Beam Relay EXT LIGHTS Park Lamp Relay VOLT CHECK Instrument Panel Module CCP Climate Control Headlamp Leveling PRE 02 CAM Oxygen Sensor Camshaft Phasers ENG W H Engine Wiring Harness R REAR Passenger s Side Rear Fuse Block WPR SW Wiper Washer Switch BODY W H Body Wiring Harness FOG LAMP Fog Lamps OUTLET Rear Accessory Power Outlet 5 107 ECM TCM Engine Control Module Odd Ignition Coils Odd Transmission Control Module ODD COILS Fuel Injectors ot Ot ect aranan Transmission Control Module Panel Clust ANg MUSIET TCM IPG Instrument Panel Engine Control LT PARK Mass Air Flow Sensor Driver s Side Park Lamp Drivers i Side Taillamp p HIGH FAN Cooling Fan High Speed License Plate Instrument LOW FAN Cooling Fan Low Speed LIC DIMMING Panel Dimming RT PARK Passenger s Side Park Lamp IPM ALDL Instrument Panel Module Assembly Right Taillamp Line Data Link Connector HORN 7 Sco LT HI BEAM Driver s Side Headlamp
354. odify change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data Recorders Your vehicle like other modern motor vehicles has a number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor and control several aspects of the vehicle s performance Your vehicle uses on board vehicle computers to monitor emission control components to optimize fuel economy to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and if so equipped to provide anti lock braking and to help the driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations Some information may be stored during regular operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions other information is stored only in a crash event by computer systems such as those commonly called event data recorders EDR In a crash event computer systems such as the Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module SDM in your vehicle may record information about the condition of the vehicle and how it was operated such as data related to engine speed brake application throttle position vehicle speed safety belt usage airbag readiness airbag performance and the severity of a collision If your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak steering performance including yaw rate steering wheel angle and lateral acceleration is also recorded This inform
355. of the road Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane e As you go over the top of a hill be alert There could be something in your lane like a stalled car or an accident e You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of special problems Examples are long grades passing or no passing zones a falling rocks area or winding roads Be alert to these and take appropriate action Winter Driving Here are some tips for winter driving e Have your vehicle in good shape for winter e You may want to put winter emergency supplies in your trunk Also see Tires on page 5 57 Include an ice scraper a small brush or broom a supply of windshield washer fluid a rag some winter outer clothing a small shovel a flashlight a red cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles And if you will be driving under severe conditions include a small bag of sand a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle 4 27 Driving on Snow or Ice Most of the time those places where the tires meet the road probably have good traction However if there is snow or ice between the tires and the road you can have a very slippery situation You will have a lot less traction or grip and will need to be very careful What is the worst time for this Wet ice Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on But wet ice can b
356. of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of your vehicle Do not use strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes abrasive cleaners cleaners with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could damage the surface Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels 5 99 Notice Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels could damage the wheels The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only Use chrome polish only on chrome plated wheels but avoid any painted surface of the wheel and buff off immediately after application Notice If you drive your vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes you could damage the aluminum or chrome plated wheels The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminum or chrome plated wheels through an automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes These brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels 5 100 Tires To clean the tires use a stiff brush with tire cleaner Notice Using petroleum based tire dressing products on your vehicle may damage the paint finish and or tires When applying a tire dressing always wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on your vehicle Sheet Metal Damage If the vehicle is damage
357. ogram the next feature available on your vehicle KEYLESS LOCK DELAY This feature allows you to select whether the doors automatically lock when the ignition is turned off the keyless access transmitter has been removed from the interior of the vehicle and the doors have been closed for 10 seconds If a keyless access transmitter is left inside of the vehicle the doors will not lock Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory it was programmed to Mode 2 The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory To program the vehicle to a different mode use the following procedure 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until KEYLESS LOCK DELAY is highlighted 3 Press the tune select knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle FRONT PASS Passenger WINDOW LOCK This feature allows you to choose whether or not to have the front passenger window deactivated as part of the window lockout button If you would like the front passenger window to be
358. oid surface scratches and water spotting High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the vehicle Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses Use only lukewarm or cold water a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on page 5 98 5 98 Finish Care Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish GM approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer See Vehicle Care Appearance Materials on page 5 102 Notice Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat clearcoat paint finish may damage it Use only non abrasive waxes and polishes that are made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle The vehicle has a basecoat clearcoat paint finish The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat Always use waxes and polishes that are non abrasive and made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts ice melting agents road oil and tar tree sap bird droppings chemicals from industrial chimneys etc can damage the vehicle s finish if they remain on painted surfaces Wash the vehicle as soon as possible If necessary use non abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging weather and chemical f
359. oing its job have it repaired Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced Also look for any opened or broken airbag coverings and have them repaired or replaced The airbag system does not need regular maintenance f Lubricate all key lock cylinders Lubricate all hinges and latches including those for the hood rear compartment glove box door and console door More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environment Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak g If you drive regularly under dusty conditions the filter may require replacement more often h Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as limousine service Uses such as high performance operation j Drain flush and refill cooling system This service can be complex you should have your dealer perform this service See Engine Coolant on page 5 27 for what to use Inspect hoses Clean radiator condenser pressure cap and filler neck Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap k A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and
360. om the outside 2 Insert your key into the slot next to the rear door security lock label and turn it to disengage the lock 3 Repeat the steps for the other lock The rear door locks will now work normally Lockout Protection Your vehicle can be programmed to sound the horn three times and unlock the driver s door when all doors are closed and there is a keyless access transmitter inside the interior of the vehicle When the driver s door is reopened the key in reminder chime will sound continuously The vehicle will remain locked only when at least one transmitter has been removed from the vehicle and both doors are closed See Vehicle Personalization on page 2 53 Trunk A CAUTION It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid open because carbon monoxide CO gas can come into your vehicle You cannot see or smell CO It can cause unconsciousness and even death If you must drive with the trunk lid open or if electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and the trunk lid e Make sure all other windows are shut e Turn the fan on your heating or cooling system to its highest speed and select the control setting that will force outside air into your vehicle See Climate Control System If you have air outlets on or under the instrument panel open them all the way See Engine Exhaust on page 2 39 Trunk Lid Release There are several ways to release the trunk lid
361. ometer or odometer calibration headlamp aim bumper height vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis See Changing a Flat Tire STS Only on page 5 83 for more information Used Replacement Wheels A CAUTION Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is dangerous You cannot know how it has been used or how far it has been driven It could fail suddenly and cause a crash If you have to replace a wheel use a new GM original equipment wheel 5 77 Tire Chains A CAUTION If your vehicle has P255 45R17 P255 45R18 P275 40R19 or 255 45ZR18 size tires do not use tire chains as there is not enough clearance Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper amount of clearance can cause damage to the brakes suspension or other vehicle parts The area damaged by the tire chains could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and you or others may be injured in a crash Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on your vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions Follow that manufacturer s CAUTION Continued 5 78 CAUTION Continued instructions To help avoid damage to your vehicle drive slowly readjust or remove the device if it is contacting your vehicle and do not spin your vehicle s wheels If you do find traction devices that will fit install them on the rear tires only Notice lf your
362. omething inside the vehicle secure it whenever you can Automatic Level Control This feature keeps the rear of your vehicle level as the load changes It is automatic you do not need to adjust anything Towing Towing Your Vehicle Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed See Roadside Service on page 7 5 If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle for recreational purposes such as behind a motorhome see Recreational Vehicle Towing following 4 37 Recreational Vehicle Towing Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle behind another vehicle such as behind a motorhome The two most common types of recreational vehicle towing are known as dinghy towing towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground and dolly towing towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a device known as a dolly With the proper preparation and equipment many vehicles can be towed in these ways See Dinghy Towing and Dolly Towing following Here are some important things to consider before you do recreational vehicle towing e What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer s recommendations e How far will you tow Some vehicles have restrictions on how far and how long they can tow 4 38 e Do you have the proper towing equipment S
363. on e Vision e Attentiveness Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle related deaths involve alcohol In most cases these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving In recent years more than 16 000 annual motor vehicle related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol with more than 300 000 people injured Many adults by some estimates nearly half the adult population choose never to drink alcohol so they never drive after drinking For persons under 21 it is against the law in every U S state to drink alcohol There are good medical psychological and developmental reasons for these laws The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive But what if people do How much is too much if someone plans to drive It is a lot less than many might think Although it depends on each person and situation here is some general information on the problem The Blood Alcohol Concentration BAC of someone who is drinking depends upon four things e The amount of alcohol consumed e The drinker s body weight e The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking e The length of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol According to the American Medical Association a 180 lb 82 kg person who drinks three 12 ounce 355 ml bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC of about 0
364. on is about 15 inches 37 cm from the rear edge of the front wheel well 2 Be sure to place a block or pad between the jack and the vehicle 3 Lift the vehicle with the jack making sure the jack is centered on the front lifting point Lifting From the Rear The rear lifting points can be accessed from either side of your vehicle in front of the rear tires 1 Locate the rear lifting points using the diagram above The rear lifting location is about 7 inches 17 cm from the front edge of the rear wheel well 2 Be sure to place a block or pad between the jack and the vehicle 3 Lift the vehicle with the jack making sure the jack is centered on the rear lifting point See Doing Your Own Service Work on page 5 4 If a Tire Goes Flat It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving especially if you maintain your tires properly See Tires on page 5 57 lf air goes out of a tire It is much more likely to leak out slowly But if you should ever have a blowout here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do If a front tire fails the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly Steer to maintain lane position and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane A rear blowout particularly on a curve acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you would use in
365. on is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment If you ever notice a decrease in the keyless access transmitter range try doing one of the following e Check the distance You may be too far from your vehicle You may need to stand closer during rainy or snowy weather e Check the location Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal Take a few steps to the left or right hold the transmitter higher and try again e Check to determine if battery replacement is necessary See Battery Replacement under Keyless Access System Operation on page 2 5 e Check to make sure that an electronic device such as a cellular phone or lap top computer is not causing interference e If you are still having trouble see your dealer or a qualified technician for service Keyless Access System Operation Your vehicle has a Keyless Access System that lets y
366. onal computer and a description label is needed try labeling the top of the recorded CD with a soft marker instead Notice If you add any label to a CD insert more than one CD into the slot at a time or attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs you could damage the CD player When using the CD player use only CDs in good condition without any label load one CD at a time and keep the CD player and the loading slot free of foreign materials liquids and debris If an error appears on the display see CD Messages later in this section When a CD is inserted the CD functions will appear on the display above the pushbuttons in place of the preset stations if programmed Load Press this button to load CDs into the CD player This CD player will hold up to six CDs To insert one CD do the following 1 The ignition and the radio can be on or off 2 Press and release the load button Please Wait will appear on the display 3 Load the CD when INSERT appears on the display insert a CD partway into the slot label side up The player will pull the CD in When a CD is inserted CD will appear on the display the number of the CD and the track number will appear on the display if the radio is on If the radio is on the CD will begin to play automatically To insert multiple CDs do the following 1 The ignition and the radio can be on or off 2 Press and hold the load button for two seconds Please Wait w
367. onditions the engine oil life system may not indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over a year However your engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset Your GM Goodwrench dealer has GM trained service technicians who will perform this work using genuine GM parts and reset the system If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally you must service your vehicle within 3 000 miles 5 000 km since your last service Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed See Engine Oil Life System on page 5 24 for information on the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message appears certain services checks and inspections are required Required services are described in the following for Maintenance I and Maintenance II Generally it is recommended that your first service be Maintenance I your second service be Maintenance II and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter However in some cases Maintenance II may be required more often Maintenance I Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on within 10 months since the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was performed Maintenance II Use Maintenance II if the previous service performed was Maintenance I Always use Maintenance II whenever the message comes on 10 months or more sin
368. ong periods of time may cause the air inside your vehicle to become too dry or stuffy To prevent this from happening after the air in your vehicle has cooled select AUTO to return to automatic climate control operation or push the recirculation button again to select outside air Pressing this button a second time selects outside air ra Outside Air This mode forces the system to pull air from outside the vehicle It can be used to bring fresh air into the vehicle Air Quality Sensor Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional air quality sensor to help limit the climate control system from pulling in some harmful 3 50 exhaust fumes from older poorly running or diesel equipped vehicles that are driving near you This sensor when active will monitor the air quality in front of your vehicle and switch to air recirculation when poor quality air is detected outside your vehicle You can activate the air quality sensor on your vehicle if equipped by pressing the AUTO button on your climate control The word AUTO will be shown in the center of the climate control display under the outline shape of a vehicle When the air quality sensor senses poor quality air the recirculation graphic will be shown as long as the sensor senses poor quality air Under some conditions the air quality sensor system will not operate In cold weather the system may not be active even if the AUTO indication is displayed because of concerns of
369. oost engine oil temperature oil pressure and transmission fluid temperature See MPH km later in this section for more information on the digital speed display AB 7N_ 00 Trip Information Press the top of this button to scroll through the odometer trip odometer A and trip odometer B Press and hold the bottom of this button to reset each trip odometer back to zero 1 Reset Press this button to reset certain DIC features and to acknowledge DIC warning messages and clear them from the DIC display EM English Metric Press this button to change the display from English to metric DIC Buttons Uplevel If your vehicle has a HUD these are the buttons for your DIC E E Gi A iV Information Press the top or bottom of this button to scroll through the available vehicle information displays which include digital speed display if your vehicle has this feature fuel range fuel economy fuel used average speed timer battery voltage tire pressure if your vehicle has a tire pressure monitor TPM system engine oil life if your vehicle has this feature and display units See MPH km later in this section for more information on the digital speed display A V Head Up Display Press this button to change the position of the HUD on the windshield Press the top part of the button to move the HUD image up Press the bottom part of the button to move the HUD image down To adjust the brightness o
370. op or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine An electric fan under the hood can start up and injure you even when the engine is not running Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan Hood Release To open the hood do the following yn 1 a 1 Pull the hood release lever with this symbol on it It 2 Then go to the front of the vehicle and find the is located inside the vehicle on the lower left side of secondary hood release lever The lever is the instrument panel located under the front edge of the grille near the center Move the release lever to the side and raise the hood Before closing the hood be sure all the filler caps are on properly Then pull the hood down and close it firmly Engine Compartment Overview Your vehicle may be equipped with front compartment underhood sight shields which surround the vehicle s engine cover These sight shields will need to be removed in order to access some of the underhood components in your vehicle To remove the sight shields turn the fasteners on each shield to the left until they pop out Then remove the fasteners and lift the shields up and away from the tower to tower brace yz aps E N 3 6L V6 Engine After you have removed the sight shields if equipped on the 3 6L V6 engine here is what you will see A B Underhood Fuse Block See Unde
371. op and allow the vehicle to idle until it cools down See Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light on page 3 66 See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5 32 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency This symbol appears with the ENGINE COOLANT HOT IDLE ENGINE message 3 83 ENGINE HOT AC Air Conditioning OFF This message will display when the engine coolant becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3 67 To avoid added strain on a hot engine the air conditioning compressor is automatically turned off When the coolant temperature returns to normal the air conditioning compressor will turn back on You can continue to drive your vehicle If this message continues to appear have the system repaired by your GM dealer as soon as possible to avoid damage to your engine 3 84 ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE Notice f you drive your vehicle while the engine is overheating severe engine damage may occur If an overheat warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible Do not increase the engine speed above normal idling speed See Engine Overheating on page 5 31 for more information This message will display when the engine has overheated Immediately look for a safe place to pull your vehicle over and turn the engine off right away to avoid severe engine damage See Engine Overheati
372. ortable driving position If you change your seat position later you may have to re adjust your HUD 2 Start your engine and press the top or bottom of the HUD button to center the HUD image in your view The HUD image can only be adjusted up and down not side to side 3 Turn the knob on the DIC control panel to adjust the brightness of the HUD image The brightness of the HUD image is determined by the light conditions in the direction your vehicle is facing and where you have the HUD set If you are facing a dark object or a heavily shaded area your HUD may anticipate that you are entering a dark area and may begin to dim To turn the HUD image off turn the knob counter clockwise Polarized sunglasses could make the HUD image harder to see As light shines out from the HUD it is possible for light to shine back in In rare occurrences when the sun is at a specific angle and position the sun s rays can shine back into the HUD When this occurs the display device within the HUD will be temporarily illuminated The event will end when the vehicle s angle to the sun changes Clean the inside of the windshield as needed to remove any dirt or film that reduces the sharpness or clarity of the HUD image To clean the HUD spray household glass cleaner on a soft clean cloth Wipe the HUD lens gently then dry it Notice When cleaning be careful not to scratch the HUD or camera lenses Do not spray glass cleaner d
373. osition Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1 36 for additional information Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System Z CAUTION ZX CAUTION If a LATCH type child restraint is not attached to anchors the restraint will not be able to protect the child correctly In a crash the child could be seriously injured or killed Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in the vehicle is designed to hold only one child restraint Attaching more than one child restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or even break during a crash A child or others could be injured if this happens To help prevent injury to people and damage to your vehicle attach only one child restraint per anchor Make sure that a LATCH type child restraint is properly installed using the anchors or use the vehicle s safety belts to secure the restraint following the instructions that came with that restraint and also the instructions 1 Find the lower anchors if equipped for the desired in this manual seating position 2 If the desired seating position does not have lower anchors see Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position on page 1 43 for instructions on installing the child restraint using the safety belts 3 Put the child restraint on the seat 4 Attach and tighten the
374. otice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other the alignment may need to be checked If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road your tires and wheels may need to be rebalanced See your dealer for proper diagnosis Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent cracked or badly rusted or corroded If wheel nuts keep coming loose the wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced If the wheel leaks air replace it except some aluminum wheels which can sometimes be repaired See your dealer if any of these conditions exist Your dealer will Know the kind of wheel you need Each new wheel should have the same load carrying capacity diameter width offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces If you need to replace any of your wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts replace them only with new GM original equipment parts This way you will be sure to have the right wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle A CAUTION Using the wrong replacement wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle make your tires lose air and make you lose control You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured Always use the correct wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement Notice The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life brake cooling speed
375. ou lock and unlock your vehicle s doors open the trunk lid remotely start the engine and locate your vehicle or sound your vehicle s alarm from a distance as much as much as 30 feet 10 m away The Keyless Access System also lets you lock and unlock the vehicle s doors and access the trunk without removing the remote transmitter from your pocket purse briefcase etc The system operates when the transmitter is located within 3 feet 1 m of the door or trunk of your vehicle See Keyless Doors Unlock and Keyless Ft Front Door Unlock under Vehicle Personalization on page 2 53 Your vehicle comes with two transmitters o Lock Press this button to lock the doors The lock status light on the front doors will turn on for five seconds and the turn signal indicators will flash If this button is pressed twice the doors will lock the status light on the door will turn on for five seconds the turn signal indicators will flash twice and the horn will sound once If the engine is off the windows may be closed from outside the vehicle using the lock button on the keyless access transmitter Press and hold the lock button for more than two seconds to close any open window s on your vehicle If any window is unable to close completely it will reverse and the horn will chirp See Anti Pinch Feature under Power Windows on page 2 18 for more information You can program your vehicle so the turn signal i
376. ou can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle AUTO EXIT SEAT If your vehicle has the optional memory package you will have this feature When this feature is turned on you can recall any previously programmed exit position for the driver s seat when the vehicle is off the shift lever is in PARK P and the driver s door is opened Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory it was programmed to Mode 2 The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory To program the vehicle to a different mode use the following procedure 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until AUTO EXIT SEAT is highlighted 3 Press the tune select knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear in the box next to the feature name The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle AUTO EXIT COLUMN If your vehicle has the optional memory package you will have this feature When this feature is turned on you can recall any previously progra
377. ou turn off the cruise control or the ignition your cruise control set speed memory is erased Adaptive Cruise Control If your vehicle has this feature be sure to read this entire section before using it The system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment Adaptive Cruise Control is an enhancement to traditional cruise control and is not a safety system It allows you to keep cruise control engaged in moderate traffic conditions without having to constantly reset your cruise control Adaptive Cruise Control uses radar to detect a vehicle directly ahead in your path within a distance of 328 ft 100 m and operates at speeds above 25 mph 40 km h When it is engaged by
378. ould be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force at your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces 4 The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor Q What is wrong with this on A CAUTION You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit against your body A The shoulder belt is too loose It will not give nearly as much protection this way Q What is wrong with this A The belt is buckled in the wrong place A CAUTION You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this In a crash the belt would go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at the pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you Q What is wrong with this The shoulder belt is worn under the arm It should be worn over the shoulder at all times A CAUTION You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm In a crash your body would mo
379. our GM dealer If the radio displays an error message write it down and provide it to your GM dealer when reporting the problem 3 114 Configurable Radio Display Keys This feature allows you to customize the four keys that are located on each side of the radio display to make it easier to adjust the radio features and other non radio related features are also available for customization To program the configurable radio display keys perform the following steps 1 Press the tune select knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until SETUP appears on the display 3 Press the tune select knob to enter into SETUP 4 Turn the tune select knob until CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS appears on the display 5 Press the tune select knob to enter into CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS 6 Turn the tune select knob to select which of the four configurable keys you would like to change The currently assigned feature will be shown 7 Press the tune select knob to select the configurable key to change 8 Turn the tune select knob to find the feature that you would like to store to the key 9 Press the tune select knob when you have found the feature to be stored The display will update by showing the symbol of the feature that you selected next to the configurable key 10 Repeat the previous steps for each configurable key Once a feature is programmed to a key the feature will not appear on the display when progra
380. our vehicle has anti lock brakes ABS is an advanced electronic braking system that will help prevent a braking skid When you start your engine and begin to drive away your anti lock brake system will check itself You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test is going on and you may even notice that your brake pedal moves a little This is normal If there is a problem with the anti lock brake system this warning light will stay on See Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light on page 3 65 Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you You slam on the brakes and continue braking Here is what happens with ABS A computer senses that wheels are slowing down If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling the computer will separately work the brakes at each wheel The anti lock system can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could The computer is programmed to make the most of available tire and road conditions This can help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard 4 8 As you brake your computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly Remember Anti lock does not change the time you need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you you will not have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly sl
381. ource and to play CD will appear on the display if a CD is loaded If a CD is not loaded the display will not change from the radio source a Eject Press this button to eject the CD that is currently playing or press and hold this button to eject all of the CDs loaded You will hear a beep Eject may be activated with the ignition or radio off Using an MP3 CD MP3 Format If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal computer e Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a CD R disc e Make sure to finalize the disc when burning an MP3 disc using multiple sessions It is usually better to burn the disc all at once e Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or variable bit rates Song title artist name and album will be available for display by the radio when recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2 e Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on one disc e Make sure playlists have a pls or m3u or rmp extension other file extensions may not work The player will be able to read and play a maximum of 50 folders 50 playlists 10 sessions and 255 files Long file folder or playlist names or a combination of a large number of files and folders or playlists may cause the player to be unable to play up to the maximum number of files folders playlists or sessions If you wish to play large numbers of files folders playlists or sessions minimize the length of the file folder or playlist name You can also play an
382. ows or stops Always leave enough room up ahead to stop even though you have anti lock brakes Using Anti Lock Do not pump the brakes Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let anti lock work for you You may hear the anti lock pump or motor operate and feel the brake pedal pulsate but this is normal Braking in Emergencies With anti lock brakes you can steer and brake at the same time In many emergencies steering can help you more than even the very best braking Traction Control System TCS Your vehicle has a traction control system that limits wheel spin This is especially useful in slippery road conditions On a rear wheel drive vehicle the system operates if it senses that one or both of the rear wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction On an All Wheel Drive AWD vehicle the system will operate if it senses that any of the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction When this happens the system brakes the spinning wheel s and or reduces engine power to limit wheel spin You may feel or hear the system working but this is normal This warning light will come on to let you know if there s a problem with your traction control system See Traction Control System TCS Warning Light on page 3 66 When this warning light is on the system will not limit wheel spin Adjust your driving accordingly The traction control system automatically comes on whenever you start your vehicle To
383. p A CAUTION A safety belt that is not properly worn may not provide the protection needed in a crash The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces 4 Buckle position and release the safety belt as described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1 21 Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder To remove and store the comfort guides squeeze the belt edges together so that you can take them out of the guides Pull the guide upward to expose its storage clip and then slide the guide onto the clip Turn the guide and clip inward and slide them in between the seatback and the interior body leaving only the loop of the elastic cord exposed Safety Belt Pretensioners Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the driver and right front passenger Although you cannot see them they are located on the buckle end of the safety belts They help the safety belts reduce a person s forward movement in a moderate to severe frontal and near frontal crash Pretensioners work only once If they activate in a crash you will need to get new ones and probably other new parts for your safety belt system See Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1 64 1 25 Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle s safety belt will fasten around you you should use it Bu
384. p is hot Wait for the cooling system and coolant surge tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap 5 35 A CAUTION You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Do not spill coolant on a hot engine If no coolant is visible in the surge tank add coolant as follows 1 You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when the cooling system including the coolant surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose is no longer hot Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about one quarter of a turn If you hear a hiss wait for that to stop A hiss means there is still some pressure left 5 36 2 Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly and remove it 3 Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture to slightly above the FULL COLD FROID line on the side of the coolant surge tank 4 With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot The upper radiator hose is the largest of the hoses which comes out of the radiator on the passenger s side of the vehicle Watch out for the engine cooling fans By this time the coolant level inside the coolant surge tank may be lower If the level is lower add more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level re
385. pass Such interference may be caused by a magnetic antenna mount magnetic note pad holder or a similar magnetic item If the letter C should ever appear in the compass window the compass may need calibration The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in circles at 5 mph 8 km h or less until the display reads a direction The compass can be placed in calibration mode manually by pressing and holding the on off button until a C is shown in the compass display Compass Variance The zone is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate for compass variance if you live outside zone eight Under certain circumstances as during a long distance cross country trip it will be necessary to adjust for compass variance Compass variance is the difference between earth s magnetic north and true geographic north If not adjusted to account for compass variance your compass could give false readings t To adjust for compass variance do the following 1 Find the current location and variance zone number on the following zone map 2 Press and hold the on off button until a zone number appears in the display 3 Once the zone number appears in the display press the on off button quickly until the correct zone number appears in the display Stop pressing the button and the mirror will return to normal operation If C appears in the compass window the compass may need cali
386. ped with the LATCH system see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 37 If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system you will be using the lap shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say 1 Put the child restraint on the seat 2 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how 3 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 1 43 4 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock 1 44 To tighten the belt push down on the child restraint pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor If you are using a forward facing child restraint you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt If your child restraint manufacturer recommends using a top tether attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor Refer to the instructions that came with the child restraint and see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 37
387. peed you want then release it To slow down in very small amounts briefly press the set decrease button Each time you do this your set speed will be 1 mph 1 6 km h slower 3 23 Resuming a Set Speed Suppose you set your Adaptive Cruise Control at a desired speed and then you apply the brake This will disengage the Adaptive Cruise Control But you do not need to reset it Once you are going about 25 mph 40 km h or more move the Adaptive Cruise Control switch briefly from on to resume increase Adaptive Cruise Control will be engaged with the previously chosen set speed Selecting the Follow Distance GAP When the system detects a slower moving vehicle it will adjust your vehicle s speed and maintain the follow distance gap you select Use the GAP button on the steering wheel to adjust the follow distance 3 24 Press the top of the button to increase the distance or the bottom of the button to decrease the distance The first button press will show you the current follow distance setting on the HUD Your current follow distance setting will be maintained until you change it There are six follow distances to choose from The follow distance selection ranges from near to far one second to two seconds follow time The distance maintained for a selected follow distance will vary based on vehicle speed The faster the vehicle speed the further back you will follow Consider traffic and weather conditions when
388. plications You may also hear audible spark knock during acceleration Refill your tank with premium fuel as soon as possible to avoid damaging your engine If you are using gasoline rated at 91 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking your engine needs service Gasoline Specifications At a minimum gasoline should meet ASTM specification D 4814 in the United States or CAN CGSB 3 5 in Canada Some gasolines may contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl MMT General Motors recommends against the use of gasolines containing MMT See Additives on page 5 6 for additional information California Fuel If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions Standards it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications See the underhood emission control label If this fuel is not available in states adopting California emissions standards your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications but emission control system performance may be affected The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle may fail a smog check test See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 67 lf this occurs return to your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used repairs may not be covered by your warranty Additives To provide cleaner air all gasolines in the United States are
389. ply the brake pedal or move the Adaptive Cruise Control switch to off Adaptive Cruise Control information will not appear on the HUD when the system is not engaged 3 30 Erasing Set Speed Memory When you turn the Adaptive Cruise Control switch or the ignition off the set soeed memory is erased Other Messages There are three messages that may appear on the DIC They are SERVICE RADAR CRUISE RADAR CRUISE NOT READY and CLEAN RADAR These messages will appear to indicate a problem with the Adaptive Cruise Control See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 79 for more information Cleaning the System The radar can become blocked by snow ice or dirt If so you may need to turn off the engine and clean the lens Remember do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in icy conditions or when visibility is low such as in fog rain or snow The emblem lens is located in the center of the grille To clean the emblem lens wipe the surface with a soft cloth After cleaning the emblem lens engage the Adaptive Cruise Control If you are unable to do so see your dealer Headlamps The exterior lamp control is located in the middle of the turn signal multifunction lever Exterior Lamp Control Turn the control with this symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps The exterior lamp control has four positions b On Off Turn the control to this position to turn off all lamps and automatic lighting features including Da
390. portion of the cloth cover 5 55 Windshield Replacement Keep in mind that your windshield is part of the Head Up Display HUD system If you ever have to get your windshield replaced be sure to get one that is designed for HUD or your HUD image may look blurred or out of focus Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear or cracking See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 It s a good idea to clean or replace the wiper blade assembly on a regular basis or when worn For proper windshield wiper blade length and type see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6 14 STS V models will automatically move the windshield wipers to the park position if the hood is open Make sure the hood is closed before replacing your windshield wiper blades 5 56 To replace the wiper blade assembly do the following 1 Pull the windshield wiper assembly away from the windshield 2 Squeeze the tabs on each side of the wiper blade assembly and slide the assembly off the end of the wiper arm A CAUTION Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous Overloading your tires can cause overheating as a result of too much friction You could have an air out and a serious accident See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 32 3 Replace the blade assembly with a new one Underinflated tires pose the same danger Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield as overload
391. position to turn on the parking lamps together with the following e Sidemarker Lamps e Taillamps e License Plate Lamps Instrument Panel Lights AD Headlamps Turn the control to this position to turn on the headlamps together with the previously listed lamps and lights Intellibeam Intelligent High Beam Headlamp Control System If your vehicle has this feature be sure to read this entire section before using it Intellibeam is an enhancement to your vehicle s headlamp system Using a digital light sensor on your rearview mirror this system will turn the vehicle s high beam headlamps on and off according to surrounding traffic conditions The Intellibeam system will turn your high beam headlamps on when it is dark enough there is no other traffic present and the Intellibeam system is enabled 3 32 Turning On and Enabling Intellibeam AUTO 2D Intellibeam On Off Press and release the Intellibeam button on the inside rear view mirror The Intellibeam indicator on the mirror turn on to let you know the system has been turned on Once the system has been turned on it will remain on each time the vehicle is started Additionally the Intellibeam system must be enabled To enable the Intellibeam System turn the exterior lamp control to AUTO with the turn signal multifunction lever in its neutral position The High Beam On Light will appear on the instrument panel cluster when
392. r REAR WINDOW DEFOG If this feature is active the rear defogger will engage when the vehicle is started using the remote start feature SEAT TEMP Temperature CONTROL If your vehicle has this feature and this feature is active the seats will be heated or cooled when the vehicle is started using the remote start feature The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle by pressing the F6 BACK button located on the radio to return to the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU REMOTE RECALL MEMORY If your vehicle has the optional memory package you will have this feature When this feature is turned on you can recall any previously programmed seat position and mirror position when the unlock button on the keyless access transmitter is pressed Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory it was programmed to Mode 2 with the exception of recall seat to driver position which is on The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory To program the vehicle to a different mode use the following procedure 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until REMOTE RECALL MEMORY is highlighted
393. r door lock switch on either front door When the door is closed again it will not lock automatically Use the manual knob or the power door lock switch to lock the door The doors were also programmed from the factory to unlock every time the shift lever is moved back into PARK P The power door locks can be programmed through the radio display The radio display allows you to choose various lock and unlock settings For more information on programming see Vehicle Personalization on page 2 53 Rear Door Security Locks Your vehicle is equipped with rear door security locks that prevent passengers from opening the rear doors on your vehicle from the inside The rear door security locks are located on the inside edge of each rear door You must open the rear doors to access them To use these locks do the following 1 Insert your key into the slot next to the rear door security lock label and turn it to engage the lock 2 Close the door 3 Repeat the steps for the other rear door The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be opened from the inside when this feature is in use When you want to open a rear door when the security lock is on do the following 1 Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry transmitter the front door power lock switch or by lifting the rear door manual lock 2 Then open the door from the outside To cancel the rear door security lock do the following 1 Unlock the door and open it fr
394. r it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training The jack provided with your vehicle is designed only for changing a flat tire If it is used for anything else you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack Use the jack provided with your vehicle only for changing a flat tire 6 Raise the jack by turning the wheel wrench heehee lf pe position the ers pea hi rocker l clockwise until the slots in the jack head fit into the molding and attempt to raise the vehicle you could metal flange located behind the triangle on the break the molding and or cause other damage to A ie A plastic molding as shown your vehicle Always position the jack so that when the jack head is raised it will fit firmly in the 7 Put the compact spare tire near you notch located inboard from the rocker molding 5 Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the jack lift head until the jack fits under the vehicle 5 88 9 Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire OE e ea 8 Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise Raise the vehicle far enough off the Rust or dirt on the wheel or on the parts to ground for the compact spare tire to fit under which it is fastened can make the wheel nuts the vehicle become loose after a time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel remove an
395. r passengers Turning the knob to the left will make the air cooler Turning the knob to the right will make the air warmer The right knob controls the air delivery to the rear passengers Turning the knob all the way to the left will shut off airflow to the rear passengers Operating with the rear air delivery off may make the entire vehicle warm or cool less quickly It may also increase the air rush sound of the front system Off This is the off position 74 Vent This mode directs all the rear passenger airflow to the outlets in the console This is the normal position for cool down conditions 7 Bi Level This mode directs airflow to the console outlets and the floor vad Floor This mode directs all of the airflow to the floor This is the normal position for warm up conditions The amount of airflow to the rear passengers is controlled automatically by the front climate control system regardless of optional equipment Airflow to the rear system will be turned off when defrost is selected on the front climate control panel to direct air to clear the windshield Vehicles equipped with a rear climate control panel also have heated rear seats There are two buttons each with three indicator lights located between the two climate control knobs on the rear climate control panel to control the rear heated seats See Heated Seats on page 1 7 for additional information Be sure to keep the area under the front s
396. r visible in the horizontal tube section of the fill neck with the engine off add more of the DEX COOL coolant mixture to the fill neck until the level is again visible in the horizontal tube section Then replace the pressure cap Be sure the pressure cap is hand tight and fully seated If the coolant is not at the proper level when the system cools down again see your dealer 5 39 Power Steering Fluid See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for reservoir location AAAA AR When to Check Power Steering Fluid It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired 5 40 How to Check Power Steering Fluid To check the power steering fluid do the following 1 Turn the key off and let the engine compartment cool down 2 Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean 3 Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag 4 Replace the cap and completely tighten it 5 Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick The level should be within the HOT mark If necessary add only enough fluid to bring the level within the mark What to Use To determine what kind of fluid to use see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 Always use the proper fluid Failure to use the proper fluid
397. rCard Discover visit Helm Inc on the World Wide Web at www helminc com Or you can write to Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation Allow ample time for delivery Note to Canadian Customers All listed prices are quoted in U S funds Canadian residents are to make checks payable in U S funds 4 NOTES 7 16 A Accessories and Modifications ceeeeeees 5 3 Accessory Power Outlet S eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 46 Adaptive Cruise Control eceeeeeeeeee eee eeees 3 19 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle a sersncttrsaanemastinascinateienntin eaamanaretecianeateen 1 62 Additives Fuel ccccceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 5 6 Add On Electrical Equipment 0 0eeeee 5 104 Air Cleaner Filter Engine eceeeseeeeeeneeees 5 25 Air Conditioning scccs cece niinvicn dive ents 3 48 Airbag Passenger Status Indicator c eeeeeeeeees 3 61 Readiness Light 0 csceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeees 3 60 Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module SDM 7 8 Airbag System siridir sceneria in ase 1 48 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle sarnsrncrssnd imienin a 1 62 How Does an Airbag Restrain eeeee 1 56 Passenger Sensing System eeeeeeeeeeees 1 58 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 1 62 What Makes an
398. ransmitter See Keyless Access System Operation on page 2 5 for more information The window if down will express up If any window was unable to completely close it will reverse and the horn will chirp See Anti Pinch Feature previously The engine must be off to operate this feature 2 20 Sun Visors Swing down the visor or detach it from the center mount and move to the side to block out glare The visors also have side to side slide capability for greater coverage Lighted Visor Vanity Mirrors Pull the visor down and lift the cover Move the slide switch up or down to brighten or dim the lamp Theft Deterrent Systems Vehicle theft is big business especially in some cities Although your vehicle has a number of theft deterrent features we know that nothing we put on it can make it impossible to steal Theft Deterrent System Your vehicle has a theft deterrent alarm system The security light is located on the instrument panel cluster f If the ignition is off and a door is open the security light will flash reminding you to arm the theft deterrent system To arm the system do one of the following e Press the lock button on the keyless access transmitter If the door is closed when the lock button is pressed the security light will stay illuminated for 30 seconds After the security light goes off the theft deterrent system is armed Pressing the lock button twice will arm the system immedia
399. re Balance 5 76 Wheel Replacement cseeeeeeeeeereeees 5 76 When It Is Time for New Tires 000 5 72 Towing Recreational Vehicle eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee es 4 38 Towing a Trailer w2sscitestecicteniciedeees aeieescees 4 40 YOUR VENICE etienne heats 4 37 Traction Control System TCS ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 4 9 Control System Warning Light 00 3 66 Limited Slip Rear Axle i e 4 11 Magnetic Ride Control ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 11 StabiliTrak System ccccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 4 11 Transmission Fluid Automatic ccc cc ceceaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 5 27 Transmission Operation Automatic 2 28 2 32 TONK a ssatacrtetcereniced a E 2 14 Turn and Lane Change Signals ceeeeeeeeee 3 8 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever ceeeeeeeeee ee 3 7 Twilight Sentinel ccccceeeececcecceeeeeeeseees 3 37 U Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA 3 44 Understanding Radio Reception 0 3 120 Uniform Tire Quality Grading cceeeeeeeeee ee 5 75 Universal Home Remote System 0 eee 2 47 Operations en ren E anan E eI EEEE 2 48 Valet Lockout Switch c ccecceceeeeeeeeeee tees 2 23 Vehicle CONO ss ccteseseceveveest ihenstiastyead atest vine Reeeoieaes 4 6 Damage WarningS ceeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees iv Loading wektr cieccd
400. re will Your vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture your engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant Notice In cold weather water can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts Use the recommended coolant and the proper coolant mixture A CAUTION You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Do not spill coolant on a hot engine 1 You can remove the Intercooler System pressure cap when the Intercooler System including the upper intercooler hoses are no longer hot Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about one quarter of a turn If you hear a hiss wait for that to stop This will allow any pressure still left to be vented Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly and remove it Add the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture to the fill neck until the coolant reaches the COLD FILL line on the fill neck With the Intercooler System pressure cap off start the engine and let it run for a couple of minutes Then turn the engine off By this time the coolant level inside the fill neck may be lower If the level drops to where coolant is no longe
401. rear of the sunroof panel will tilt upward to the full vent position The sunshade must be opened manually Express Close The express close feature will operate from the open or partially open position To express close the power sunroof fully press the driver s side switch forward once To stop the sunroof glass in a desired position other than closed press the switch again in either direction The sunshade must be closed manually Close To close the power sunroof operate the controls according to one of the following e From the open position press and hold the drivers side sunroof switch forward The sunshade must be closed manually e From the vent position press and hold the passenger s side sunroof switch rearward Anti Pinch If an object is in the path of the sunroof while it is closing the anti pinch feature will detect the object and stop the sunroof from closing at the point of the obstruction The sunroof will then return to the full open or vent position To close the sunroof once it has re opened refer to the two options previously described under the Close feature instructions Vehicle Personalization Your vehicle has personalization that allows you to program certain features to a preferred setting for up to two drivers The back of the keyless access transmitters are labelled 1 or 2 Additional keyless access transmitters programmed to the vehicle as 3 and or 4 do not have a number on the back
402. rees behind buildings or under bridges Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear If you see a patch of ice ahead of you brake before you are on it Try not to brake while you are actually on the ice and avoid sudden steering maneuvers If You Are Caught in a Blizzard If you are stopped by heavy snow you could be in a serious situation You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow Here are some things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe e Turn on your hazard flashers e Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you have been stopped by the snow e Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you If you do not have blankets or extra clothing make body insulators from newspapers burlap bags rags floor mats anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm 4 29 You can run the engine to keep warm but be careful 4 30 A CAUTION Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle This can cause deadly CO carbon monoxide gas to get inside CO could overcome you and kill you You cannot see it or smell it so you might not know it is in your vehicle Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle especially any that is blocking your exhaust pipe And check around again from time to time
403. removed e For solid dry soils remove as much as possible and then vacuum To clean use the following instructions 1 Saturate a lint free clean white cloth with water or club soda 2 Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture 3 Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub toward the center Continue cleaning using a clean area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled 4 Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the cleaning cloth remains clean 5 If the soil is not completely removed use a mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning process that was used with plain water 5 96 If any of the soil remains a commercial fabric cleaner or spot lifter may be necessary When a commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used test a small hidden area for colorfastness first If the locally cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation may result clean the entire surface After the cleaning process has been completed a paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the fabric or carpet Leather A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove dust If a more thorough cleaning is necessary a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used Allow the leather to dry naturally Do not use heat to dry Never use steam to clean leather Never use spot lifters or spot removers on leather Many commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect
404. rent distance traveled since the last reset for each trip odometer in either miles mi or kilometers km Both odometers can be used at the same time For base level vehicles each trip odometer can be reset to zero separately by pressing and holding the bottom of the trip information button while the desired trip odometer is displayed For uplevel vehicles reset each trip odometer by pressing the reset button or by pressing and holding the trip information button while the desired trip odometer is displayed DIC Warnings and Messages These messages will appear if there is a problem detected in one of your vehicle s systems The text messages are the same for both the base audio and Navigation systems unless otherwise indicated You must acknowledge a message to clear it from the screen for further use To clear a message press the reset button Be sure to take any message that appears on the screen seriously and remember that clearing the message will only make the message disappear not the problem AUTOMATIC LIGHTS OFF This message will display when the automatic headlamps are turned off See Headlamps on page 3 31 for more information AUTOMATIC LIGHTS ON This message will display when the automatic headlamps are turned on See Headlamps on page 3 31 for more information BATTERY NOT CHARGING SERVICE CHARGING SYS System This symbol appears with the BATTERY NOT CHARGING SERVICE CHARGING SYS message Thi
405. repaired and the fluid level checked Add fluid if needed I Inspect throttle body bore and valve plates for deposits Open the throttle valve and inspect all surfaces Clean as required m f you drive regularly under dusty conditions inspect the filter at each engine oil change n Visually inspect belt for fraying excessive cracks or obvious damage Replace belt if necessary Owner Checks and Services These owner checks and services should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety dependability and emission control performance of your vehicle Your GM Goodwrench dealer can assist you with these checks and services Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle make sure they are the proper ones as shown in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 At Each Fuel Fill It is important to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill Engine Oil Level Check Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary See Engine Oil on page 5 18 for further details Notice Itis important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the proper level Failure to keep your engine oil at the proper level can cause damage to your engine not covered by your warranty Engine Coolant Level Check Check the engine coolant level and add DEX COOL coolant mixture if necessary See Engine Coolant on page 5 27 for furth
406. rhood Fuse Block on page 5 106 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir See Adding Washer Fluid under Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5 41 Battery See Battery on page 5 45 Passenger Compartment Air Filter See Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 3 55 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir See Power Steering Fluid on page 5 40 F G H Engine Oil Fill Cap See When to Add Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 5 18 Engine Oil Dipstick Out of View See Checking Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 5 18 Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir See Brake Fluid under Brakes on page 5 42 Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap See Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 5 31 and Cooling System on page 5 33 Engine Air Cleaner Filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 25 4 6L V8 Engine 5 14 After you have removed the sight shields if equipped on the 4 6L V8 engine here is what you will see A Underhood Fuse Block See Underhood Fuse Block on page 5 106 Battery See Battery on page 5 45 Passenger Compartment Air Filter See Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 3 55 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir See Adding Washer Fluid under Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5 41 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir See Power Steering Fluid on page 5 40 Engine Oil Fill Cap See When to Add Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 5 18 G H Engine Oil Dipstic
407. ring Never secure anything to the roof of your vehicle by routing the rope or tie down through any door or window opening If you do the path of an inflating airbag will be is blocked Do not let seat covers block the The roof mounted side impact airbag for the right front inflation path of a side impact airbag The path passenger and the person seated directly behind that passenger is in the ceiling above the side windows otan intatng alrbag must Re kept ciear 1 54 When Should an Airbag Inflate The drivers and right front passenger s frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crashes But they are designed to inflate only if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment threshold Deployment thresholds take into account a variety of desired deployment and non deployment events and are used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle is traveling It depends largely on what you hit the direction of the impact and how quickly your vehicle slows down In addition your vehicle has dual stage frontal airbags which adjust the restraint according to crash severity Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic frontal sensor which helps the sensing system distinguish between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
408. river and front passenger seats 7 Once the transmitter is programmed a beep will sound The DIC will display READY FOR X where X can be 3 or 4 or MAX FOBS LEARNED 8 Remove the transmitter from the transmitter pocket and press the unlock button on the keyless access transmitter two times The Canadian immobilizer standard requires Canadian 3 Insert the vehicle key into the key lock cylinder owners to see their GM dealer for matching new located on the driver s door transmitters when a recognized transmitter is not 4 available United States Owners are permitted to match a new transmitter to their vehicle when a recognized Turn the key to the unlock position five times within five seconds transmitter is not available The procedure will require 5 The DIC message will display OFF ACC three ten minute cycles to complete the matching TO LEARN process Do the following 6 Press the OFF ACC button ignition switch 1 The vehicle must be off 7 The DIC will read WAIT 10 MINUTES and will count down to zero one minute at a time 8 The DIC will display OFF ACC TO LEARN again 9 Press the OFF ACC button ignition switch again 10 The DIC will again read WAIT 10 MINUTES and will count down to zero one minute at a time 11 The DIC will display OFF ACC TO LEARN again 12 Press the OFF ACC button ignition switch again 13 The DIC will again read WAIT 10 MINUTES and will count down to zero one minute at a time 1
409. rn the tune select knob until SUSPENSION MODE is highlighted 3 Press the tune select knob to enter the SUSPENSION MODE submenu 4 Turn the tune select knob to highlight TOURING or PERFORMANCE 5 Press the tune select knob to select the setting The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle by pressing the F6 BACK button located on the radio to return to the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU Exiting the Personal Settings Menu Once you have finished making your selections on the base audio system you will automatically return to the main audio screen after 15 seconds You can also press the F6 BACK button located on the radio to return to the main audio screen 2 69 Memory Seat Mirrors and Steering Wheel If your vehicle has the memory feature you can program and recall memory settings for the following features for up to two drivers e The drivers seat position e The outside rearview mirrors position e The telescopic steering column position The following settings and presets are set automatically e The language radio and XM presets tone volume playback mode AM FM or CD last displayed stations and compact disc position e The last climate control setting e The Head Up Display HUD position if your vehicle has this feature e Other personalization settings for exa
410. rning flashers are on your turn signals will not work Other Warning Devices If you carry reflective triangles you can set them up at the side of the road about 300 feet 100 m behind your vehicle 3 6 Horn Press near or on the horn symbols on your steering wheel pad to sound the horn Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering Column Sn A LA The power tilt wheel control is located on the outboard side of the steering column To operate the power tilt feature push the control up and the steering wheel will tilt up Push the control down and the steering wheel will go down If the power tilt control is pressed up or down and held in that position there will be a slight movement and a slight pause followed by a continuous movement in the direction the control is being pressed This allows very fine control of the steering wheel position If the control is bumped the steering wheel moves approximately one degree in the direction commanded Push the control forward and the steering wheel moves toward the front of the vehicle Push the control rearward and the steering wheel moves toward the rear of the vehicle To set the memory position see Vehicle Personalization on page 2 53 and Memory Seat Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 2 70 Heated Steering Wheel Your vehicle may have a heated steering wheel cS Si Press the bottom of the button to turn the heated steering wheel on or off A light on the
411. roaching and Following a Vehicle The vehicle ahead symbol will only appear on the HUD when a vehicle ahead is detected in your path If this symbol does not appear or disappears briefly Adaptive Cruise Control will not respond to vehicles you may see ahead A CAUTION When the Adaptive Cruise Control radar is blocked by snow ice or dirt it may not detect a vehicle ahead Adaptive Cruise Control may not have time to slow your vehicle enough to avoid a collision Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control when the radar is blocked by snow ice or dirt Keep your radar clean See Cleaning the System later in this section 3 26 Adaptive Cruise Control will automatically slow your vehicle down when approaching a slower moving vehicle It will then adjust your speed to follow the vehicle in front at the selected follow distance Your speed will increase or decrease to follow the vehicle in front of you but will not exceed the set speed It may apply limited braking if necessary When braking is active your brake lights will come on It may feel or sound different than if you were applying the brakes yourself This is normal Stationary or Very Slow Moving Objects A CAUTION Adaptive Cruise Control may not detect and react to stationary or slow moving vehicles or other objects ahead of you You could crash into an object ahead of you Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control when approaching stationary or slow moving
412. rous So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going fast enough When your vehicle is hydroplaning it has little or no contact with the road Hydroplaning does not happen often But it can if your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or more is low It can happen if a lot of water is standing on the road If you can see reflections from trees telephone poles or other vehicles and raindrops dimple the water s surface there could be hydroplaning Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds There just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning The best advice is to slow down when it is raining Driving Through Deep Standing Water Notice If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or standing water water can come in through your engine s air intake and badly damage your engine Never drive through water that is slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle If you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water drive through them very slowly Driving Through Flowing Water A CAUTION Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces If you try to drive through flowing water as you might at a low water crossing your vehicle can be carried away As little as six inches of flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle If this happens you and other vehicle occupants could drown Do not ignore poli
413. route the safety belts through the proper slots in the seat cushion Do not let the safety belts There is a fuse block located under the rear seat on the driver s side and passenger s side of the vehicle The get twisted rear seat cushion must be removed to access the 2 Slide the rear of the cushion up and under the fuse blocks See Removing the Rear Seat Cushion seatback so the rear locating guides hook into listed previously in this section Pein Tea pes OMANE Baers Mame To access the fuses push in the two tabs then lift the cover off Your vehicle may not have all the fuses listed below 5 111 Driver s Side DPM THEFT SHIFTER MOD OPT REAR DR MOD ELC SOL OPT MOD TVNICS SPARE IGN 3 L POSITION SEATS INTERCOOLER ELC RELAY ae meu E MICRO OPT MINI OPT MICRO OPT F RRSHLF INTERCOOLER SPEAKER PUMP OPT a Eo u TRUNK DR REV LAMP ae REL RELAY RELAY auj S MICRO MICRO Wo n is STNDBY LAMP RLY JOINT CONNECTOR MICRO OPT TRUNKDR MA ATD LAMPS OPT DRIVER DR R POSITION RUN aj z RELAY RELAY H al Ig MICRO OPT MICRO 2 BS a is RELAY OPT gt je Je Fuses AMP Amplifier INTERCOOLER PUMP OPT Intercooler Pump Option THEFT Theft Sensors Auto Shifter SHIFTER Power Sounder MR RTD Magnetic Ride Control ae D Rear Heated Seats SPARE SPARE IGN3 Front Passenger Heated Seat Auto Shifter Occupant Protection MOD
414. s Service Publications Ordering Information Customer Assistance and Information Customer Satisfaction Procedure Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to Cadillac Normally any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your dealer s sales or service departments Sometimes however despite the best intentions of all concerned misunderstandings can occur If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction the following steps should be taken STEP ONE Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management Normally concerns can be quickly resolved at that level If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales service or parts manager contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager STEP TWO If after contacting a member of dealership management it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help contact the Cadillac Customer Assistance Center 24 hours a day by calling 1 800 458 8006 In Canada contact the Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre by calling 1 888 446 2000 7 2 We encourage you to call the toll free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention Please have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance Representative e Vehicle Identification Number VIN This is available from the vehicle registration or title or the plat
415. s controls Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory Power RAP With RAP the audio system can be played even after the ignition is turned off See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 2 25 for more information Setting the Time 1 Press the tune select knob the right knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until SET CLOCK appears on the display Press the tune select knob to select SET CLOCK Turn the tune select knob to adjust the time 5 Press the tune select knob to update the time VEHICLE TIME UPDATED will appear on the display Ww If the CLOCK RADIO DISP is configured into one of the configurable keys pressing the key will switch the display back to the clock set function The time and date will always appear on the radio display See Configurable Radio Display Keys under Radio with CD on page 3 96 for more information on configuring the keys Setting the Date 1 Press the tune select knob the right knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until SET DATE appears on the display 3 Press the tune select knob to select SET DATE 4 Turn the tune select knob to adjust the date 5 Press the tune select knob to update the time VEHICLE DATE UPDATED will appear on the display If the DATE is configured into one of the configurable keys pressing the key will switch the display back to the date set function The time and date will always appear on t
416. s display can be used like a stopwatch You can record the time it takes to travel from one point to another To access the timer press the information button until 00 00 00 TIMER OFF displays To turn on the timer press the reset button until TIMER ON displays The timer will then start To turn off the timer press the reset button again until TIMER OFF displays The timer will stop and display the end timing value To reset the timer press and hold the reset button after the timer has been stopped The display will return to zero BATTERY VOLTS This display shows the current battery voltage If the voltage is in the normal range the value will display For example the display may read 13 2 BATTERY VOLTS If the voltage is low the display will have LOW after it If the voltage is high the display will have HIGH after it Your vehicle s charging system regulates voltage based on the state of the battery The battery voltage may fluctuate when viewing this information on the DIC This is normal See Charging System Light on page 3 63 for more information If there is a problem with the battery charging system the DIC may display a message See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 79 for more information Tire Pressure If your vehicle has a tire pressure monitor TPM system this display shows the air pressure of each road tire in either pounds per square inch psi or kilopascals kPa If the tire pressure is normal the v
417. s light will also come on during a malfunction in one of two ways e Light Flashing A misfire condition has been detected A misfire increases vehicle emissions and may damage the emission control system on your vehicle Diagnosis and service may be required e Light On Steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected on your vehicle Diagnosis and service may be required 3 68 If the Light Is Flashing The following may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle e Reducing vehicle speed e Avoiding hard accelerations e Avoiding steep uphill grades If the light stops flashing and remains on steady see If the Light Is On Steady following If the light continues to flash when it is safe to do so stop the vehicle Find a safe place to park your vehicle Turn the engine off wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine If the light remains on steady see If the Light Is On Steady following If the light is still flashing follow the previous steps and see your dealer for service as soon as possible If the Light Is On Steady You also may be able to correct the emission system malfunction by considering the following Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle If so reinstall the fuel cap making sure to fully install the cap See Filling the Tank on page 5 8 The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed A loose or missing fuel
418. s message will display when a problem with the charging system has been detected Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer 3 79 BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE This message will display when the system detects that the battery voltage is dropping beyond a reasonable level The battery saver system will start reducing certain features of the vehicle that you may not be able to notice At the point that the features are disabled this message is displayed It means that the vehicle is trying to save the charge in the battery Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the battery to recharge The normal battery voltage range is 11 5 to 15 5 volts You can monitor battery voltage on the DIC by pressing the information button until you find BATTERY VOLTS BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH This symbol appears with the BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH message This message will display when the electrical charging system is overcharging the battery When the system detects that the battery voltage is above approximately 16 volts this message will be displayed 3 80 To reduce the charging overload use the vehicle s accessories Turn on the exterior lamps and radio set the climate control on AUTO and the fan speed on the highest setting and turn the rear window defogger on The normal battery voltage range is 11 5 to 15 5 volts when the engine is running You can monitor battery voltage on the DIC by pressing the information button until you find BATT
419. s severe enough to inflate the airbag windshields are broken by vehicle deformation Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger airbag e Airbags are designed to inflate only once After an airbag inflates you will need some new parts for your airbag system If you do not get them the airbag system will not be there to help protect you in another crash A new system will include airbag modules and possibly other parts The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts e Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information after a crash See Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data Recorders on page 7 8 e Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag system Improper service can mean that an airbag system will not work properly See your dealer for service 1 58 Passenger Sensing System Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right front passenger position The passenger airbag status indicator will be visible when the vehicle is running The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off will be visible in the overhead console during the system check When the system check is complete either the word ON or the word OFF or the symbol for on or the symbol for off will be visible See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3 61 PASSENGER AIR BAG A 2 OFF ON
420. sale has required the use of safety belts Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags you still have to buckle up to get the most protection That is true not only in frontal collisions but especially in side and other collisions With safety belts you slow down as the vehicle does You get more time to stop You stop over more distance and your strongest bones take the forces That is why safety belts make such good sense Q If I am a good driver and never drive far from home why should wear safety belts A You may be an excellent driver but if you are in an accident even one that is not your fault you and your passengers can be hurt Being a good driver does not protect you from things beyond your control such as bad drivers Most accidents occur within 25 miles 40 km of home And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph 65 km h Safety belts are for everyone How to Wear Safety Belts Properly This part is only for people of adult size Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children And there are different rules for smaller children and babies If a child will be riding in your vehicle see Older Children on page 1 26 or Infants and Young Children on page 1 29 Follow those rules for everyone s protection First you will want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has We will start with the driver position
421. se letters and the numbers zero through nine Also included are spaces and other non letter characters such as the ampersand amp Press the tune select knob once to select the letter The letter will then appear on the display and the cursor will advance to the next letter If you make a mistake press the F5 button located on the radio repeatedly to cycle back through all of the characters until you reach the character you wish to change Then turn the tune select knob until the letter you want is highlighted and press the tune select knob to select the new letter Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until the name or greeting you want is complete You can program up to 16 characters The name or greeting you programmed is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle by pressing the F6 BACK button located on the radio to return to the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU You will now see a check mark next to the driver greeting menu item which means that the driver greeting feature is on anda customized driver greeting is being used To turn off the customized driver greeting and go back to displaying either Driver 1 or Driver 2 use the following procedure 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until DRIVER G
422. section you should not be alarmed when this happens Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle s functions Often gages and warning lights work together to let you know when there s a problem with your vehicle When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on when you are driving or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem check the section that tells you what to do about it Follow this manual s advice Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous So please get to know your warning lights and gages They re a big help Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center DIC that works along with the warning lights and gages See Driver Information Center DIC on page 3 73 for more information 3 57 Instrument Panel Cluster The instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running You will know how fast you are going how much fuel you are using and many of the other things you will need to know to drive safely and economically United States Uplevel version shown Canada and base similar 3 58 Speedometer and Odometer Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles per hour mph and kilometers per hour km h See MPH km under DIC Controls and Displays on page 3 74 for more information The odometer mileage can be checked without the vehicle running Your vehicle s odometer works tog
423. set Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure If the airbag is off the off indicator in the overhead console will be lit and stay lit when the vehicle is running 1 47 If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit turn the vehicle off Remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle the on indicator is still lit check to make sure that the vehicle s seatback is not pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion If this happens slightly recline the vehicle s seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint If this happens adjust the head restraint A thick layer of additional material such as a blanket or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers heaters or massagers located between the seat cushion and the child restraint or small occupant can affect how the passenger sensing system operates Remove any additional material from the seat cushion before reinstalling securing the child restraint or small occupant If the on indicator is still lit secure the child in the child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and check with your dealer To remove the child restraint just unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt and let it go back all the way The safety
424. sicescsdaahenciacntadvaameegeceeen tested 4 37 Service and Appearance Care 00 5 1 EIVICE acu ses eet peace ate nit E E 5 3 Fuel piee trast cutee r a a aaRS 5 5 Checking Things Under the Hood _ 5 10 All Wheel Drive Lassessscsesresierrerrerrrrsrrerrens 5 51 Rear AXle cccuksscesscescuccaaeocnessiesdeasscseedeeess 5 52 ROMEGAXIG oomi e na EnA E 5 53 Bulb Replacement cccseeeeeceseeceeeeeees 5 54 Windshield Replacement _ c cceeeees 5 56 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement _ 5 56 TIMES AE E E 5 57 Appearance Care oo eececcecceeceeceeeeeeeeeaeeaes 5 94 Vehicle Identification oo eeece cece ee ee eee e ee 5 103 Electrical Systemi oo eee cec ccc ce eee ee eee ee eens 5 104 Capacities and Specifications eee 5 116 Maintenance Schedule 0 cccssesseesseeeeeeeees 6 1 Maintenance Schedule ooo eee ee eee 6 2 Customer Assistance and Information 7 1 Customer Assistance and Information 7 2 Reporting Safety Defects ooo cece ecee cece 7 13 TaT leS oo cece ccc ec cece eee ee eee EAEE T A A 1 GENERAL MOTORS GM the GM Emblem CADILLAC the CADILLAC Crest amp Wreath and the name STS are registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed We reserve the right to make changes in the product after that time without notice For vehic
425. side may have the date of manufacture D Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load E Tire Inflation The temporary use tire or compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi 420 kPa For more information on tire pressure and inflation see Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 65 F Tire Size A combination of letters and numbers define a tire s width height aspect ratio construction type and service description The letter T as the first character in the tire size means the tire is for temporary use only G TPC Spec Tire Performance Criteria Specification Original equipment tires designed to GM s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall GM s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines Tire Size The following illustration shows an example of a typical passenger vehicle tire size P225 60R16 97S UT B CDE F A Passenger P Metric Tire The United States version of a metric tire sizing system The letter P as the first character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U S Tire and Rim Association B Tire Width The three digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall C Aspect Ratio A two digit number that indicates the tire height to width measurements For exa
426. since it left the factory To program the vehicle to a different mode use the following procedure 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until CHIME VOLUME HIGH is highlighted 3 Press the tune select knob to switch back and forth between the normal and high settings A check mark indicates that the chime volume is set to HIGH The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle SUSPENSION MODE If your vehicle has this feature you can select between performance or touring modes Performance mode is used where road conditions or personal preference demand more control This setting provides more feel or response to road conditions Touring mode is used for normal city and highway driving This setting provides a smooth soft ride Programmable Modes Mode 1 PERFORMANCE Mode 2 TOURING Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory it was programmed to Mode 2 The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory To program the vehicle to a different mode use the following procedure 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Tu
427. so occur when things like storms and power lines interfere with radio reception When this happens try reducing the treble on your radio FM Stereo FM stereo will give the best sound but FM signals will reach only about 10 to 40 miles 16 to 65 km Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals causing the sound to fade in and out XM Satellite Radio Service XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception from coast to coast in the 48 contiguous United States and in Canada if available Just as with FM tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals causing the sound to fade in and out In addition traveling or standing under heavy foliage bridges garages or tunnels may cause loss of XM signal for a period of time The radio may display NO XM SIGNAL to indicate interference Cellular Phone Usage Cellular phone usage may cause interference with your vehicle s radio This interference may occur when making or receiving phone calls charging the phone s battery or simply having the phone on This interference is an increased level of static while listening to the radio If static is received while listening to the radio unplug the cellular phone and turn it off Care of Your CDs Handle CDs carefully Store them in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust The CD player scans the bottom surface of the disc If the surface of a C
428. splay NO FOBS DETECTED when you try to start the vehicle If this happens place the transmitter in the center console storage area transmitter pocket with the buttons facing to the front of the vehicle Then with the vehicle in PARK P or NEUTRAL N press the brake pedal and the start button See Starting the Engine on page 2 25 for additional information about your vehicle s electronic keyless ignition with push button start Although this will start the vehicle it is recommended that you replace the transmitter battery as soon as possible Notice When replacing the battery use care not to touch any of the circuitry Static from your body transferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter To replace the battery do the following 1 Insert a coin or similar object into the slot on the back of the transmitter and carefully pry apart the front and back 2 Carefully pull the battery out of the transmitter 3 Put the new battery in the transmitter positive side down Use a battery type CR2032 or equivalent 4 Reassemble the transmitter Make sure to put it together so water will not get inside the transmitter 5 Test the transmitter Remote Vehicle Start This feature allows you to start the engine from outside the vehicle Q Remote Start To start the vehicle using the remote start feature do the following 1 Aim the remote keyless access transmitter at the vehicle 2 Press the transmit
429. ss the CNFG radio button to enter the main menu of the radio 5 Turn the tune select knob and scroll to SETUP 6 Press the tune select knob to enter the SETUP menu 7 Turn the tune select knob and scroll to DRIVER SELECTION 8 Press the tune select knob to enter the DRIVER SELECTION submenu The following items will appear e DRIVER 1 DRIVER 2 e RECALL DRIVER SETTINGS e STORE DRIVER SETTINGS Driver Selection Submenu Items DRIVER 1 DRIVER 2 The numbers on the back of each keyless access transmitter correspond to DRIVER 1 and DRIVER 2 If you would like to recall or store driver settings for the driver that does not correspond to the number on the back of the keyless access transmitter that you are using use the following procedure 1 Enter the memory programming mode for your driver settings by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Driver Selection Submenu 2 From the DRIVER SELECTION submenu turn the tune select knob to highlight the driver number that you want either DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2 3 Set your choice by pressing in the tune select knob If you would like to recall driver settings for the selected driver see RECALL DRIVER SETTINGS later in this section If you would like to store driver settings for the selected driver see STORE DRIVER SETTINGS later in this section If you would like to recall exit settings for the selected driver see RECALL EXIT SET
430. station and weigh your vehicle Your dealer can help you with this 4 36 Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for either the front or rear axle And if you do have a heavy load you should spread it out Do not carry more than 141 Ibs 64 kg in your trunk A CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you to lose control and crash Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle Notice Overloading your vehicle may cause damage Repairs would not be covered by your warranty Do not overload your vehicle If you put things inside your vehicle like suitcases tools packages or anything else they will go as fast as the vehicle goes If you have to stop or turn quickly or if there is a crash they will keep going A CAUTION Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn or in a crash e Put things in the trunk of your vehicle In a trunk put them as far forward as you can Try to spread the weight evenly Never stack heavier things like suitcases inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle When you carry s
431. stem parts For example just a few drops of only See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on mineral based oil such as engine oil in your page 6 12 brake system can damage brake system parts so badly that they will have to be replaced Do not let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it This will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir e If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle s painted A surfaces the paint finish can be damaged Be CAUTION careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle If o you do wash it off immediately See Washing Your Vehicle on page 5 98 With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake system your brakes may not work well or they may not even work at all This could cause a crash Always use the proper brake fluid 5 43 Brake Wear Your vehicle has four wheel disc brakes Disc brake pads have built in wear indicators that make a high pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed The sound may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly A CAUTION The brake wear warning sound means that soon your brakes will not work well That could lead to an accident When you hear the brake wear warning sound have your vehicle serviced Notice Continuing to drive with worn out brake pads could resul
432. sture sensor is mounted on the interior side of the windshield behind the rearview mirror It is used to automatically operate the wipers by monitoring the amount of moisture build up on the windshield Wipes occur as needed to clear the windshield depending on driving conditions and the sensitivity setting In light rain or snow fewer wipes will occur In heavy rain or snow wipes will occur more frequently The Rainsense wipers operate in a delay mode as well as a continuous low or high speed as needed If the system is left on for long periods of time occasional wipes may occur without any moisture on the windshield This is normal and indicates that the Rainsense system is activated To activate the Rainsense system turn the wiper band to delay mode and select one of the four sensitivity levels indicated on the wiper stalk The position closest to off is the lowest sensitivity setting level one This allows more rain or snow to collect on the windshield between wipes Turning the wiper band away from you to higher sensitivity levels increases the sensitivity of the system and frequency of wipes The highest sensitivity setting level four is closest to low A single wipe will occur each time you turn the wiper stalk to a higher sensitivity level to indicate that the sensitivity level has been increased Notice Going through an automatic car wash with the wipers on can damage them Turn the wipers off when going through
433. suddenly causing a crash Use only radial ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle If you must replace your vehicle s tires with those that do not have a TPC Spec number make sure they are the same size load range speed rating and construction type radial and bias belted tires as your vehicle s original tires 5 73 Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system may give an inaccurate low pressure warning if non TPC Spec rated tires are installed on it Non TPC Spec rated tires may give a low pressure warning that is higher or lower than the proper warning level you would get with TPC Spec rated tires See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5 67 Your vehicle s original equipment tires are listed on the Tire and Loading Information Label This label is attached to the vehicle s center pillar B pillar See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 32 for more information about the Tire and Loading Information Label and its location on your vehicle Vehicles that have performance tires P235 50R17 95V front axle and P255 45R17 98V rear axle are mounted on wheels with different rim widths The front axle tires are mounted on rims 7 5 inches 19 05 cm wide and the rear axle tires require wheels with a minimum rim width of 8 inches 20 32 cm The original equipment wheels designed for P255 45R17 98V size tires are etched with the words REAR ONLY When replacing P255 45R17 98V size tires have them mounted on wheels
434. t forces In a crash the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured A belt must be used by only one person at a time 1 27 Q What if a child is wearing a lap shoulder belt but the child is so small that the shoulder belt A CAUTION is very close to the child s face or neck A If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window Never do this move the child toward the center of the vehicle Also see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides on page 1 23 If the child is sitting in the center rear seat passenger position move the child toward the safety belt buckle In either case be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child s shoulder Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap shoulder belt but the shoulder part is behind the child If the child wears the belt in this way in a crash the child might slide under the belt The belt s force would then be applied so that in a crash the child s upper body would right on the child s abdomen That could cause have the restraint the belts provide serious or fatal injuries Wherever the child sits the lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the child s thighs This applies belt force to the child s pelvic bones in a crash 1 28 Infants and Young Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection This includes A CAUTION infants and all other children Neither the distance traveled nor the age an
435. t tire try to avoid potholes that could damage your wheel and require replacement of it Some road hazards can damage a tire beyond repair This damage could occur even before you have driven on the tire in a deflated condition When a tire has been damaged or if you have driven any distance on a deflated run flat tire check with an authorized run flat tire service center as soon as possible to determine whether the tire can be repaired or should be replaced To maintain your vehicle s run flat feature all replacement tires must be self supporting tires To locate the nearest GM or authorized run flat servicing facility call Roadside Service See Roadside Service on page 7 5 for details A CAUTION Run flat tires are constructed differently than other tires and could explode during improper service You or others could be injured or killed if you attempt to repair replace dismount or mount a run flat tire Let only an authorized run flat service center repair replace dismount and mount run flat tires The valve stems on your vehicle s run flat tires have sensors that are part of the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS These sensors contain batteries which are designed to last for 10 years under normal driving conditions See your GM dealer if the TPMS sensors or a wheel ever need replacement Notice Using liquid sealants can damage the tire valves and tire pressure monitor sensors in your vehicle s run flat
436. t full throttle This helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads e Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer Do not drive faster than the maximum posted speed for trailers or no more than 55 mph 90 km h to save wear on your vehicle s parts Three important considerations have to do with weight e the weight of the trailer e the weight of the trailer tongue e and the total weight on your vehicle s tires Weight of the Trailer How heavy can a trailer safely be It should never weigh more than 1 000 Ibs 450 kg These are total maximum weights including the load But even that can be too heavy The STS V is not rated or designed to tow any trailer It depends on how you plan to use your rig For example speed altitude road grades outside temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important It can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry See Weight of the Trailer Tongue later in this section for more information Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required trailering equipment The weight of additional optional equipment passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight 4 41 You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice or
437. t if a safety belt is not long enough your dealer will order you an extender It is free When you go in to order it take the heaviest coat you will wear so the extender will be long enough for you To help avoid personal injury do not let someone else use it and use it only for the seat it is made to fit The extender has been designed for adults Never use it for securing child seats To wear it just attach it to the regular safety belt For more information see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender 1 26 Child Restraints Older Children Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle s safety belts Q What is the proper way to wear safety belts A An older child should wear a lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips just touching the top of the thighs It should never be worn over the abdomen which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear seat In a crash children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up or can be thrown out of the vehicle Older children need to use safety belts properly A CAUTION Never do this Here two children are wearing the same belt The belt can not properly spread the impac
438. t in costly brake repair 5 44 Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation When tires are rotated inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torque specifications Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets Brake Pedal Travel See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel This could be a sign of brake trouble Brake Adjustment Every time you apply the brakes with or without the vehicle moving your brakes adjust for wear Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a vehicle is complex Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking Your vehicle was designed and tested with top quality GM brake parts When you replace parts of your braking system for example when your brake linings wear down and you need new ones put in be sure you get new approved replacement parts If you do not your brakes may no longer work properly For example if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle the balance between your front and rear brakes can change for the worse The braking performance you have
439. t really is Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two lane roads Reconsider before passing the next vehicle Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly Even though the brake lamps are not flashing it may be slowing down or starting to turn If you are being passed make it easy for the following driver to get ahead of you Perhaps you can ease a little to the right Loss of Control Let us review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems brakes steering and acceleration do not have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked In any emergency do not give up Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger Skidding In a skid a driver can lose control of the vehicle Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions and by not overdriving those conditions But skids are always possible The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle s three control systems In the braking skid your wheels are not rolling In the steering or cornering skid too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force And in the acceleration skid too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal Remember Any traction control system helps avoid only th
440. t the speaker will not be damaged Clean spots with just water and mild soap Care of Safety Belts Keep belts clean and dry A CAUTION Do not bleach or dye safety belts If you do it may severely weaken them In a crash they might not be able to provide adequate protection Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water Weatherstrips Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth During very cold damp weather frequent application may be required See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 5 97 Washing Your Vehicle The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty depth of color gloss retention and durability The best way to preserve the vehicle s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun Use a car washing soap Do not use strong soaps or chemical detergents Be sure to rinse the vehicle well removing all soap residue completely GM approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer See Vehicle Care Appearance Materials on page 5 102 Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface or they could stain Dry the finish with a soft clean chamois or an all cotton towel to av
441. t to shift into second gear A higher gear allows you to gain more traction on slippery surfaces Parking Brake The parking brake pedal is located on the lower portion of the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel This vehicle has a push to release parking brake pedal To set the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot and push the parking brake pedal down with your left foot If the ignition is on the brake system warning light on the instrument panel cluster should come on If it does not you need to have your vehicle serviced See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 64 for more information 2 35 To release the parking brake hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and push the parking brake pedal with your left foot When you lift your left foot the parking brake pedal will follow it to the released position Notice Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts Verify that the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off before driving A warning chime will sound if the parking brake is set the ignition is on and the vehicle begins to move To stop the chime fully release the parking brake If you are towing a trailer and parking on a hill see Towing a Trailer STS Only on page 4 40 for more information 2 36 Shifting Into Park P A CAUTION It can be
442. t your needs For more information press the OnStar button to speak with an advisor 2 45 Directions and Connections Plan e Advanced Automatic Collision Notification e Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment e Emergency Services e Roadside Assistance e Stolen Vehicle Tracking e AccidentAssist e Remote Door Unlock Vehicle Alert e Remote Diagnostics e Online Concierge e Driving Directions e RideAssist e Information and Convenience Services OnStar Personal Calling As an OnStar subscriber the Personal Calling capability allows you to make hands free calls using a wireless system that is integrated into the vehicle Calls can be placed nationwide using simple voice commands with no additional contracts and no additional roaming charges To find out more about OnStar Personal Calling refer to the OnStar User s Guide in the vehicle s glove box visit www onstar com or www onstar ca or speak to an OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar button or calling 1 888 4 ONSTAR 1 888 466 7827 2 46 OnStar Virtual Advisor Your vehicle may have Virtual Advisor It is a feature of OnStar Personal Calling that uses your minutes to access weather local traffic reports and sports updates By pressing the phone button and giving a few simple voice commands you can browse through the various topics Customize your information profile at www myonstar com See the OnStar user s guide for more information OnStar S
443. teering Wheel Controls Your vehicle may be equipped with a Talk Mute bd button that can be used to interact with OnStar See the Audio Steering Wheel Control section for your specific vehicle operation When calling into voice mail systems or to dial directory numbers press this button once wait for the response say the number s to be dialed wait for the number s to be repeated and then say dial See the OnStar User s Guide for more information Universal Home Remote System aO OC The Universal Home Remote System a combined universal transmitter and receiver provides a way to replace up to three hand held transmitters used to activate devices such as gate operators garage door openers entry door locks security systems and home lighting The Universal Home Remote transmitter will be disabled and will not work if the valet lockout switch is on See Valet Lockout Switch on page 2 23 If your vehicle is equipped with the Universal Home Remote Transmitter it complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must a
444. tellibeam and OnStar Your vehicle may have an Intellibeam inside rearview mirror with OnStar controls For more information about OnStar see OnStar System on page 2 45 To turn on and enable Intellibeam press and release the Intellibeam button on the inside rear view mirror If the vehicle has the IntelliBeam Intelligent High Beam Headlamp Control System the on off button can also be used to turn off or reset this system See IntelliBeam Intelligent High Beam Headlamp Control System under Headlamps on page 3 31 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview mirror D On Off Press and hold the button located on the lower left side of the mirror face for about three seconds to turn the automatic dimming feature on or off The indicator light will illuminate when this feature is active The automatic dimming feature is active each time the vehicle is started Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview mirror that also contains OnStar controls For more information on OnStar see OnStar System on page 2 45 Mirror Operation b On Off Press and hold the button located on the lower left side of the mirror face for about three seconds to turn the automatic dimming feature on or off The indicator light will illuminate when this feature is active The automatic dimming feature is active e
445. tely If the vehicle is locked using the keyless access transmitter and the trunk lid hood or a door is open or not closed completely the security light will flash for 60 seconds and then turn off At this time the theft deterrent system is armed but the alarm will not sound if the trunk lid hood or door that was not closed completely is tampered with or opened The alarm will sound for the trunk lid hood or a door that was completely closed at the time the vehicle was locked using the keyless access transmitter Open the door Lock the door with the power door lock switch or lock button on the keyless access transmitter The security light should flash Close the door The security light will stop flashing and stay on After 30 seconds the light should turn off the theft deterrent system is armed Passive Arming if activated through the vehicle personalization feature will arm the system automatically after you close the door and take at least one keyless access transmitter with you The security light will turn on After 60 seconds the light should turn off The theft deterrent system is armed See Vehicle Personalization on page 2 53 2 21 If a door hood or the trunk is opened without the keyless access transmitter the horn will sound for 30 seconds and the lamps will flash for two minutes The vehicle cannot be started without a keyless access transmitter The Theft Deterrent system will not arm if e The key is used t
446. tem Warning Light a an 3 64 Brako Sanoo a e ueeemnnennonns 5 42 Braking ieron o E eee cee 4 6 Braking in Emergencies asascsesesrerrrrnnrerersnne 4 9 Break In New Vehicle cccccceeeeeeeeeeees 2 24 Bulb Replacement errriiri nreo 5 54 Back Up Lamps msntcsteectntes ccciseanearenesnieeatasates 5 54 Halogen BUDS siriiasienis ssie ened tb ce ciweteenuceces 5 54 High Intensity Discharge HID Lighting 5 54 Replacement Bulbs eceeeeeeeeeee renee es 5 55 Buying New TireS ceceeeeeeeeeeneceeeeeeeeeeeees 5 72 California Fuel sisariensa iinan 5 6 California Proposition 65 Warning eeeeee 5 3 Canadian Owners ccceeeeeceee eee eee eee eeeeeeeeeneea ees ii Capacities and Specifications ceeeee 5 116 Carbon Monoxide 00 2 14 2 39 4 27 4 40 Care of Safety BeltS eccceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 97 Your CD Player it stcv2 sieviuacsiiness ne eitee cies 3 122 YOUR CDS aaen EAEE eects 3 121 Center Console Storage Area ceeeeeeeee trees 2 51 Chains We renaire ra r E EAE 5 78 Charging System Light c eeeeeeeeeeeee eee 3 63 Check Engine Light seitse nkaona ai 3 67 Checking Things Under the Hood 6 08 5 10 Chemical Paint Spotting ceeeeeeeee eee e ees 5 101 Child Restraints Child Restraint Systems cceeeeeeeeee eee 1 32 Infants and Young Children s 1
447. ten to each track for 10 seconds The CD will go to a track play for 10 seconds then go on to the next track Press this button again to stop scanning SRCE Source Press this button to select a source either radio or CD The CD must be loaded to select the source and to play CD will appear on the display if a CD is loaded If a CD is not loaded the display will not change from the radio source A Eject Press this button to stop a CD when it is playing or to eject a CD when it is not playing Eject may be activated with the ignition and the radio off 3 106 Using the Six Disc CD Changer The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch 8 cm single CDs with an adapter ring Full size CDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner If playing a CD R the sound quality may be reduced due to CD R quality the method of recording the quality of the music that has been recorded and the way the CD R has been handled There may be an increase in skipping difficulty in finding tracks and or difficulty in loading and ejecting If these problems occur check the bottom surface of the CD If the surface of the CD is damaged such as cracked broken or scratched the CD will not play properly If the surface of the CD is soiled see Care of Your CDs later in this section If there is no apparent damage try a known good CD Do not add any label to a CD it could get caught in the CD player If a CD is recorded on a pers
448. tendant where you buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT General Motors recommends against the use of such gasolines Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the emission control system may be affected The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on If this occurs return to your authorized GM dealer for service Fuels in Foreign Countries If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada the proper fuel may be hard to find Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not be covered by your warranty To check the fuel availability ask an auto club or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you will be driving The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel door on the passenger s side of the vehicle Filling the Tank A CAUTION Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause bad injuries To help avoid injuries to you and others read and follow all the instructions on the pump island Turn off your engine when you are refueling Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle To open the fuel door apply pressure in the center of Keep sparks flames and smoking materials the rear edge of the fuel door and it will pop open away from fuel Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling your vehicl
449. ter s lock button release it and then immediately press and hold the transmitter s remote start button for at least three seconds or until the vehicle s turn signal lamps flash The vehicle s doors will be locked 3 When the vehicle starts the parking lamps will turn on and remain on while the vehicle is running 4 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 while the engine is still running to add 10 minutes of engine running If the vehicle is left running it will automatically shut off after 10 minutes unless a time extension has been done To manually shut off a remote start do any of the following e Aim the keyless access transmitter at the vehicle and press the remote start button until the parking lamps turn off e Turn on the hazard warning flashers e Press the OFF ACC button ignition switch See Ignition Positions on page 2 24 e Turn on the valet lockout switch See Valet Lockout Switch on page 2 23 When you enter the vehicle during a remote start press the brake pedal and press the start button on the keyless ignition switch to transition from remote start operation to normal vehicle operation Before the remote vehicle start system can be operated with the keyless access transmitter it must be activated The remote start system is turned on through the vehicle personalization system You can also program the remote vehicle start system to start up the vehicle s automatic climate control system If this feature is turned on
450. th ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light Freeway Driving Mile for mile freeways also called thruways parkways expressways turnpikes or superhighways are the safest of all roads But they have their own special rules The most important advice on freeway driving is Keep up with traffic and keep to the right Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers are driving Too fast or too slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane At the entrance there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp you should begin to check traffic Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed Switch on your turn signal check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow Once you are on the freeway adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass Before changing lanes check your mirrors Then use your turn signal Just before you leave the lane glance quickly over your shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in your blind spot 4 23 Once you are moving on the freeway make certain you allow a reasonable following distance
451. that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or General Motors To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 800 424 9393 or 366 0123 in the Washington D C area or write to NHTSA U S Department of Transportation Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the hotline Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government If you live in Canada and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should immediately notify Transport Canada in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited You may call them at 1 800 333 0510 or write to Transport Canada Place de Ville Tower C 330 Sparks Street Ottawa Ontario K1A ON5 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors In addition to notifying NHTSA or Transport Canada in a situation like this we certainly hope you will notify us Please call us at 1 800 458 8006 or write Cadillac Customer Assistance Center Cadillac Motor Car Division P O Box 33169 Detroit MI 48232 5169 In Canada please call us at 1 888 446 2000 Or write Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre 163 005 General Motors of Canada Limited 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Service Publications Ordering Information Service Manuals Servic
452. the airbags from working properly A Yes If you add things that change your vehicle s frame bumper system front end or side sheet metal or height they may keep the airbag system from working properly Also the airbag system may not work properly if you relocate any of the airbag sensors If you have any questions about this you should contact Customer Assistance before you modify your vehicle The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7 2 Q Because have a disability have to get my vehicle modified How can find out whether this will affect my airbag system A Changing or moving any parts of the front seats safety belts the airbag sensing and diagnostic module located under the center console or the overhead console can affect the operation of the airbag system If you have questions call Customer Assistance The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7 2 Restraint System Check Checking the Restraint Systems Now and then make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety
453. the United States and Canada Cadillac Owner Privileges Roadside Service provides several Cadillac Owner Privileges at no charge throughout your Cadillac Warranty Period 48 months 50 000 miles 80 000 km Emergency Road Service is performed on site for the following situations e Towing Service e Battery Jump Starting e Lock Out Assistance e Fuel Delivery e Flat Tire Change Covers change only e Trip Interruption If your trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure incidental expenses may be reimbursed during the 48 months 50 000 miles 80 000 km warranty period Items covered are hotel meals and rental car Roadside Service Availability Wherever you drive in the United States or Canada an advisor is available to assist you over the phone A dealer technician if available can travel to your location within a 30 mile 50 km radius of a participating Cadillac dealership If beyond this radius we will arrange to have your car towed to the nearest Cadillac dealership 7 6 Reaching Roadside Service Dial the toll free Roadside Service number 1 800 882 1112 A Roadside Service Advisor will assist you and request the following information e A description of the problem e Name home address home telephone number e Location of your Cadillac and number you are calling from e The model year Vehicle Identification Number VIN mileage and date of delivery Roadside Service for the Heari
454. the door using the inside door handle The horn will sound and the exterior lamps will flash You can turn off the alarm by pressing the unlock button on the keyless access transmitter or by starting the car If the alarm does not sound when it should check to see if the horn works The horn fuse may be blown To replace the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5 105 If the fuse does not need to be replaced you may need to have your vehicle serviced To reduce the possibility of theft always arm the Theft Deterrent system when leaving your vehicle Valet Lockout Switch The valet lockout switch is located inside the glove box eneee O Off Press the left side of the valet lockout switch to turn the lockout feature off When the lockout feature is off you can open the trunk using either the keyless access transmitter or the trunk release button located on the drivers door On Press the right side of the valet lockout switch to turn the lockout feature on When the lockout feature is turned on the trunk cannot be unlocked with the keyless access transmitter or the trunk release button located on the drivers door If the valet lockout feature is on it will also disable the remote start feature and the Universal Home Remote transmitter if equipped Locking the glove box with your key will also help to secure your vehicle See Keyless Access System Operation on page 2 5 and Trunk on page 2 14 for additiona
455. the passenger remains unbuckled and 9 the vehicle is in motion If the passenger s safety belt is buckled neither the chime nor the light will come on 3 60 Airbag Readiness Light There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel which shows the airbag symbol The system checks the airbag s electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem The system check includes the airbag sensors the airbag modules the wiring and the diagnostic module For more information on the airbag system see Airbag System on page 1 48 This light will come on when you start your vehicle and it will flash for a few seconds Then the light should go out This means the system is ready e N If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving your airbag system may not work properly Have your vehicle serviced right away Passenger Airbag Status Indicator A CAUTION Your overhead console has a passenger airbag status indicator If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle it means the airbag system may not be working properly The airbags in PASSENGER AIR BAG 7 your vehicle may not inflate in a crash or they OFF ON A BY A Ap could even inflate without a crash To help avoid injury to yourself or others have your vehicle serviced right away if the airbag readiness light
456. the system monitors the outside temperature and turns on the rear window defogger front window defogger and heated or ventilated seats if equipped See Personal Settings Menu under Vehicle Personalization on page 2 53 Laws in some local communities may restrict the use of remote starters for example requiring a person using remote start to have the vehicle in view when doing so Check local regulations for any requirements on remote starting of vehicles Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low on fuel Your vehicle may run out of fuel The remote start feature provides two separate starts each with 10 minutes of engine running If you press the remote start button on the keyless access transmitter again before the first 10 minutes of engine running time has expired 10 minutes is added to the remaining minutes For example if the remote start button is pressed again after five minutes of the engine run time 10 minutes is added and you now have 15 minutes with the engine running Once two remote starts or 20 minutes of the engine running have been provided the vehicle must be started using the keyless access with pushbutton start feature if the engine needs to be restarted See Starting the Engine on page 2 25 for more information regarding the keyless ignition The remote start feature will not operate if any of the following occur e The check engine light is displayed See Check Engine Light
457. ther exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle DRIVER UNLOCK AT OFF This feature allows the driver s door to automatically unlock when the ignition is turned off Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory it was programmed to Mode 2 The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory To program the vehicle to a different mode use the following procedure 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until DRIVER UNLOCK AT OFF is highlighted 3 Press the tune select knob to switch between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle 2 63 DOORS UNLOCK AT OFF This feature allows all of the doors to automatically unlock when the ignition is turned off Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory it was programmed to Mode 2 The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory To program the vehicle
458. tion could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration 3 69 Here are some things you need to know to help your vehicle pass an inspection Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the Check Engine light is on or not working properly To perform a Check Engine light bulb check with the keyless ignition make sure the transmitter fob is in the passenger compartment See Ignition Positions on page 2 24 Press the bottom of the ACC button on the instrument panel and hold the button down for five seconds The instrument panel including the Check Engine light will light up and the ignition will be on but the engine will not start if you press the bottom of the ACC button only briefly less than five seconds the accessory mode will be turned on but not the ignition After the bulb check be sure to press and release the ACC button again to turn the ignition off and avoid draining the vehicle s battery Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD on board diagnostic system determines that critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed by the system The vehicle would be considered not ready for inspection This can happen if you have recently replaced your battery or if your battery has run down The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical emission control systems during normal driving This may take several days of routine driving If you have done this and your vehicle still do
459. tions If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle off for service you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for the same day repair Transportation Options Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait However if you are unable to wait GM helps to minimize your inconvenience by providing several transportation options Depending on the circumstances your dealer can offer you one of the following Shuttle Service Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule This includes one way or round trip shuttle service to a destination up to 10 miles 16 km from the dealership Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement If your vehicle requires warranty repairs reimbursement of public transportation expenses may be available for up to a maximum of five days In addition should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may be available up to a five day maximum Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts Courtesy Rental Vehicle Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum amount per day and must be supported by receipts
460. to a different mode use the following procedure 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until DOORS UNLOCK AT OFF is highlighted 3 Press the tune select knob to switch between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle 2 64 DRIVER UNLOCK IN PARK The feature allows the driver s door to automatically unlock when the transmission is shifted into PARK P Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory it was programmed to Mode 2 The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory To program the vehicle to a different mode use the following procedure 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until DRIVER UNLOCK IN PARK is highlighted 3 Press the tune select knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode
461. to be sure snow does not collect there Open a window just a little on the side of the vehicle that is away from the wind This will help keep CO out Run your engine only as long as you must This saves fuel When you run the engine make it go a little faster than just idle That is push the accelerator slightly This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged You will need a well charged battery to restart the vehicle and possibly for signaling later on with your headlamps Let the heater run for a while Then shut the engine off and close the window almost all the way to preserve the heat Start the engine again and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold But do it as little as possible Preserve the fuel as long as you can To help keep warm you can get out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until help comes If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck you will need to spin the wheels but you do not want to spin your wheels too fast The method known as rocking can help you get out when you are stuck but you must use caution A CAUTION If you let your tires spin at high speed they can explode and you or others could be injured And the transmission or other parts of the vehicle can overheat That could cause an engine compartment fire or other damage
462. touch anything until the at A Ns next step The other end of the negative cable V does not go to the dead battery It goes to a heavy unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery 9 Connect the other end of the negative cable at least 18 inches 45 cm away from the dead battery but not near engine parts that move The electrical connection is just as good there and the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is much less Use a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one Your vehicle s remote negative ground location is for this purpose 6 Connect the red positive cable to the positive terminal of the dead battery Use a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one 10 Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run 7 Do not let the other end touch metal Connect it to the engine for a while the positive terminal of the good battery Use a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one 11 Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery If it will not start after a few tries it probably needs service 5 50 Notice If the jumper cables are connected or removed in the wrong order electrical shorting may occur and damage the vehicle The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct order making sure that the cables do not touch
463. trailering When you are turning with a trailer make wider turns than normal Do this so your trailer will not strike soft shoulders curbs road signs trees or other objects Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers Signal well in advance Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer When you tow a trailer your vehicle may need a different turn signal flasher and or extra wiring Check with your dealer The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change Properly hooked up the trailer lamps will also flash telling other drivers you are about to turn change lanes or stop When towing a trailer the arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out Thus you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not It is important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working Driving on Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade If you do not shift down you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer work well Climbing grades steeper than four percent at temperatures above 90 F 32 C with a loaded vehicle and trailer is not recommended The cooling system may temporarily overheat See Engine Overheating on page 5 31 Parking on Hills A CAUTION You really should not park your vehicle with a trailer attached on a hill I
464. u avoid colliding with objects such as you and they could be injured or killed parked vehicles The URPA system can detect objects Whether or not you are using rear park assist up to 5 feet 1 5 m behind the vehicle and tell you how always check carefully behind your vehicle close these objects are from your rear bumper before you back up and then watch closely as you do A CAUTION The URPA display is Even with the Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist located inside the vehicle system the driver must check carefully before above the rear window backing up The system does not operate above It has three color coded typical backing speeds of 3 mph 5 km h while lights that can be seen through the rearview mirror parking And the system does not detect or by turning around objects that are more than 5 feet 1 5 meters behind the vehicle CAUTION Continued 3 44 How the System Works URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is moved into REVERSE R and the vehicle speed is less than 3 mph 5 km h When the system turns on the three lights on the display will illuminate for one and a half seconds to let you know that the system is working If your vehicle is moving in REVERSE R at a speed greater than 3 mph 5 km h the red light will flash to remind you that the system does not work at a speed greater than 3 mph 5 km h If an object is detected at a REVERSE R speed of less than 3 mph 5 km h one of the fol
465. udio System s on page 3 94 and Navigation Radio System on page 3 115 F D Audio Steering Wheel Controls If Equipped See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3 119 Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Button If Equipped See Adaptive Cruise Control on page 3 19 Heated Steering Wheel Button If Equipped See Heated Steering Wheel on page 3 7 Horn See Horn on page 3 6 Ignition Switch See Ignition Positions on page 2 24 Climate Control System See Dual Climate Control System on page 3 48 Hazard Warning Flasher Button See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3 6 Cupholders See Cupholder s on page 2 51 Traction Control System Button See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 9 Shift Lever See Automatic Transmission Operation STS on page 2 28 or Automatic Transmission Operation STS V on page 2 32 Glove Box See Glove Box on page 2 51 Hazard Warning Flashers Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others They also let police know you have a problem Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off The hazard warning flasher button is located on the console near the shift lever See Instrument Panel Overview on page 3 4 Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your key is in and even if the key is not in Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off Press the button again to turn the flashers off When the hazard wa
466. uide After you move the height adjuster to where you want it try to move it down without pressing the release button to make sure it has locked into position 1 20 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone including pregnant women Like all occupants they are more likely to be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts A pregnant woman should wear a lap shoulder belt and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible below the rounding throughout the pregnancy The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother When a safety belt is worn properly it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash For pregnant women as for anyone the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly Right Front Passenger Position To learn how to wear the right front passenger s safety belt properly see Driver Position on page 1 13 The right front passenger s safety belt works the same way as the driver s safety belt except for one thing If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the way you will engage the child restraint locking feature If this happens just let the belt go back all the way and start again Rear Seat Passengers It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts Rear p
467. umatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Rim A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated Sidewall The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead Speed Rating An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate Traction The friction between the tire and the road surface The amount of grip provided Tread The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road Treadwear Indicators Narrow bands sometimes called wear bars that show across the tread of a tire when only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm of tread remains See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5 72 UTQGS Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire s traction temperature and treadwear Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire See Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5 75 Vehicle Capacity Weight The number of designated seating positions multiplied by 150 Ibs 68 kg plus the rated cargo load See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 32 Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire Load on an individual tire due to curb weight accessory weight occupant weight and cargo weight Vehicle Placard A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the vehi
468. ur vehicle s handling capabilities will be reduced during severe maneuvers If you drive too fast you could lose control of your vehicle You or others could be injured Do not drive over 55 mph 90 km h when the low tire warning light is displayed Drive cautiously and check your tire pressures as soon as you can 5 82 See Run Flat Tires STS V on page 5 64 and Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5 67 for additional information A CAUTION Special tools and procedures are required to service a run flat tire If these special tools and procedures are not used you or others could be injured and your vehicle could be damaged Always be sure the proper tools and procedures as described in the service manual are used To order a service manual see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7 14 Changing a Flat Tire STS Only If you have an STS V model there is no spare tire and no tire changing equipment Your vehicle is equipped with run flat tires See Run Flat Tires STS V on page 5 64 for more information If you have an STS model follow the directions for changing a flat tire in this section If a tire goes flat avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place Turn on your vehicle s hazard warning flashers See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3 6 for more information 5 83 When your vehicle has a flat tire use the following n example as a guide to assist you i
469. ured in the rear seat even if the airbag is off If you need to secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint ina rear seat Wherever you install a child restraint be sure to secure the child restraint properly Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle even when no child is in it Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH Your vehicle has the LATCH system The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving or in a crash This system is designed to make installation of a child restraint easier The LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system Make sure that a LATCH compatible child restraint is properly installed using the anchors or use the vehicle s safety belts to secure the restraint following the instructions that came with that restraint and also the instructions in this manual When installing a child restraint with a top tether you must also use either the lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the child restraint A child restraint must never be attached using only the top tether and anchor In order to use the LATCH system in your
470. urn off the right front passenger s frontal airbag depending upon the person s seating posture and body build Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there is an airbag for that person If a person of adult size is sitting in the right front passenger s seat but the off indicator is lit it could be because that person is not sitting properly in the seat If this happens turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the fully upright position then sit upright in the seat centered on the seat cushion with the person s legs comfortably extended Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for about two minutes This will allow the system to detect that person and then enable the passenger s airbag A CAUTION If the airbag readiness light in the instrument panel cluster ever comes on and stays on it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system If this ever happens have the vehicle serviced promptly because an adult size person sitting in the right front passenger s seat may not have the protection of the frontal airbag See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 60 for more on this including important safety information A thick layer of additional material such as a blanket or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers seat heaters and seat massagers can affect how well the passenger sensing
471. urn to normal operation once the obstruction or condition is removed Express Window Anti Pinch Override A CAUTION If express override is activated the window will not reverse automatically You or others could be injured and the window could be damaged Before you use express override make sure that all people and obstructions are clear of the window path In an emergency the anti pinch feature can be overridden in a supervised mode Hold the window switch all the way up in the express position The window will rise for as long as the switch is held Once the switch is released the express mode is re activated In this mode the window can still close on an object in its path Use care when using the override mode Window Lockout max Window Lockout The rear window lockout button is located on the driver s door armrest near the window switches Press this button to disable the rear window controls The light on the button will illuminate indicating that the feature is in use The rear windows can be raised or lowered using the driver s window switches when the lockout feature is on To restore power to the rear windows press the button again The light on the button will go out The front passenger window can be programmed to be disabled using the window lockout button See Vehicle Personalization on page 2 53 Secure Car Feature The windows can be closed by pressing the lock button on the keyless access t
472. urs prior to starting your vehicle At temperatures above 32 F 0 C use of the coolant heater is not required Your vehicle may also have an internal thermostat in the plug end of the cord This will prevent operation of the engine coolant heater when the temperature is at or above 0 F 18 C as noted on the cord To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 1 Turn off the engine 2 Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord For the 3 6L V6 engine the cord is located in the engine compartment on the passenger s side of the vehicle in front of the fuse block For the 4 6L V8 engine the cord is located in the engine compartment on the driver s side of the vehicle near the inner fender and above the strut For the 4 4L V8 engine the cord is located in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger s side of the vehicle The plug will be inside the upper grille cutout 3 You must remove the plastic cap to access the plug 4 Plug it into a normal grounded 110 volt AC outlet A CAUTION Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock Also the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire You could be seriously injured Plug the cord into a properly grounded three prong 110 volt AC outlet If the cord will not reach use a heavy duty three prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps 5 Before starting the engine be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before
473. ve too far forward which would increase the chance of head and neck injury Also the belt would apply too much force to the ribs which are not as strong as shoulder bones You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen Q What is wrong with this A CAUTION You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt In a crash you would not have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces If a belt is twisted make it straight so it can work properly or ask your dealer to fix it aN VESTN oz AA p The belt is twisted across the body To unlatch the belt just push the button on the buckle When the seatbelt is unbuckled or when the vehicle is turned off the tension reducer will deactivate The belt should go back out of the way 1 19 Before you close the door be sure the belt is out of the way If you slam the door on it you can damage both the belt and your vehicle Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment Before you begin to drive move the shoulder belt height adjuster to the height that is right for you Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered on your shoulder The belt should be away from your face and neck but not falling off your shoulder To move it down press the release button A and move the height adjuster to the desired position You can move the height adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder belt g
474. ve your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer SERVICE TIRE MONITOR If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor TPM system this message will display if the TPM system is not working properly Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer as soon as possible SERVICE THEFT SYSTEM This message will display when there is a problem with the hood open and closed switches The switches may need to be replaced When this message is displayed the theft deterrent system will still be protecting the interior of the vehicle however the hood area will not be protected at this time Also the remote start function will not work when this message appears See your GM dealer for service SERVICE TRANSMISSION This message will display when there is a problem with the transmission of your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer 3 89 SERVICE VEHICLE SOON This message will display when a non emissions related malfunction occurs Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer as soon as possible SPEED LIMITED TO XXX This message will display when your vehicle speed is limited to XXX mph in English mode and km h in Metric mode because the vehicle detects a problem in the suspension system Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer STABILITY SYS System ACTIVE The STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message will display any time StabiliTrak is actively assisting you with directional control of the vehicle Slippery road condit
475. vehicle you need a child restraint equipped with LATCH attachments The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its attachments The following explains how to attach a child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle Your vehicle has lower anchors and top tether anchors Your child restraint may have lower attachments and a top tether Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors and attachments 1 37 Lower Anchors Top Tether Anchor Lower anchors A are metal bars built into the vehicle A top tether A C anchors the top of the child restraint There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating to the vehicle A top tether anchor is built into the position that will accommodate a child restraint with vehicle The top tether attachment B on the child lower attachments B restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child restraint during driving or in a crash 1 38 Your child restraint may have a single tether A or a dual tether C Either will have a single attachment B to secure the top tether to the anchor Some top tether equipped child restraints are designed for use with or without the top tether being attached Others require the top tether always to be attached In Canada the law requires that forward
476. vehicle has P235 50R17 95S size tires use tire chains only where legal and only when you must Use only SAE Class S type chains that are the proper size for your tires Install them on the rear tires and tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer s instructions If you can hear the chains contacting your vehicle stop and retighten them If the contact continues slow down until it stops Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage your vehicle Lifting Your Vehicle STS V A CAUTION Lifting a vehicle can cause an injury The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you or other people You and they could be badly injured Find a level place to lift your vehicle To help prevent the vehicle from moving 1 Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot 2 Move the shift lever in PARK P by pressing the button on the front of the shift lever while pushing the lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle Release the button With your right foot still holding the brake pedal down set the parking brake with your left foot 4 Turn off the engine To be even more certain the vehicle will not move you can put blocks in front of and behind the wheels Also see Shifting Into Park P on page 2 36 and Parking Brake on page 2 35 for additional information A CAUTION Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is d
477. vehicles or other objects A CAUTION Adaptive Cruise Control may not detect and react to stationary or slow moving vehicles or other objects ahead of you Your vehicle may accelerate toward objects such as a stopped vehicle that suddenly appears after the lead vehicle changes lanes Your complete attention is always required while driving and you should be ready to take action and apply the brakes Low Speed Deactivation If your speed falls below 20 mph 32 km h while following a vehicle ahead Adaptive Cruise Control will begin to disengage The driver alert symbol on the HUD will flash and the warning beep will sound The driver must take action since Adaptive Cruise Control will not slow the vehicle to a stop Deactivation When Head Up Display is Turned Off If you turn the HUD off when Adaptive Cruise Control is engaged it will begin to disengage A warning beep will sound and the message RADAR CRUISE NOT READY will appear on the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 79 for additional information If Adaptive Cruise Control was braking when the HUD is turned off the braking will continue briefly Passing a Vehicle Adaptive Cruise Control Override If you need to increase speed to pass a vehicle use the accelerator pedal While you are doing this the system will not automatically apply the brakes A PEDAL APPLIED ACC OVERRIDE message will appear on the HUD See Head Up D
478. ver 2 Remove the three fasteners that hold the filter access cover in place and slide the cover off 3 To access the filter remove the black plastic water deflector by lifting the outboard edge of the deflector to release the retention tab 3 56 4 Lift the inboard edge of the deflector to release the retention tab 5 Lift and slide the water deflector toward the inboard side and remove it 6 The top edge of the filter should be visible Reach in and lift the filter out pulling upward and toward the front of the vehicle 7 Insert the new air filter by sliding it back into place Make sure the arrow on the filter is pointing toward the passenger compartment Reverse steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the water deflector filter cover and the hood seal Warning Lights Gages and Indicators This part describes the warning lights and gages that may be on your vehicle The pictures will help you locate them Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement Paying attention to your warning lights and gages could also save you or others from injury Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle s functions As you will see in the details on the next few pages some warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let you know they re working If you are familiar with this
479. verheating eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 31 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode ceceeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eenes 5 32 Cooling System eceeeeeee eee eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 5 33 Power Steering Fluid c eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 40 Windshield Washer Fluid ceeeeeeeeee eee es 5 41 Brak S tc 22 22 cacsiaoricies den acaansdatecgcenensnseacakensetans 5 42 Battery occecectvecdubs E E EN E E ES 5 45 JUMP Starting cece cece eee iiaa 5 46 All Wheel Drive 0 ccceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeee es 5 51 Rear AxIG c c c2ds sc scr atincttinceenataannanetevataakanntear 5 52 Front Axle eano aea ae eetia nites 5 53 Bulb Replacement 1 5 54 High Intensity Discharge HID Lighting 5 54 Halogen Bulls iii cc ciicicces aonan mie igon 5 54 Back Up Lamp i ccicadetecaconctitarsaaensemenpennes candd 5 54 Windshield Replacement eeeee 5 56 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement 5 56 MNES aaa E OEE 5 57 Tire Sidewall Labeling ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 59 Tire Terminology and Definitions 04 5 61 Run Flat Tires STS V 2 00 0 cseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 64 Inflation Tire Pressure secese 5 65 Tire Pressure Monitor System 6 eeeeeeeee 5 67 Tire Inspection and Rotation cee 5 70 When It Is Time for New Tires ccce 5 72 Buying New Tires cceeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeees 5 72 Differ
480. w This feature is on all windows It allows you to lower the window all the way without continuously pressing the switch Press the front of the switch to the second position and release If you want to stop the window as it is lowering briefly pull up the switch Express Up Window This feature is on all windows It allows you to raise the window all the way without continuously lifting the switch Lift the front of the switch briefly to activate the express up feature If you want to stop the window as it is raising briefly press the switch Programming the Power Windows If the battery on your vehicle has been recharged disconnected or is not working you will need to reprogram each window for the express up feature to work To program each window follow these steps 1 With the ignition on or in ACC or while RAP is active close all doors 2 Press and hold the power window switch until the window has fully opened 3 Continue holding the switch for approximately two seconds 4 Pull up the power window switch until the window is fully closed The window is now programmed Repeat the process for all windows Express Window Anti Pinch Feature If any object is in the path of the window when the express up is active the window will stop at the obstruction and auto reverse to a preset factory position Weather conditions such as severe icing may also cause the window to auto reverse The window will ret
481. weight it may properly carry the Tire and Loading Information label and the Certification label A CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you to lose control and crash Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle Tire and Loading Information Label SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Label Example A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the vehicle s center pillar B pillar With the driver s door open you will find the label attached below the door lock post striker The tire and loading information label shows the number of occupant seating positions A and the maximum vehicle capacity weight B in kilograms and pounds The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the tire size of the original equipment tires C and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures D For more information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5 57 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 65 There is also important loading information on the Certification label It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR and the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for the front and rear axle see Certification Label later in this section
482. wer outlets The outlets can be used to plug in electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone CB radio etc Your vehicle has one outlet in front of the center console one in the center console lid and there may be an additional outlet in the rear of the center console Your vehicle may have a small cap that must be removed to access the accessory power outlet If it does when not using the outlet be sure to cover it with the protective cap Notice Leaving electrical equipment on for extended periods will drain the battery Always turn off electrical equipment when not in use and do not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum amperage rating 3 46 Certain accessory power plugs may not be compatible to the accessory power outlet and could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses If you experience a problem see your dealer for additional information on the accessory power outlets Notice Adding any electrical equipment to your vehicle may damage it or keep other components from working as they should The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Do not use equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating Check with your dealer before adding electrical equipment Follow the proper installation instructions that are included with any electrical equipment you install Notice Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from th
483. with a minimum width of 8 inches 20 32 cm and marked REAR ONLY See Wheel Replacement on page 5 76 5 74 Different Size Tires and Wheels If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than your original equipment wheels and tires this may affect the way your vehicle performs including its braking ride and handling characteristics stability and resistance to rollover Additionally if your vehicle has electronic systems such as antilock brakes traction control and electronic stability control the performance of these systems can be affected A CAUTION If you add different sized wheels your vehicle may not provide an acceptable level of performance and safety if tires not recommended for those wheels are selected You may increase the chance that you will crash and suffer serious injury Only use GM specific wheel and tire systems developed for your vehicle and have them properly installed by a GM certified technician See Buying New Tires on page 5 72 and Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 for additional information Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration which grades tires by treadwear traction and temperature
484. work If it is not 5 mph higher switch cruise switch off then on and then reset your speed using the set button Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two ways to reduce your speed while using cruise control e Press in the button at the end of the lever until you reach the lower speed you want then release it e To slow down in very small amounts briefly press the set button Each time you do this you ll go about 1 mph 1 6 km h slower Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed When you take your foot off the pedal your vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier Using Cruise Control on Hills How well your cruise control will work on hills depends upon your speed load and the steepness of the hills When going up steep hills you may have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed When going downhill you may have to brake to keep your speed down Applying the brake will take you out of cruise control If you need to apply the brake due to the grade of the downhill slope you may not want to attempt to use your cruise control feature Ending Cruise Control To end a cruise control session step lightly on the brake pedal Stepping on the brake pedal will end the current cruise control session only Move the cruise control switch to off to turn off the system completely Erasing Speed Memory When y
485. wsntercee decapces neces cdonns ania 2 70 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror 2 44 Outside Convex Mirror ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenee 2 44 Outside Parallel Park Assist Mirror 2 44 Outside Power Heated Mirrors s 2 43 MY GMEIAK COM sieis enuei nnne n eo e sates 7 3 N Navigation Radio System see Navigation Manual eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 3 115 New Vehicle Break In ceceeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 24 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts 6 14 Odometer ssaa na aaa 3 59 Off Road Recovery ssesesesseeresseerrrerierererese 4 15 Oil ENGINE eiia e NN 5 18 Pressure Light ea ciscc ccicedt ceteive ioone enidan 3 70 Oil Engine Oil Life System cece ees 5 24 Older Children Restraints cccccceeeeeee es 1 26 Online Owner Center ccceceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 7 3 OnStar System see OnStar Manual 2 45 Other Warning Devices 6 ceeeeeeeeeeee eee eee tees 3 6 Outlet Adjustment ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 54 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ccecce 2 44 Convex MIOT ssr rariora eee n E 2 44 Parallel Park Assist Mirror 2 eeeees 2 44 Power Heated Mirrors 0 cceeeeeeeeeeeee es 2 43 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode 5 32 Owner Checks and Services 0 eeeeeeeeeeeee eens 6 8 Owners Canadian ssis ccscnss acsesdiecissecsecccieaet ieiex
486. y choose to use middle grade 89 octane unleaded gasoline If the octane rating is less than 87 you may notice an audible knocking noise when you drive commonly referred to as spark knock If this occurs use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking your engine needs service If your vehicle has the 4 6L V8 engine VIN Code A use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 91 or higher You may also use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher but your vehicle s acceleration may be slightly reduced and you may notice a slight audible knocking noise commonly referred to as spark knock If the octane is less than 87 you may notice a heavy knocking noise when you drive If this occurs use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible Otherwise you might damage your engine If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking your engine needs service If your vehicle has the 4 4L V8 engine VIN Code D use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 91 or higher For best performance use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 93 In an emergency you can use regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or higher If 87 octane fuel is used do not perform any aggressive driving maneuvers such as wide open throttle ap
487. y rust or dirt from the places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if needed to get all the rust or dirt off 5 89 Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts If you do the nuts might come loose Your wheel could fall off causing a serious accident 10 Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts mounting surfaces and spare wheel 11 Install the spare tire 12 Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel 13 Tighten each wheel nut by turning it clockwise with your hand until the wheel is held against the hub 5 90 14 Lower the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise Lower the jack completely 15 Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross AN CAUTION 1 sequence as shown Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose and even come off This could lead to an accident Be sure to use the correct wheel ay Or nuts If you have to replace them be sure to get new GM original equipment wheel nuts Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened wiih a torque wrenen bg the Notice Wheel covers will not fit on your compact proper torque specification See Capacities spare If you try to put a wheel cover on the compact and Specifications on page 5 116 for wheel nut spare you coul
488. you can write us at Cadillac Customer Assistance Center Cadillac Motor Car Division P O Box 33169 Detroit MI 48232 5169 In Canada write to General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load A of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of your vehicle The Gross Vehicle Weight GVW includes the curb weight of the vehicle any cargo you may carry in it and the people who will be riding in the vehicle And if you tow a trailer you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight too See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 32 for more information about your vehicle s maximum load capacity 4 42 If you are using a weight carrying hitch or a weight distributing hitch the trailer tongue A should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight B After you have loaded your trailer weigh the trailer and then the tongue separately to see if the weights are proper If they are not you may be able to get them right simply by moving some items around in the trailer Total Weight on Your Vehicle s Tires Be sure your vehicle s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires You will find these numbers on the Tire and Loading Information See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 32 Then be sure you d
489. you select this item the following submenu appears e DRIVER 1 e DRIVER 2 e RECALL DRIVER SETTINGS e STORE DRIVER SETTINGS For more information on the DRIVER SELECTION submenu item see Recalling Driver Settings and Storing Driver Settings under Memory Seat Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 2 70 DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS When you select this item the following submenu appears e RECALL EXIT SETTINGS e STORE EXIT SETTINGS For more information on the DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS submenu item see Recalling Exit Settings and Storing Exit Settings under Memory Seat Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 2 70 CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS Base Audio System This item allows you to customize the functions of the four configurable keys located to the left and right of the audio display See Configurable Radio Display Keys under Radio with CD on page 3 96 for programming information Theft Deterrent Feature THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of your vehicle s radio The feature works automatically by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number VIN If the radio is moved to a different vehicle it will not operate If the radio is removed from your vehicle the original VIN in the radio can be used to trace the radio back to your vehicle With THEFTLOCK activated the radio will not operate if stolen Audio Steering Wheel Controls The audio steering wheel controls may be different
490. your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor A CAUTION You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit against your body To unlatch the belt push the button on the buckle Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for some adults When installed on a shoulder belt the comfort guide positions the belt away from the neck and head There is one guide for each outboard passenger position in the rear seat Here is how to install a comfort guide and use the safety belt 1 Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of the seatback and the interior body to remove the guide from its storage clip 1 23 2 Slide the guide under and past the belt The elastic cord must be under the belt Then place the guide over the belt and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide 1 24 3 Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide on to
491. your parking brake The light will stay on if your parking brake does not release fully If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released it means you have a brake problem If the light comes on while you are driving pull off the road and stop carefully You may notice that the pedal is harder to push or the pedal may go closer to the floor It may take longer to stop If the light is still on have the vehicle towed for service See Towing Your Vehicle on page 4 37 A CAUTION Your brake system may not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to an accident If the light is still on after you have pulled off the road and stopped carefully have the vehicle towed for service Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light With the anti lock brake system the light will come on when your engine is started and may stay on for several seconds That is normal If the ABS warning light comes on and stays on there may be a problem with the antilock portion of the brake system If the red BRAKE light is not on you still have brakes but you do not have antilock brakes See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 64 If the light stays on press the ignition button to OFF ACC If the light comes on when you are driving stop as soon as possible and turn the ignition off Then start the engine again to reset the system If the light still stays on
492. your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement You can turn the steering wheel up to one quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway Passing The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a two lane highway waits for just the right moment accelerates moves around the vehicle ahead then goes back into the right lane again A simple maneuver Not necessarily Passing another vehicle on a two lane highway is a potentially dangerous move since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds A miscalculation an error in judgment or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the worst of all traffic accidents the head on collision So here are some tips for passing e Drive ahead Look down the road to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass wait for a better time e Watch for traffic signs pavement markings and lines If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a turn or an intersection delay your pass A broken center line usually indicates it is all right to pass providing the road ahead is clear Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or a double solid line even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic Do not
493. ytime Running Lamps and Intellibeam This is a momentary switch that will spring back to the AUTO position when released An AUTOMATIC LIGHTS ON message will appear on the DIC when automatic lights are enabled or an AUTOMATIC LIGHTS OFF message will appear on the DIC when the automatic lights are disabled AUTO Automatic Turn the control to this position to put the headlamps in automatic mode AUTO mode if enabled will turn the exterior lamps on and off depending upon how much light is available outside of the vehicle Due to the momentary switch design your automatic lights may be disabled even if you are in AUTO position To enable automatic lighting do any of the following e Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to off and release the switch It will return back to the AUTO position by itself e Turn the headlamp control from the parking lamp position to AUTO e Turn the headlamp control from the headlamp position to AUTO To disable automatic lighting do any of the following e Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to off and release the switch It will return back to the AUTO position by itself e Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to the parking lamp position e Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to the headlamp position Disabling automatic lighting will disable the automatic headlamp operation DRL and Intellibeam High Beams if equipped 3 31 300 Parking Lamps Turn the control to this

Cadillac 2006 STS-V Automobile User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents